Counterpoint

User Manuals & How-To Guides for COUNTERPOINT software

** Release Notes - Version 6+

A complete listing of documentation related to the new features and enhancements found in COUNTERPOINT version 6+

** Release Notes - Version 6+

** COUNTERPOINT® Version 6+

Release Overview

The upcoming release of COUNTERPOINT will consolidate for the first time in several years a number of features that have not been considered mainstream, meaning only certain customers got certain features based on their requests. This was a strategic mistake as in many cases this has held AMS back from being more aggressive in the software development cycle. This release of Version 6+ will move all customers to the same version, making support, training and new development rollout easier and allow for more frequent updates, which is why we plan to move to a quarterly software release update schedule. Bugs will be released as completed. The listing below may well contain features you already have and use but also others you may not be aware of or have forgotten are available. All active links will take you to a more detailed overview of the specific enhancements.

 We encourage you, once settled into Version 6+ to submit to us any functionality you would like to see added or changed for consideration in a future release. We will also be releasing a list of the currently planned updates for 7.1 shortly.

Functionality & Highlights

Point-of-Sale

Enhancements to JDISPATCH:

Web order (autoecat.com) related Changes

Customer Specific Changes

Inventory Control Changes

Repair Shop Module

Purchasing / Receiving

Sales Analysis

Accounts Receivable

Accounts Payable

General Ledger

** Release Notes - Version 6+

Accounts Receivable Enhancements

Customer Maintenance

The Customer Maintenance screen has been modified to allow access to the Customer Analysis. Select “A” when the message Enter #,P(ricing),C(redit),E(di),A(nalysis) L(og),F1=accept,F2=reject is displayed on screen.

This will display the summary screen of Customer Analysis with the customer from the maintenance screen.

Another new option is the (L)og option where you can view a log of changes made to the Customer master

Customer Analysis

Several new options have been added to the Customer Analysis screen:

Summary Screen Options:

In the Summary screen of Customer Analysis the options available when a Customer is selected are D(etail),C(ustomer),N(otes),E(xit).

D - Will access the detail screen showing the invoices outstanding for the customer

C – Will go to the Customer Maintenance screen in change mode displaying the customer selected in the analysis screen.

N – Will go to the Customer Note inquiry prompting to the note type to be viewed. Pressing Enter at the note type will display all notes entered for the customer. The option to Add new notes will be available.


Detail Screen Options:

In the Detail screen of Customer Analysis the options available are E(xit),Q(uit),N(xt),P(rv),S(end),D(ate),I(nv),A(ll),O(pen)

Use of the new options:

S – Used to send an invoice electronically. When selected a prompt will display which line number, select the line number display on screen for the invoice to send. This will then display the Invoice email addresses setup for the customer. The invoice can be sent to an email on file or can be entered manually using line 99 which allows entry of the email address.

Note: Only invoices can be sent by email, not other charges such as A/R transactions or Service Charges.

D – Prompts for a start date to view invoices from.

I – Prompts for an invoice number to start at.

A – Display all invoices and payments outstanding

O – Display only open invoices outstanding

Cash Receipts Input

New options available when entering Cash Receipts are F3 to go to Customer Maintenance or F11 to go to Customer Notes. Both of these options are available after the Customer Number has been entered.

** Release Notes - Version 6+

Add Inventory from Invoicing

Definition

The option to add parts to inventory from the invoicing screen has been enhanced so when in use, non-stocked parts added to an invoice which are in the price book will automatically be added to inventory after the quantity is entered without user intervention using the category assigned on the invoice.

Processing

Billing Parameter Maintenance

Menu path System Utilities > Sales Desk > Parameter File Reset.

Screen 2

The Reorder Allowed setting for newly added parts from invoicing is controlled by the Default Reorder Allowed setting shown in field 38.

Screen 4

The setting for “Invoice Qty (F11) Key Use” must be set to “I” field 46

Sales Clerk

In the Sales Clerk maintenance, the clerk MUST be set to “Y” for Add Part #’s to Inventory.



Invoicing

When adding a non-stock part from the price book to an invoice the line will display as a “P” line to start. After the quantity is entered the part will be added to inventory using the price and description from the price book then using the price multipliers to calculate the selling prices.

A new screen will display showing a message “Adding Stocked Part” and there will be a slight pause while the part number is being added as it is added to all locations.

As the part number is added to inventory the invoice line type will change from “P” to Space.

The new part will be treated the same as any other stocked part after it has been added

** Release Notes - Version 6+

Barcode Quantities

Definition

Counterpoint has been updated to maintain package quantities by barcode for a part used when scanning parts at the point of sale and receiving.

Processing

Product Master Maintenance when selecting to “Maintain Barcodes” or Alt Barcode option allow for entry of the quantity for a Barcode.

image

When the barcode is scanned in invoicing or RF receiving the quantity on the barcode will be used.

When entering a quantity on a barcode this must be in selling units as that is how it will be received or sold.

** Release Notes - Version 6+

Base Price Automated Updates

Definition

The automation to update the Base Price is part of the nightly price updates where the system will look for files that have an effective date of today or prior and will update the Base Price for the part numbers included in the file. Also as part of this update a standard price file will be created with the effective date for the update to Canadian Cost, Price 6. Price 6 cost will be calculated using the current exchange rate for the supplier currency, plus duty applied to the part, plus any percentages assigned for Freight, Brokerage and Other Charges.

The Canadian cost and selling prices will be updated on the date assigned.

In order for the update to Canadian Cost and selling prices to from a Base price, the pricing multipliers MUST work up from Cost, Price 6.

Parameters

Default GL Accounts

System Utilities > System Set-up > Purchasing > Parameter Maintenance > Screen 3 S/O Defaults

image

System Utilities > System Set-up > Purchasing > Parameter Maintenance > Screen 2 S/O Defaults

image

All credits and debits rolling into the GL do so in Canadian dollars

Each branch has to have GL codes amended @ the Branch level


Currency Rate

Purchasing > Data Maintenance > Currency Rate

image

Foreign Exchange Rates are a global setting and can be added or changed in this screen

Fields:
  1. Code = Currency
  2. Rate = Exchange Rate
  3. Update Prices = If the currency rate has changed this should be set to Y if you want to update the selling prices based on the new rate. The update of selling prices for a currenct rate are only performed weekly.
  4. Last Update = Date that prices were last updated for this currency rate based on a change in Currency Rate

When prices are updated on a currency rate change this also includes Non-Stock products

Supplier Maintenance

Additional fields have been added to the Supplier maintenance for Freight, Brokerage and Other Charges percentages to be used in the calculation of cost from the base price. These are NOT cumulative, the value is calculated and then each value added to the cost after conversion to Canadian Currency.

The Price Level used for the Supplier must be “B” and currency other than “C”

image

PRODUCT Maintenance Screen

Inventory > Data Maintenance > Master File > Product Master

image


Fields

Base Cost/Core – Suppliers cost and core price in their currency from price file.

These prices are normally updated with a price file update but can also be entered manually when necessary.

Tax Code | Duty % | Season – Part tax code | duty % for the part which is applied into the landed cost of the goods at the time of PO receipt and when Canadian prices are calculated.

Information required for Automatic Update of base price

The information required to create the Base Price update file is:

The Base price update will apply the new Base price on the base Price Effective Date and will update the Canadian prices [prices 1 – 6] on the Canadian effective date.

** Release Notes - Version 6+

Bin Selection in Invoicing

Definition

New feature when using Multiple Bin Locations and wanting to force the users to select the Bin Location that the product is going to be picked from in order to keep the on-hand quantities for each bin location accurate.

Processing

Billing Parameters

New option added to screen 5 of the Billing Parameters “Select Bin Loc. In Invoice” would need to be set to “Y

For Counter Kits where product is kept in multiple Bin Locations the parameter “18. Kit Detail Display” on screen 3 would also need to be set to Y

Invoicing

In the invoice screen the user will be prompted to select the bin location the product will be picked from after the quantity is entered. Bin locations are displayed in descending order based on quantity on hand. Dock locations are shown at the end of the list and cannot be selected, these are information only. A line number MUST be chosen.

image

Only the Bin Location chosen will be printed on the invoice and the overall inventory of the part will be reduced and the quantity available in the chosen Bin Location.

Exceptions where this screen will not be displayed:

When selling a “C”ounter Kit the Kit components will be displayed on screen and if any of the components are located in multiple bin locations you will be prompted to select the Bin Location those parts will be pulled from. The components and the chosen Bin Locations will be printed on the invoice.

image

Invoice Print

The invoice print will only show the bin location selected for a part.

Exceptions:

Inventory Update

The on-hand quantity will be updated for the selected bin location.

The on-hand quantity will be updated for the Primary bin location:

** Release Notes - Version 6+

Branch Stock Inquiry

Definition

The Branch Stock Inquiry has been updated to allow the creation of a Stock Transfer to source product from another location. This program is designed to be a multi- purpose tool to view stock in all locations, if multi branch, as well as initiated a TRANSFER between any of the locations, not just the home branch of the user.

Processing

Branch Stock Inquiry

When in the branch stock inquiry screen either from the menu option, Sales Desk à Inventory Queries à Branch Stock, or from the Invoice screen using Shift F4 in the body of the invoice

 

 

SCRATCHPAD

The program will maintain a Scratchpad of transfer requests that have not been actioned, based on the User Login ID. This allows the option for the user to leave the program without the loss of any work they might want to action at a later time. If the scratchpad is not empty the user will be reminded each time they enter the program that they have un-actioned requests pending. If the user elects not to delete the scratchpad the program will take them to the Category Field where they can lookup other product.

Viewing SCRATCHPAD

From the Category Field the user can view the contents by pressing the F11 key. To return to the Category Field press the ENTER key with the “Q” showing in the action field.

If there are several transfer requests in the SCRATCHPAD the program will sort them by the FROM/TO sequence.

SCRATCHPAD Maintenance

To change the content of any request enter the line # which will position the cursor in the Qty Field. After the Qty is entered, simply pressing ENTER will retain the original Qty, the cursor will move to the comment line for the part number in question. This can also be changed or the F1 key can be pressed to return the cursor to the action field. The change is automatically saved.

Leaving the SCRATCHPAD

To leave the program use the ESC or F2 key from the Category Field. If there are any entries in the SCRATCHPAD the program will ask if the transfers are to be created. The Default is (Y)es but this can be changed to (N)o. A second question will be asked if the transfers were not created about whether or not the entries are to be kept or deleted. The default is (N)o. 

If the transfers are created the system will provide the document number for each transfer before leaving the program.

** Release Notes - Version 6+

Category File Listing

Processing

The category file listing has been updated to produce and extract file for import into excel. Menu path inventory > reporting > master file listings > category file.

After clicking the Close Window button in the report viewer, a new option will be displayed to view the listing in excel

Clicking on the “View Category File Listing in Excel” will open the report in excel, providing Microsoft Excel is installed on the PC.

This extract contains additional information from the printed report such as the Modern Sales and Uni-Select supplier line codes.

Clicking the Close Window button will return to the menu.

 

** Release Notes - Version 6+

Change PO Number

Process

Pick Ticket/Z Slip

The process for changing the Z Pick Ticket PO number:

Invoice

To change the Customer Purchaser Order number on an invoice

** Release Notes - Version 6+

Cheque Void Option

Cheque Void

An option has been added to allow the void of a Cheque which will reverse the G/L entries made when the cheque was updated and restore the invoices paid to the outstanding accounts payable

Cheque Void Option

Accounts Payable > Bank Reconciliation > Cheque Void

Enter the original source of the cheque “A” or “M” and the cheque number.

The date, payee and amount will be displayed based on the cheque information in the system.

This feature is only allowed for outstanding cheques.

A report of the cheques voided will be printed when you exit the screen.

For Automatic Cheques all Invoices paid by the cheque that was voided will be added back to the Accounts Payable and an entry made in the General Ledger to reverse the cheque in the current Accounts Payable fiscal period. The invoices will be available for payment is a subsequent automatic cheque run.

** Release Notes - Version 6+

Consignment Processing

Consignment Inventory

CounterPoint presents a suite of new features, enhancing the functionality of the system by creating the opportunity to process and track consignment inventory.

Pre-requisites

There are a few basic changes that must be made to the system in order for the consignment options to be activated.

General Ledger

Create a new account for the consignment inventory in General Ledger > G/L File Maintenance > Account Maintenance à Add Accounts.  This is an asset account and would normally be numbered just after the existing Inventory account. 

Add the new Consignment Inventory G/L account to the financial statements using the menu option General Ledger > Balance Sheet Maintenance.

Sales Desk

The new Consignment Inventory G/L account number must be added to Sales Desk Control > File Maintenance > GL Autopost Account Maintenance.  The new field is at the bottom of the list.

Accounts Receivable

A new flag has been added to the customer record found in Accounts Receivable > File Maintenance > Customer File Maintenance called [acct control flag].  Enter a lower case ‘c’ to any one of the 8 fields available to indicate that this customer is part of the consignment programme.

Processing

Original ‘transfer’ of consignment goods

Using Sales Desk à Invoicing/Transfers, create a consignment invoice using a transact type of ‘M’.  The paid by will automatically convert to ‘on account’ and can not be changed.  There is no difference between entering a normal invoice and entering a consignment invoice. 

Inventory will be relieved at the time of the completion of the consignment invoice and the entry will show in the cardex inquiry.  The invoice total will be $0.00 since the consigned inventory is only billed to the customer when it is replaced at the consignment site.

The G/L account for consignment inventory will be increased by the cost value of the goods on consignment and is not affected again until or unless the consignment quantity changes. 

Replacement of sold consignment goods

Since the quantity on hand at the customers site must equal the agreed upon quantity, periodic billing will be required to replace products sold.  This is done through normal invoicing procedures. 

Adjusting the consignment inventory

To increase the quantity on consignment, use another consignment invoice (type M).  If the quantity is to be decreased, then the consignment invoice is still used, but the line type is  ‘R’.  A return search is not valid for consignment goods, since they aren’t actually sold yet).

If one consignment item is being switched out for another, the consignment invoice is able to process both ‘sales’ and ‘return’ types on the same document.

Reporting

A new report has been created in Inventory Control > Inventory Reports > Additional Inventory Reports > Consignment inventory list which will provide information on all consignment products.  The report may be printed for all (or single) customer, all (or single) categories, in detail or in summary, showing costs or not.  As well as information on the quantity on consignment and the date of the original consignment invoice, the last 12-month sales quantity information is provided to assist with analysis.

If a new customer record was created for the consignment programme, the 12-month sales history will be new as well.

** Release Notes - Version 6+

Core Bank Enhancements

Review of Core Billing Process and Enhancement for billing Overdue Cores Not Charged for at Time of Sale

Selling Cores

Selling products which carry a core charge. This is a value that is contained in the product master record at cost. By default, any item that has a core value will automatically add this to the price the item is being sold at. The system has the ability to sell cores at a price other than cost by the use of the Core Markup routine found under Customer Pricing. This works on the basis of a markup over the cost price carried in the inventory master and can be applied either by a percentage or a flat dollar amount. In addition, the markup can be applied by:

Customer Core Pricing setup

When a product with a core is sold the system determines if the customer selected is set to be charged the core at the time of sale or not. This is controlled by whether a specific type of entry exists in the core markup database. An example of where customer 123456 is not to be charged for cores at the time of sale would be a record in the database showing the following:


If a customer is not to be billed for cores at time of sale on any product category one entry in the database will accomplish this.  An important point to remember though is that while one entry in the database will create the global default for a customer exceptions can be handled by additional records that control specific exceptions. An example of this could be Customer 123456 is exempt from paying for cores at the time of purchase on all categories other than products contained under Category RAY. For this category the customer might be required to pay for cores at a 50% markup over cost. A second entry in the core markup file would look like this:

Core billing

If a customer is billed the core on an invoice the system creates a record in the Core Bank database. This allows future validation for returns as it contains the invoice detail, including the qty and price charged as well as core cost. For those customers that are set up as being exempt from core charges at time of sale, or where the core charge is set to zero at the time of sale, the system will still create an entry in the core bank but with a zero in the price charged field. This results in a margin impact as the core cost is still charged against the cost of the sale.

Example

Part # 5555 sells at $50.00 and no core is charged although has a core cost of $10.00. The cost of this transaction is Average cost of $30.00 plus the $10.00 core cost for a total cost of $40.00 on the $50.00 reported as the sale amount. Had the customer been charged the core the transaction would report a higher gross margin, Sell = $60.00, Cost = $40.00.

Core Returns

A core is processed through the POS as a C line type. The user is prompted to select the invoice the core was sold on in order that the system can credit the correct price. Irrespective of whether the core was charged or not the Qty of cores outstanding is still adjusted by the Qty returned. The return can be applied against any invoice containing the part number in question that has a core qty balance outstanding.

Unbilled Core Management - Enhancement

For those customers not charged cores the system has now been enhanced to support the automatic billing of cores where the customer has exceeded the return grace period. The number of days, from the original billing date, is customer specific assuming the maintenance has been done on the customer’s master record. In addition, there is a second new customer flag that controls whether the customer would fall into the Auto Bill process or not.

Electronic Statement Set up

The customer’s master record will also contain a new transaction type of C that will allow the direction of the core statement to a unique email address. This would be set under the EDI Info section. In addition, there will be a copy of the customers email sent to a pre-determined internal email, unique by branch.

Overdue Core Billing Menu

The overdue Core Billing menu options are found through Sales Desk > Administration > Overdue Core Billing.

Overdue Core Billing Parameters

Aging dates, Statement Message and Email Subject Line along with the internal email address for statements are all controlled in the Core Billing Parameters

Processing Flow

The system will automatically retire the entry in the core bank that is carrying a zero core value based on the invoice number shown on the billing screen. In addition, a second record will be added to the core bank carrying the new invoice number and the core value as calculated above.

Internal Reporting

In addition to the customers core statement there will also be a consolidated report available for branch use that is generated at the same time as the customer’s statements are produced.

Enhanced On-Demand Outstanding Core Report

The current routine has been enhanced to offer the following options:

** Release Notes - Version 6+

Credit Check Enhancements

Invoicing Credit Check

The use of Credit Limits through the point of sale has been parameterized to prevent any sale that goes over the customers credit limit or the current option to display a message advising the user if a customer is going over their credit limit and giving the user the option to complete this sale.

These parameters are found in Screen 1 of the Billing Parameters menu option System Utilities > System Setup > Sales Desk > Parts Billing Parameters fields 19 and 20


Invoicing

If parameter field 19 is N then no credit checking against customer credit limits is done.

If parameter field 19 is Y and field 20 is BLANK or N the user will be prompted with the question to allow a sale to take the customer over their credit limit.

The user will see the first message that the customer is “Now over credit limit” when they accept the invoice lines entered

And when the user does the final accept, they will receive a second message “Allow sale over credit limit? (Y/N)” which they must answer with a Y or N.

The new update is when parameter fields 19 and 20 are both set to Y.

In this situation when an invoice takes the customer over their credit limit the user will see the same first message as above “Now over credit limit” when they accept the invoice lines entered.

When they do the final accept of the invoice which will take the customer over their credit limit they will see a new message, “Over Limit Save as Quote? (Y/N)” that must be answered with Y or N.

If it is saved as a Quote the PO number will be changed to “CH” so these credit hold Quotes can be easily searched when recalling the customer and the quote will be printed for reference.

If a PO number was entered on the original invoice this will become a comment line on the Quote “CH FOR: [PO Number]”

If a Quote is recalled that will take the customer over their credit limit the user will receive the same questions to save as a Quote again.

When creating an Order, the user will see the messages that the customer is “Now over credit limit” and then “Allow sale over credit limit? (Y/N)” when doing the final accept. When the Order is invoiced if this still takes the customer over their credit limit the user will be prompted to save as Quote as shown above. The user can reject from this and leave the Order outstanding. The amount of outstanding orders in the system do affect the available credit for a customer.

If a customer is over their credit limit when starting an invoice, the Credit Rating will be COD or HOLD based on the setting in the Accounts Receivable Parameters forcing the sale to be paid by some form of cash or prohibit selling using the customers account number.

** Release Notes - Version 6+

Cross Dock HTML Pop-up

View of On Order and Cross Dock Quantities

New HTML Pop-Up

A new Pop-Up has been added to COUNTERPOINT for viewing of all Branch On Order and Cross Dock quantities.

This information will be available for all parts except Kits and will be refreshed nightly

Product Maintenance and Inquiry

The Product Maintenance and Inquiry screens have been updated to view this information by clicking on the magnifying glass icon in the On Order description.


Branch Stock Inquiry

The Branch Stock Inquiry screen has also been updated to view this information by clicking on the magnifying glass icon on the On Order description.

Invoicing

The Invoice screen has also been updated to view this information by clicking on the magnifying glass icon on the On Order description.

Daily HTML extract

The Daily HTML exports has been updated to include a new column indicating the Cross Dock quantities. This is in Column R with heading DC Cross Dock

** Release Notes - Version 6+

Customer Notes

Customer Notes

New programmes have been added to accounts receivable for adding and inquiring into free- form notes for a customer.  The inquiry into customer notes has also been added to the sales desk menu.

There is a total of 6 note types, spread across two styles: reserved and non-reserved, with a maximum number of reserved note types of three (3).  Customer notes are date and time stamped during entry and then assigned to a particular type.  There may be many notes of the same type attached to the same customer. 

The use of “A” type notes will display automatically as a customer is selected in the invoice screen.

The other reserved or default note types are “B” and “C”.

Creating a new Note type

Use the menu option Utilities à System Setup > Accounts Receivable à note parameterS to add (example) a type [n] with a description of nsf.  The singe character note type may be alphabetic or numeric.

Adding notes to customers

To add a note to a customer, use the menu option accounts receivable > DATA MAINTENACE > customer notes (add).  A TAB to search is available from the customer number field.  Only A/R customers are available for notes, not VIP customers.  The note is date and time stamped and the user is prompted to classify this note with a particular type. 

When the note text has been completed, press [enter] to complete the field, then [F1] to accept. 

Changes are allowed at the any change? prompt.  Entering the line number for change will bring the user to the beginning of the line.  If the first field of the line requires no change, pressing [enter] will advance to the beginning of the second field/section on that same line.   Changes to notes are also available from the change notes menu option.  A note that has been assigned to a reserved type may still be deleted.

Viewing/Adding Customer Notes

Several menu options are available to view and maintain customer notes:

Accounts Receivable > Inquiry Functions > Customer Analysis
Accounts Receivable > Inquiry Functions > Customer Notes Inquiry
Sales Desk > Customer Queries > Customer Analysis
Sales Desk > Customer Queries > Customer Notes
Sales Desk > Invoicing – Press Shift F11 from the Customer field or from the Line Type
Accounts Receivable > Transaction Processing > Cash Receipts Processing > Cash Receipts Input – Press F11 after the Customer is entered

Enter the customer number or use the search option to find the customer then select a note type or press enter to view all notes for the customer.

Notes are displayed in date sequence with the most recent first

Print Customer Notes on Invoices

The ability to include Customer Notes has been added to the invoice print. This requires that a Note Type be added with the setting to Print on Invoice = Y. These notes will print in the body of each invoice for the customer.

Note Type Maintenance

A new Note Type must be added to the system to identify which notes are to be included on the invoice. This is done using the menu option Utilities > System Setup > Accounts Receivable > Note Parameters. Use “1. Add Type” and use a letter or number as a code (eg “P”), assign a description and set Print on Invoice to “Y”.

Customer Note

Notes for the customer can be added through Accounts Receivable > Data Maintenance à Customer Notes or through the Invoice Screen using Shift F11 from the “customer #”. When adding the note use the type setup above and enter the text to be printed on the invoice.

The invoice will only print the first 40 characters of each line of the note text

 If multiple print type notes are setup for a customer, all of them will print on each invoice.

** Release Notes - Version 6+

Customer Notes Enhancements

Customer Notes

New programmes have been added to accounts receivable for adding and inquiring into free-form notes for a customer.  The inquiry into customer notes has also been added to the sales desk menu.

There is a total of 6 note types, spread across two styles: reserved and non-reserved, with a maximum number of reserved note types of three (3).  Customer notes are date and time stamped during entry and then assigned to a particular type.  There may be many notes of the same type attached to the same customer. 

The use of “A” type notes will display automatically as a customer is selected in the invoice screen.

The other reserved or default note types are “B” and “C”.

Creating a new Note type

Use the menu option Utilities > System Setup > Accounts Receivable > note parameters to add (example) a type [n] with a description of nsf.  The singe character note type may be alphabetic or numeric.

Adding notes to customers:

To add a note to a customer, use the menu option accounts receivable > DATA MAINTENACE > customer notes (add).  A TAB to search is available from the customer number field.  Only A/R customers are available for notes, not VIP customers.  The note is date and time stamped and the user is prompted to classify this note with a particular type. 

When the note text has been completed, press [enter] to complete the field, then [F1] to accept. 

Changes are allowed at the any change? prompt.  Entering the line number for change will bring the user to the beginning of the line.  If the first field of the line requires no change, pressing [enter] will advance to the beginning of the second field/section on that same line.   Changes to notes are also available from the change notes menu option.  A note that has been assigned to a reserved type may still be deleted.

Viewing/Adding Customer Notes:

Several menu options are available to view and maintain customer notes:

Enter the customer number or use the search option to find the customer then select a note type or press enter to view all notes for the customer.

Notes are displayed in date sequence with the most recent first

Print Customer Notes on Invoices

The ability to include Customer Notes has been added to the invoice print. This requires that a Note Type be added with the setting to Print on Invoice = Y. These notes will print in the body of each invoice for the customer.

Note Type Maintenance

A new Note Type must be added to the system to identify which notes are to be included on the invoice. This is done using the menu option Utilities à System Setup à Accounts Receivable à Note Parameters. Use “1. Add Type” and use a letter or number as a code (eg “P”), assign a description and set Print on Invoice to “Y”.

Customer Note

Notes for the customer can be added through Accounts Receivable à Data Maintenance à Customer Notes or through the Invoice Screen using Shift F11 from the “customer #”. When adding the note use the type setup above and enter the text to be printed on the invoice.

The invoice will only print the first 40 characters of each line of the note text

If multiple print type notes are setup for a customer, all of them will print on each invoice.

 

** Release Notes - Version 6+

Customer Part Numbers

Description

The customer part number is used to allow you to print your customer’s part number on an invoice along with your own part number. Typically used where the customer has an internal number that they use for their own stocking purposes. The customer must be identified as having their own part numbers. This feature only works with Stocking Part Numbers

Customer Maintenance

The customer must be identified as having their own part numbers which is done through the Customer Maintenance by adding an “A” into one of the Account Control Flags.

Customer Part Number Maintenance

Customer Part Number maintenance is done through Inventory > Data Maintenance > Utilities à Setup Customer Part #'s. The customer MUST be setup before trying to enter the part numbers. When adding new part numbers you can enter past the Category field and enter the part number. If there are multiple categories you will have to select the proper category.

A Customer Part must be entered and the description is optional


In the invoice screen when creating an invoice for a customer assigned Customer Part Numbers, if you enter the customer’s part number it will be translated to your part number.

After entering the part number then pressing Enter the stocking part number is displayed. If the stocking part number has substitutes you will be prompted to select from the list

Both the stocking part number and the customer’s part number will be printed on the invoice. The customer’s part number will be on a separate line with a comment “customer part#”

** Release Notes - Version 6+

Process EDI Invoices

Definition

When EDI Invoices are received from the vendors that invoices will be processed and added to the new EDI Transaction List available for selection and processing.

Processing

Vendor Maintenance

Vendor Maintenance has need modified to allow entry of the Vendor EDI ID and the Vendor Currency. The EDI ID is provided by the Vendor/Supplier when setting up for EDI.

Note: only EDI invoices received from Vendors with a matching EDI ID to what is setup on the Vendor will be processed. This setup is separate to the setup of the Suppliers for placing purchase orders as there can be many Suppliers for a single Vendor.


EDI Transaction Selection

New menu option Accounts Payable à Transaction Processing à Select EDI Inv. To Process.

This option will list all of the received EDI invoices not yet processed or show a summary of invoices received for a selected vendor or all vendors.

Using the tab or clicking the magnifying glass in the first screen will launch the Vendor Search

Using F3 will display the Vendor Summary screen where a summary of the number of invoices and total value is displayed by Vendor.

Once again, the Vendor Search is available using the TAB key or clicking on the magnifying glass.

Pressing the Enter key in the Vendor field will display a summary for all vendors.

Exit will exit back to the Vendor Invoices screen, Quit will allow the selection of a new Vendor, entering a line number will select that Vendor and display the invoice details on the Vendor Invoice screen.

In the Vendor Invoice screen all available invoices for the Vendor will be displayed and you will be prompted whether the invoice should be selected to add to a transaction batch. The Select Options are Y to have the invoice added to a transaction batch for posting, N or blank to not select and leave the invoice available for future selection or D to Delete the invoice from the selection screen. The delete option would be used if the invoice was processed manually or received in error.


Using Accept after the invoices have been selected will prompt “create transaction batch  N”, changing the response to Y will append to the users A/P Transaction batch.

If invoices are being deleted a prompt will be displayed “delete flagged invoices ? N” changing the response to will delete the invoices so they will no longer appear on the selection screen

The transaction batch created will use the following information:

Any required adjustments can be made through the regular Transaction Input option and the edit list is available prior to update for review.

The update of these transactions would be done through the normal Transaction Update option.

** Release Notes - Version 6+

EOQ & ROP Calculation

Ranking Table

Purchasing Parameters

Ranking Calculation

Calculate EOQ Values

Calculate Lead Time by Part

Calculate ROP Values

Calculate Corporate Values

Daily Suggested Order

** Release Notes - Version 6+

Fleet Part Tracking

Fleet Tracking Setup

The Billing invoice screen has a built in Customer Fleet Part Tracking module. This module allows the counter staff to in affect build customer, unit, specific electronic catalogues. The creation of these catalogues can have a dramatic affect on the accuracy and speed with which counter staff can service parts requests on a customers fleet vehicles. The fleet part tracking is available from the LINE TYPE field on any invoice line while building an invoice by hitting Shift/[F10]. Doing so will launch the following screen.

If this is the first time you have launched fleet part tracking on the system you will need to take the (M)aintain records option. Which will change the prompts at the bottom of the screen to read as follows.

“(E/P/G) Equipment, Parts , or Groups”

If this is the initial launch of Fleet Part Tracking take the (G)roups option, which will bring up the Add Change Delete Screen. Select ADD which brings up the following screen.

Sub Groups are required to support future reporting potential, so in this case you can make the subgroups very simplistic if you choose. For example if your operation sells HD parts and well as automotive and light truck you may want to set up only two sub groups being AUT and HD as shown below.

Once your groups are set up you will only need to return to this screen if you decide to change the basic groups that you set up. Upon Completion of the Groups Maintenance hit [F2] to exit this routine which will return you to the initial screen. As shown below.

Note that the prompt at left bottom starts with “No Records” This is an indication that this customer, has not had any vehicles added to his fleet. In this case take the M(aintain Files) option then select The Equipment option which will bring up the Add/Change/Delete screen. Selecting Add brings up the following screen

Enter Data as outlined below.

Description – Enter a meaningful description of this vehicle. Try to use the description that the customer will relate to as they will likely tell the counter staff that they are working on the “old red beast” or some other such internal name for this unit when they call in for parts.

Year – Yr of Vehicle.

Make – A three digit Alpha code for the make of the vehicle. Hit TAB to see a list of valid Car and Light Truck models. If the Unit is not automotive/light truck (ie a Heavy Duty or Construction vehicle) simply enter in the information required.

Model – A three digit Alpha code for the model of the vehicle. Hit TAB to see a list of valid options. If the Unit is not automotive/light truck (ie a Heavy Duty or Construction vehicle) simply enter in the information required.

License Plate, VIN, - Fill or leave blank as appropriate you your use

Unit Number – Typically a customer assigned number or name for this vehicle.

Odometer – Optional Enter if required. When field is accepted cursor to skip down to Remarks field.

Last Service, Last Invoice Number – These fields are system maintained from the repair shop module if it is used.

Fields 19 thru 14 - Reserved for Future use. No entry is required or possible in this screen.

When all fields are complete and you are happy with the results hit [F1] to add this vehicle to the customers fleet. If there are no other units to be added to this fleet, hit [F2] to exit the program. This will return you to the Fleet Vehicle list page.

Select M(aintain) and then select PartsList enter Add/Change/Delete as appropriate which will bring up the screen as shown on the following page.

Enter Data as follows

Customer – Entered by the system.

Customer Unit Number – Enter the unit number or name that the part(s) you are about to enter will be used on.

Product Group – Enter the Product Group that the entered parts will have sales data captured under. (ie HD or AUT in this example)

Category – Cursor will skip this field and auto fill when you enter a part number. In the case where the part exists in more than one category you will need to select the correct category from the displayed options.

Part Number – Part number used on the specified vehicle.

Quantity Required – Enter the quantity required in this units use of the part.

Comment – Optional Enter a free form comment that will assist in ensuring this part is correctly chosen when the request comes in (ie “Used on the PTO for the hydraulic pump”) or something similar.

When you are happy with the screen hit [F1] to accept the entry.

Repeat for all other parts used on this Unit. When done hit [F2]

This completes the set up of a Unit and it associated parts.

Using The Fleet Part System Within COUNTERPOINT

When a customer calls in for parts and identifies that these are for a unit in his fleet proceed as follows.

  1. Set up the invoice for the customer as normal (ie enter customer number PO if required and your customer number.
  2. When the cursor is in the Line Type field hit Shift/[F10] which will bring up the customer fleet list similar to that shown below.

  3. Select the appropriate unit as specified by the customer which will bring up the parts list. As shown below.

  4. Enter line number(s) corresponding to the parts you need to sell. Note that as you select line numbers the program moves selected lines to the space just above the “Maintain files” line.
  5. When you have selected all required parts hit “E” to exit the screen and move the parts in the quantities specified at the customers prices onto the invoice.

Notice that the parts list displays the quantity on hand and the quantity required for each part.

If you need to add, delete or change a part for this unit it can be done at this point by entering M to launch the maintain files routine.

** Release Notes - Version 6+

Foreign Currency

Foreign Currency

Purchases made outside Canada can be purchased in the foreign countries’ currency

In addition to the currency enhancement, three additional fields allow the system to roll into the average cost @ the time of Purchase Order Receipt, Freight, Brokerage and Additional Costs. These values can be entered as part of the PO receiving or as a default % in the Supplier Maintenance screen. In addition, where Duty is applicable @ the part level, this cost rolls up as a part of the cost

Default GL Accounts

System Utilities > System Set-up > Purchasing > Parameter Maintenance > Screen 3 S/O Defaults and Smoothing

System Utilities > System Set-up > Purchasing > Parameter Maintenance > Screen 2 System Configuration

All values posted into the GL are in Canadian dollars

Each branch has to have GL codes amended @ the Branch level

Foreign Exchange Rate

Purchasing > Data Maintenance > Currency

Foreign Exchange Rates are a global setting and can be added or changed in this screen. This can also be used where there is an uplift from the supplier or additional changes are incurred such as freight. Adding a currency code other than “C” with an exchange rate of 1.0000 and assigning supplier to this code allows for updating of P6 cost and selling prices based on the base cost allowing purchase orders to be issued with the accurate supplier cost.

Fields

1 – Code = Currency
2 – Rate = Exchange Rate
3 – Update Prices = If the currency rate has changed this should be set to Y if you want to update the selling prices based on the new rate.

The automatic price update for currency rate changes is typically scheduled to run weekly on Sundays.

4 – Last Update = Date that prices were last updated for this currency rate based on a change in Currency Rate

Supplier Set-Up

Purchasing > Data Maintenance > Supplier

While the Exchange Rate is global the Supplier Maintenance screen is where you select the currency you are going to buy in.

Fields

19 – Currency; select currency
21 – Price Level = Base; the field in the Inventory Maintenance screen the supplier’s price is displayed from their price list

29 – Update Last Cost to Inventory Y/N; at time of PO receipt “Y” will update Canadian selling prices “N” will not update selling prices but average price is updated.
34 – Freight Percentage: is a default percentage for freight costs.
35 – Brokerage Percentage: is a default percentage for brokerage fees
36 – Other Charges; any additional costs such as a pallet cost or insurance

These default costs are applied to all parts received from the supplier in the calculation of the landed cost  to update average cost and when Canadian cost [Price 6] and selling prices are calculated during the Base Cost update

Inventory Maintenance Screen

Inventory  Data Maintenance > Master File > Product Master

Fields

Base Cost/Core – Suppliers cost and core price in their currency from price file

Tax Code | Duty % | Season – Part tax code | duty % for the part which is applied into the landed cost of the goods at the time of PO receipt and when Canadian prices are calculated.

Purchase Order

Foreign purchase orders will print with the supplier’s base cost

Purchase Order Receipt

Purchasing > Purchase Order Receipt > PO Receipts Input

Fields

Currency – the currency the purchase order was created in and the current exchange rate for that currency.
Price Level – relating to the Supplier, “B” = Base Price
Freight – freight costs are entered here, are spread evenly across all SKU’s on the purchase order and are in CDN dollars
Brokerage – brokerage costs are entered here, are spread evenly across all SKU’s on the purchase order and are in CDN dollars
Other Costs – any other cost associated with the acquisition of the PO can be entered here and are spread evenly across all SKU’s on the purchase order and are in CDN dollars

If these values are left blank the percentages assigned to the supplier, if any, will be used to calculate approximate costs.

PO Receipts Journal

The PO Receipts journal will include these additional costs

** Release Notes - Version 6+

General Charges & Core Handling

Definition

General charges are a new line type in the COUNTERPOINT invoicing program which allows you to include amounts on the invoice which do not impact inventory or apply standard comments to an invoice. The charges can be automatically applied to all transactions based on a percentage up to a maximum value or a set dollar amount. General charges can also be added to an invoice manually. This feature will also allow deposits to be added to Order transactions which will automatically reduce the amount owed when the order is completed and turned into an invoice.

Processing

General Charge Codes

The maintenance of General Charge Codes is found through System Utilities > System Setup > Sales Desk > General Charge Code Maintenance.

A maximum of two characters is used for the code. The description used will be put on the invoice when the code is used. The Type can be a $, % or C for a standard comment. The charge can either be setup as a percentage or as a dollar value. This is used for automatic charges and deposits. For manually added charges the value would be left at zero. If a percentage charge is to be capped at a certain value that would be entered in the maximum value. The tax codes are based on the values setup in the Billing Parameters. If levies are to be included in the calculation of an automatic charge this flag must be set to Y. Deposits are not to be set as an automatic charge. If the “enter text” setting is Y the user will be able to alter the comment which will be printed on the invoice. If the value is allowed to be changed or entered manually the “enter value” setting must be Y. In the case of a return the date range is also used to determine if an automatic charge should be refunded based on the original purchase date.

image-1652982482687.png

Customer Maintenance

Customers that are exempt from Automatic general charges require a “G” be entered in one of the “account control flags” in the customer maintenance screen.

Invoicing

Any Automatic charges will be added as the last line on an invoice when the body of the invoice is accepted. If new lines are added later, the value of the automatic charge will be adjusted to reflect the new total of the invoice. Should an automatic charge be adjusted manually it will not be altered if any other changes are made to the lines on the invoice.

To enter a general charge or standard comment manually use the new line type of “G”. This will display a list of up to 18 codes in the information window or you can use the TAB key to search additional codes

image-1652982494493.png

Deposit type codes may only be used on Order transactions.

Comment codes will have no value associated with them.

When taking a deposit for products that will be delivered at some future time you must use a transaction type of “O”rder. The items being purchased are to be added to the order as Backorder (Normally stocked items) or a Special Order (Non Stocked/Pickups) lines. When the items have been added enter a “G” line for the deposit and select the deposit code which has been setup. Providing the deposit code has been setup with a percentage the amount of deposit required will be shown on the screen. This can be changed if necessary providing the code has been setup to allow the value to be entered.

When recalling the order and turning it into an invoice the value of the deposit amount will automatically be reversed so the total owing will reflect the price of the items less the amounts previously received. If a customer returns to make additional deposits the original order must be recalled and the second deposit added to the order.

Customer Backorders

When a backorder is being fulfilled upon receipt of the product and an invoice is created the standard comments contained on lines 1 through 3 of the original transaction will be included on the fulfillment invoice.

Invoice Register

The total value of any Freight and General Charges will be shown on the invoice register in the relabelled column “Freight /Oth Chgs”.

** Release Notes - Version 6+

Gift Receipts

Parameter Maintenance

The use of Gift Receipts in Counterpoint is controlled by settings in the Billing Parameters,  System Utilities à System Setup à Sales Desk à Parts Billing Parameters à Screen 5.

Field 1 = Y/N for the use of Gift receipts in the store.
Field 2 = Y/N for the default on the printing of Gift Receipts
Fields 3 – 14 = Single Character for alignment of the message on the receipt
                        C = Center
                        L = Left
                        R = Right
                        Up to 40 characters of text over 6 lines to be printed on the Gift Receipt

image-1652982629649.png

The message is optional and “GIFT RECEIPT” will be automatically printed in the same position as the “DUPLICATE” message is printed on the invoice

Invoicing

If the use of Gift Receipts is turned on in the parameters the message when completing and invoice will show as – “Header,Line#,Cust#,Footer,GiftRec N ?”. The parameter setting for the default print is the last character in the message. In this case the parameters are set to not print a Gift Receipt automatically. To change this on the individual invoice press “G” then Gift Receipt could be changed to Y to have the additional copy printed when the invoice is completed.

Should a Gift Receipt be required after the original invoice has been created you would recall the invoice by pressing F3 from the Customer # and keying in the invoice number, or if it was the last invoice generated that would already be displayed on screen and you would just need to press ENTER. The message at the bottom of the screen would be “Change,Reprint,Void,GiftRec Y ?”, press “G” and the message “gift receipt (Y/N),R(eprint)?” will appear where you can select “R” to Reprint. You could also use the F11 Alt Print to redirect to a printer other than the default printer or to email/fax the Gift Receipt

image-1652982640902.png

If desired Gift Receipts can be defaulted to print on an alternate printer using the Printer Profiles system utilities > system setup > sales desk > printer profiles. The Gift Receipt printer ID would need to be changed to the desired printer ID.

** Release Notes - Version 6+

GL Budget Upload

Processing

Load Budgets

The Load Budget option, General ledger > Data maintenance > Load budgets, requires a spreadsheet file containing the monthly budget values first be saved to Z:\html\gl1 as a tab delimited text file named GLBUDGET.txt.

Notes:

 

** Release Notes - Version 6+

Invoice Price Change Restrictions

Definition

Counterpoint has been updated to provide the ability to restrict Sales Clerks from changing prices. For this process to work it is required that all users have a unique login ID for Counterpoint.

Processing

Clerk Maintenance

The User Login ID can be assigned to a clerk and this will force the clerk number used on the invoice based on the Login ID. They will not be able to change the clerk number when processing an invoice or credit note.

The Sell Below Cost option prohibits the clerk from selling below cost.

The Invoice Prices options are:

Disallow Price Changes will prevent the clerk from changing prices without the entry of a PIN code by a user that IS allowed to change prices. The Disallow Price Changes field MUST be set to N in order for a clerks PIN # be allowed to authorize a price change.

For these changes to be effective those clerks authorized to changes price should reset their PIN #’s and keep them private.


Invoicing

With the Sales Clerk Login ID assigned the clerk number will be automatically entered after the customer is entered. Using the Field Up, Field Down or Enter will not allow access to the clerk field of the invoice, therefore preventing them from changing the number to be allowed to change prices.

If the Sales Clerk is set to Disallow Price Changes, when entering an invoice line the clerk will be prompted to “Enter pin #:” if there has been any changes to the price or discount when the line is completed.

The options at the “Enter pin #:” message are:

If the sales clerk is not allowed to change prices and the Customer number is changed on an invoice, they will no longer be offered the option to Recalculate the prices, the prices will be recalculated automatically based on the new customer on the invoice.

** Release Notes - Version 6+

Kit Maintenance

Definition

Kits

A KIT is defined as either a COUNTER KIT: one that is created at the time of sale, or a MANUFACTURED KIT, one that is created and placed on the shelf ready for sale. A COUNTER KIT has no inventory on hand, a MANUFACTURED KIT does.

A kit item may belong to any category, or a separate category may be created for manufactured kits, if desired. There is no difference between a regular category record and one that is created for kit items.  

Processing

Add the Kit Part Number

Identifying a kit item involves two steps. First, enter [K] (not displayed as an option) in the REORDER FIELD on the item record in INVENTORY > DATA MAINTENANCE > MASTER FILES > PRODUCT MASTER. Then differentiate the item as a COUNTER [C] kit or a MANUFACTURED [M] kit in the KIT TYPE field directly below. The remainder of the fields may be set up as usual.

If the part is being manufactured in one branch only the reorder type can be changed by branch in the MAINTAIN BRANCH INFO screen. This scenario would not apply to Counter kits.

Attach Components to the Kit

Once the kit item has been created and [F1] accepted, the user is prompted with MAINTAIN KIT DEFINITION? If [N], the function is complete and the user is able to add a new kit number. The kit definition will have to be set up at a later date using the CHANGE PRODUCT menu option. If the response to MAINTAIN KIT DEFINITION? Is [Y], a secondary input screen is presented for entry.

The user will enter the category/part number combination for each product that will be used in the manufacture of this new item and the quantity that will be used. If the kit type is [M], the default for the SUB field will be [N] and may not be changed. If the kit type is [C], then the SUB field is available for entry and may be either [Y] or [N].

A SUB refers to the user’s ability to substitute another item for the one listed in the kit definition at the time of sale. Since a manufactured [M] kit is created and assembled prior to sale, no substitutions are permitted. However, a counter [C] kit is assembled at the time of sale and by its nature, requires the ability to sub out items on the fly.

The HIDE field refers to whether or not to hide the component items on the printed invoice. If the items are hidden on the printed invoice, then only the kit item will appear as with a normal item. When the items are not hidden on the printed invoice, then the kit item is printed as usual, and the component items are listed underneath. No pricing information is printed for the component items.

How Kit components print on an invoice may differ based on custom invoice developed for certain customers.

Inventory Considerations

As stated previously, no inventory is held on hand for counter [C] kits. The components are subtracted from inventory at the time of the sale, just as if each individual item was sold separately. Reporting of the sales demand and cardex entries for parts included in a counter kit are shown on the individual components.

Customer back order should not be used for Counter Kits.

Manufactured [M] kits are held on the shelf ready for sale and therefore must be received prior to being able to be sold. Increases in inventory levels for [M] type kit items are done through PURCHASING  > PURCHASE ORDER RECEIPTS  > RUSH RECEIVING. As the inventory of the full good is increased, the inventory of the component items is reduced.

The changes in on hand quantity all happens in the branch the product is received in.

Type [M] kits can also be added to a purchase order either from a suggested order or manually to be used for requesting assemble of the kits. This purchase order would then be received PURCHASING  > PURCHASE ORDER RECEIPTS  > P.O. RECEIPTS INPUT and the component inventory would be removed from stock and the assembled kit part would be added to inventory.

Sales of the components will be recorded at the time the [M] kit is received into inventory

** Release Notes - Version 6+

Locked Product Inquiry

Definition

New menu item to view locked products preventing inventory updates from invoicing to complete.

Processing

Locked Products Inquiry

The new menu option is Sales Desk > Inventory Queries > Locked Products.


Any items stopping inventory updates from invoicing will be displayed.

Also, a message is sent to the offending users screen  when this situation occurs.

The Refresh option will redisplay the screen with the new status of the parts

The message “No AUDITLOCK on file” when there are no products locked that are holding up inventory updates. Pressing enter will go back to the “R(efresh),E(xit),Q(uit)” message

Exit or Quit will return to the menu.

Other Messages for Locked Products

 

** Release Notes - Version 6+

Lost Sales Reason Code

Processing

The recording of lost sales now has a Reason Code attached; these reason codes are setup using the menu option System Utilities > System Setup > Sales Desk > Lost Sale Reason Codes.

If the Include in Sales Total flag is set to Y any Lost Sales recorded through invoicing will be added to the Monthly and Weekly sales totals, increasing the demand for the part.

Invoicing

When recording a Lost Sale in the invoicing screen [using F6 after the quantity is entered] a list of the Lost Sale codes will be displayed to select the appropriate reason.

Reporting

The Lost Sales Detail report allows for the selection of one or all Categories, Customers or Reason Codes for a selected date range

The menu option for this report is Inventory > Lost Sales/Pickups > Lost Sales Detail Report.

Running this report will also create an extract file that can be loaded into excel Z:\html\b1\BLDRP.csv

** Release Notes - Version 6+

Loyalty Rewards

Loyalty Rewards

Definition

The new LOYALTY REWARDS program will allow you to offer and track point rewarded to customers for purchases made. This program can be for selected customers and products and the rewards value can be maintained by Category.

The new suite of programs is available through Sales Desk > Administration > Loyalty Rewards


Loyalty Programs

Loyalty Customers

Loyalty Adjustment Codes

Loyalty Rates


Loyalty Reward Adjustments

Loyalty Rewards Inquiry

Loyalty Rewards Report

Loyalty Rewards Statement

Once the customers have been assigned to the program and the rates have been setup the point information can be built from invoice history from a start date if desired.

Invoicing

** Release Notes - Version 6+

Multiple Bin Locations

Overview

There is now the option for setting up alternate bin locations for each item.  Before proceeding, make sure that the flag to allow multiple bin locations (field # 45) has been set to [y] in System Utilities > System Setup > Sales Desk > parts billing parameters > Screen 2.

Another parameter change is required to have the bin location sold from selected on the invoice screen, Screen 5 > Select Bin Location in Invoice (field # 31) needs to be set to Y

Process

Bin Location Maintenance

This option is used to set up, view a specific location or view all locations for a specified product.  Deleting an alternate bin location is also available from this menu.  This option is found in the menu inventory > Data Mantenance > Master Files > Bin Location Maintenance.

Bin Location maintenance can also be performed when in the Product Master maintenance by selecting “B(ins)”.

The Bin Type “R”, Retail, is used to identify product in the retail space of the store. Nightly reporting is available to indicate which retail products currently have zero available and need to be replenished from other locations.

The retail bin location can only be the primary location if it is the only location for the product and POS transactions will update the on hand in the Retail location.

Receiving and Stock Transfers will update the quantity on hand in the primary location which is the location shown on screen in Product Maintenance and Inquiry.

Any product with multiple bin locations and the Retail location that has a negative on hand quantity will have the Retail location adjusted up to zero and the primary adjusted down by the same quantity nightly.

Stock Relocation Adjustment       

inventory > Data Maintenance > Inventory Adjustments > Stock Relocation Adjustment

Use this option to adjust the on-hand quantities for each alternate bin location.  Enter the category and part number.  All of the locations will be displayed.  At the any change prompt, press enter to get to the quantity to adjusted by field.  Enter the quantity (followed by a minus sign) that is to be moved to other locations.  Then distribute that amount to the alternatives.  The total field at the bottom must be 0 in order to [f1] accept the entry. Pressing enter after the accept will allow you to continue with further adjustments and “N” will exit to the menu.

this would be the preferred method for adjusting bin location quantities.

Stock Relocation Report           

This will report all Retail Locations that have and On Hand Quantity of 0 or less which is to be used to replenish these locations. This report will be run automatically each night.

On Dock Purchase Orders

To flag a purchase order as On Dock use Purchasing > Purchase Order Receipts > On Dock Assignment. Enter the PO Number then confirm it is the correct PO, the first page of lines on the PO will be displayed and answer “Y” to create the Dock locations for this PO.

The Dock locations are automatically removed when the PO Receipts Update is completed for the PO.

image-1652998261080.png

P.O. Receipts Relocation Listing  

Multiple bin location items are automatically received to the primary bin location as listed on the PRODUCT master maintenance screen.  This report provides the information necessary for the user to relocate the quantity received to different locations.

This report is Purchasing > Purchase Order Receipts > P.O. Rec. Relocation Listing

P.O. Receipts Relocation Adjustment

Similar to the Stock relocation adjustment, the user is able to move the recently received quantity from the primary (default) location to multiple locations.

P.O. Receipts Relocation Update   

The adjustments made in the above step will be updated.

Alternatively, the adjustments can be made using the Stock Relocation Adjustment described earlier in this document.

Inventory Adjustments

When entering Inventory Adjustments, inventory > Data Mantenance > Inventory Adjustments > Stock Adjustments, if a part is assigned to multiple bin locations you will need to enter the quantities adjusted by bin location when completing the adjustment

image-1652998280329.png

The default is to adjust the primary bin but you can change the quantities however the adjusted quantity for the bin locations must equal the total adjustment quantity.

This is the same procedures as used in the Stock Relocation Adjustment

Bin Location Lookup in Invoicing

Products with Multiple Bin Locations that have an on hand quantity will be identified on the invoice screen with a comment of “*MANY*” and products that have zero on hand but are included in an On Dock PO will have a comment of “*DOCK*”.

To check the available quantities for multiple bin locations within the invoicing screen press Shift F8 from the line Type field and you will be prompted for a line number to search. The bin location quantities for the selected part will be displayed in the Information Window. The sale of a product will always reduce the on hand quantity for the Retail bin location if one exists and if no retail location exists the Primary location will be adjusted.

All bin locations will be included on the printed invoice.

If the Select Bin Location in Invoice option is on and the part being sold is assigned to Multiple Bin Locations the locations with available inventory to fulfill the sale will be displayed on screen

image-1652998293953.png

Bin Location Selection in Invoicing - Optional

New feature when using Multiple Bin Locations and wanting to force the users to select the Bin Location that the product is going to be picked from in order to keep the on-hand quantities for each bin location accurate.

Billing Parameters

New option added to screen 5 of the Billing Parameters “Select Bin Loc. In Invoice” would need to be set to “Y

For Counter Kits where product is kept in multiple Bin Locations the parameter “18. Kit Detail Display” on screen 3 would also need to be set to Y

Invoicing

In the invoice screen the user will be prompted to select the bin location the product will be picked from after the quantity is entered. Bin locations are displayed in descending order based on quantity on hand. Dock locations are shown at the end of the list and cannot be selected, these are information only. A line number MUST be chosen.

image-1653004379794.png

Only the Bin Location chosen will be printed on the invoice and the overall inventory of the part will be reduced and the quantity available in the chosen Bin Location.

Exceptions where this screen will not be displayed

If a part is only assigned to a single bin location

If the quantity sold is greater than the quantity available is any single bin location

When selling a “C”ounter Kit the Kit components will be displayed on screen and if any of the components are located in multiple bin locations you will be prompted to select the Bin Location those parts will be pulled from. The components and the chosen Bin Locations will be printed on the invoice.

image-1652998325408.png

Invoice Print

The invoice print will only show the bin location selected for a part.

Exceptions

Inventory Update

The on-hand quantity will be updated for the selected bin location.

The on-hand quantity will be updated for the Primary bin location when:

** Release Notes - Version 6+

Multiple Invoice Copies

Overview

Multiple invoice copies can be printed at the time of sale or as a batch during the Accounts Receivable month end

Process

Customer Maintenance

If multiple copies are to be printed at the time of sale then the customer must have an “Account Control Flag” of “m” and the “ME Invoice Copies” field needs the number of invoice copies that are to be printed, use 2 if you require 1 extra copy for the customer.

Where you have the customer setup to receive automatic emails this feature can now be used to suppress the printing of invoices by leaving the “ME Invoice Copies” as 0. Also the Billing Parameter “Duplicate On Multiple Inv” must be set to “N” to print 0 copies

The printing of DUPLICATE on the additional invoice copies is controlled by the billing parameters, screen 1 “DUPLICATE on Multiple Inv”.

To print invoice copies as a batch during the month end the ME Invoice Copies field needs a number. Only 1 copy of each invoice for the customer will be printed as part of the month end. Changing this field during the month will result in the invoices after the change getting printed during the month end.

Where customers are set to print extra copies this can be turned off for different document types using Utilities > System Setup > Sales Desk > Printer Profiles.

If the Extra Copies field is set to “N” the extra copies set for the customer is ignored.

** Release Notes - Version 6+

Physical Count - Add Bin Location

Definition

The Physical Count Input routine has been updated to include the option to Add a Bin Location during the count. This will add the bin location to the part immediately and the quantity will be updated when the count update is completed.

Processing

Changes to the count input screen are the new option to A(dd loc).

Using this option will prompt first for the Category and Part Number

Cat/Part .../...................

The next prompt will be for Bin Location

bin location/......

Next will be the Quantity

qty/......

last will be the Bin Type, blank or R for retail

type/.

When the bin has been added the input screen will show with the added part on line 1. If the part was not assigned a Primary bin location previously the new bin added will be considered the Primary Bin location and with should in the product maintenance and inquiry screens.

The new bin location quantity will be updated when the count update is complete and the quantity added to a new bin location will be considered a count variance as it is assumed the product will have a negative variance in another bin location.

** Release Notes - Version 6+

Change PO on Pick Ticket

Process

The process for changing the Z Pick Ticket PO number:

** Release Notes - Version 6+

Price Override Reporting

Definition

The reporting of price overrides has been updated to continue to provide the daily report and also allow for reporting of price overrides done in the past.

Processing

The new reporting option is found in the menu through Sales Desk > Administration > Reporting > Pricing > Price Override Analysis or using the menu search (TAB key) Search String “PRICE O”.

In the selection screen leaving the fields blank will report all branches, customers, clerks, categories and exception types.

Alternatively, the report can be filtered to include only selected overrides

The report content is the same as the nightly report and is also available in a .csv format for import into excel. After the report is viewed on screen the option to load into excel will show

Click on the View Price Override Analysis in Excel to load the report into excel. When complete click on the Close Window to return to the menu.

** Release Notes - Version 6+

Printing of Orders when Customer Backorders Received

Definition

Update to allow Order type transactions to be reprinted when Customer Backorders are received

Processing

Billing Parameters

The Billing Parameters maintenance has been updated with a new parameter to indicate if Orders should be reprinted when a customer backorder is received. This new setting will be found in screen 5 field 38.


Product Receiving

When goods are received either through PO Receipts Update or Rush Receiving, any customer backorders on Order transactions will be reprinted with the quantity received and extended value. The Order will still have to be recalled and invoiced.

** Release Notes - Version 6+

Product Maintenance Access Control

Definition

The Product Maintenance has been modified to allow Field level authorization by login ID

Processing

Branch Maintenance

The branch must first be flagged to use the user level Product Maintenance Limits

Menu Path Utilities > System Setup > Inventory > Branch Maintenance

The Product Maintenance Limits must be set to Yes

** Release Notes - Version 6+

Product Maintenance Screen Enhancements

Definition

Enhancements made to the product maintenance screen.

** Release Notes - Version 6+

Purchase Orders - Booking & Specials

Definition

Alternate purchase order types can be allowed by Supplier, Booking and Special so the order quantity does not affect normal replenishment at all or until the purchase order should be in transit. The visibility of the order quantity is controlled by a setting in the purchasing parameters, always show the on order quantity the same as a regular PO, never show the on order quantity or only show the on order quantity when the PO Required Date is withing the Suppliers lead time

Processing

Parameter Maintenance

Menu option System utilities > system setup > purchasing > parameters maintenance > screen 2. Fields “44 Booking Update On Order” and “45 Special Update On Order” are global parameters for a branch to control the display of On Order quantities for all Suppliers.

The options are:


Supplier Maintenance

In order to use the Booking or Special purchase order option the Supplier must also be set to allow this. Menu option Purchasing > Data maintenance > supplier

Field “27 Booking/Special?” must be set to Y to allow these types of PO for the Supplier.


Create Purchase Order from Suggested Order

When selecting “Order” from a suggested order one of the options is to designate the purchase order a Booking or Special PO.

The On Order quantities will be updated based on the purchase order type chosen. A regular purchase order will be created if this field is left blank.

Once the purchase order is created the Booking/Special flag cannot be changed on the purchase order.


Purchase Order Maintenance

If adding a new purchase order manually through the Add/Change Purchase Order the Booking/Special can also be assigned.

Leaving this field blank with treat the on order quantities as a regular PO, if changed to B or S the on order quantities will be updated based on the type chosen.

The type of Booking or Special can only be set when initially Adding a purchase order, once the purchase order number has been assigned and parts are about to be added this can no longer be changed

Suggested Order Report

A new column has been added to the Suggested Order report, “B/S Order”, which will show the Booking and Special on order quantities for information.

Items On Order by Vendor

Menu option Purchasing > reporting > items on order by vendor has been updated to allow for the reporting of part on Booking and Special purchase orders only. All parts on order for the supplier will be included if the “Booking/Special” option is “N”

** Release Notes - Version 6+

Quote Handling Improvements

Overview

Parameter Maintenance

The Billing Parameters have been updated to allow the inclusion of Orders, Quotes and Packing Slips in the document search options when you call up a customer in the invoicing screen. For Quotes the option to Delete and the Default setting for the Delete have also been added.

The menu path to modify these setting is System Utilities > Sales Desk > Parameter File Reset > Screen 4

Invoicing

In the Invoice screen when a customer is entered various messages could be displayed based on the outstanding documents of file for the customer. One or many of these options could be displayed O – Open Orders, P – Packing Slips, Q – Quotes, A – All, N – None such as shown below.

The default is always “N” to continue and start a new transaction but any of the other options can be entered to launch the search function.

The search offers to option to search by Purchase Order number or pressing Enter will list all Open Transactions for the selected type.

For Cash Sales using the PO Number or Ship To Name to identify the customer will assist in the recall of Open Transactions.

Quotations created for transactions that exceed the customers credit limit will automatically have a purchase order assigned as “CH”.

** Release Notes - Version 6+

RF Gun User Guide - 2022

RF Gun Procedures

Login and password

The standard login of the RF gun is [rf]. Multiple store installations or sites with more than 1 rf gun will have custom logins that you will be advised of at the time of install.  The password matches the login.

Control Keys

3) Receive O/S P.O.


This option will list all of the outstanding Purchase orders on the system and will allow you to select one to be received. To select a P.O. simply select one of the three options, 0=PO, 3=NEXT and 9= QUIT. When you use option 0 you will be prompted to enter the PO number. The P.O. number to be received does not have to be displayed on the screen to enter the P.O. number. CTLR followed by R will take you back to the main menu.

The PO Listing screen could be bypassed if desired and the menu altered to go to the second screen to enter the PO Number with freight, brokerage and other costs


P.O. # SUPPLIER NAME  
105053 NTN BEARING C  
105312 FLEETSPEC      
106325 MODERN SALES   
106372 MODERN SALES   
106771 DANA HEAVY VE  
106783 AUTOMANN CANA  
106833 ZF CV SYSTEMS  
106923 MODERN SALES   
106931 GLOBAL PARTS-  
106933 GLOBAL PARTS-  
107041 DANA HEAVY VE  
107252 ZF CV SYSTEMS  
107253 BENDIX CVS CA  



0=PO,3=Next,9=Quit N  

When a PO Number has been selected the supplier will be displayed with the option to enter the freight, brokerage and other cost values.

po#  111346         
GABRIEL RIDE CO
freight     .........
brokerage         .00
other costs       .00

The first question to be answered in the third screen is if you wish to use “Autoscan” Y or N.. The use of “Autoscan” prompts you to scan each item and it defaults the received quantity to 1 unit for each scan and then goes back to the barcode field for the next scan. Alternatively, if “Autoscan” is turned off N you will be prompted for a quantity each time you scan an item. You will have to accept each entry with CTRL followed by A.

If you are using the “Autoscan” mode you can correct the quantity after the item is scanned by pressing Tab or CTRL I. After entering the new quantity press CTRL A at “Any change” to accept the entry.

When not using Autoscan, the cursor will go to the “received” field after the barcode is scanned waiting for a quantity to be entered. The quantity entered will be ADDED to any previous quantity received. A negative quantity received can be used to correct an error.

If the quantity received is excess of the total quantity ordered for that part a message will display Over-receive?(Y/N) Y

po#  111364        
sup  RIDE-AIR CONTRO
#lines/OS    6/    4
b/c  ...............
cat  ... ...........


....................
....................
PO line#     ..... 
units ord'rd ......
units rec'vd ......
back-ordered .     




Autoscan?          N

If the part scanned is to be cross docked to other branches a message will display near the bottom of the screen “CROSS DOCK” so the user can separate these parts for splitting to the branches during the update.

po#  111384        
sup  KLEEN-FLO TUMBL
#lines/OS    6/    6
b/c  700002354940  
cat  KLE KLEEN-FLO 
part               
291                
LEMON DASHBOARD CLE
PO line#         1 
units ord'rd    24 
units rec'vd       
back-ordered Y     
received     ......
CROSS DOCK                   

Pressing CTRL A at the barcode will start the completion process where you will be asked “update now?” where the options are Y or N. When answered with an “N” the user is asked if they wish to print the Edit List.

When starting the update, the next option is to enter the invoice number.

If the PO included parts for cross dock, these parts will be shown with the split quantities for each location. This information is to be used to separate the parts received for the various locations. If the part is not received in full the user will need to allocate the quantity received to the locations based on their needs. The quantity allocated to a branch CANNOT exceed the original quantity ordered. If a branch requires more than has been ordered for them, a manual transfer will need to be created to send the additional amount.

cat GAB order    56
85934              
rec    56          
         split   56
br order  o/h  split
01    18    5    18
02     0    0      
03     8    0     8
05     0    8      
06    30    9    30
08     0   25      
09     0    0      
10     0    0      

After all of the quantity splits have been reviewed the update process will begin and the various update reports printed. Also, Stock Transfers for the split quantities will be printed during the update process.

** Release Notes - Version 6+

Substitute Chaining

Definition

Part number Substitutes can now be chained and maintained from a single screen for all parts in the chain

Processing

Parameter Maintenance

A parameter must first be set to use the substitute chaining feature in the product maintenance screen. Menu option system utilities > system setup > sales desk > Parts Billing Parameters > screen 1


There are 2 flags, Substitute Chain is to show all related substitutes in the information window on the invoice screen and the new addition is the Maintenance option to show the substitute chain when using Product Maintenance.

Product Maintenance

When using the product maintenance screen with the Substitute Maintenance set to “Y” another message will appear after accepting the part, Maintain substitutes?. Entering “Y” to this question will bring up the Substitute Chain screen.

From this screen a new substitute can be added, providing it does not already have a substitute, or a substitute can be deleted from the chain. The Substitute information for any changes will be updated on the affected parts.

** Release Notes - Version 6+

Suspense Payment Enhancements

Definition

Modifications have been made to remove any invoices with a payment type of Suspense prior to the end of day being completed so they do not impact the General Ledger because they have not impacted Inventory when they were created. Also, to prevent an attempt to process a card payment on a PC without a card terminal the payment screen has been modified to test for the presence of an active card terminal.

Processing

Payment Screen

When processing a cash sale, the payment screen will now test for a card terminal being properly connected when first entering the screen. If the card terminal is not properly connected or if the PC does not have a card terminal you will see a message “please wait testing terminal”


If the card terminal is not active or if the work station does not have a card terminal the payment screen will show a message “No Card Terminal, Only Cash Payment Types, Press ENTER to test for Terminal Again”


If there is no card terminal then the only options allowed for payment are $ - Cash , C – Cheque or E – E-Transfer. If the card terminal issue has been corrected pressing Enter will test for the terminal again and if found will allow a card transaction.

End of Day

A new report has been added to the end of day processing which will list any invoices created that day with a payment type of Suspense. This report will be run separately for each location

Also, a new process has been added before the End of Day updates which will:

Once this process is complete the normal End of Day updates will run and there will be no invoices with a payment type of Suspense included.

** Release Notes - Version 6+

Web Order Discounts

Definition

Counterpoint can be configured to automatically apply a percentage discount to web orders received. This discount can also be limited to customer assigned to certain sales clerks.

Processing

Billing Parameters

The percentage discount must be added to the Billing Parameters,  system utilities > system setup > sales desk > parts billing Parameters > screen 5

 

** Release Notes - Version 6+

Specials / Contracts Enhancements

Overview

Modifications have been made to the Specials/Contract screen to allow the creation of a Special or Contract based on the Discount Level assigned to parts within a category, Product Class, Product Subclass and Customer Discount Group.

Another option added to the Specials/Contracts is the inclusion of Non-Stocked products. This only applies to Specials/Contracts setup for an entire category where the part being sold is found in the Price Book. If using the Discount Level option for the Special the Non-Stocked pricing parameter on the part would need to match the Discount Level on the Special


Specials Maintenance

At least one of the main options must be chosen when setting up a new special, Customer, Category, Discount Level, Discount Group, Class or Sub Class or a combination of these can be selected.


Customer

If left blank the special will apply to all customers and if you wish to use a specific customer they will need to be setup to “Allow Contract Pricing = Y” in the Customer Maintenance screen. Depending on the Billing Parameter setting “Contract Only” found on screen 3 a Contract setup for a specific customer will always sell at the Contract price if set to Y and will sell at the lowest available price based on Discounts and Specials for the product if set to N.

The Billing Parameter Maintenance is found under Utilities > System Setup > Sales Desk > Parts Billing Parameters.

Category – Part Number

A Special/Contract can be setup for a specific Category/Part Number or an entire Category by just entering the Category and leaving the Part Number blank. If setup for an entire Category then the pricing will be entered as a Price Level and Discount (+/-).

Discount Level

The use of Discount Level for a Special or Contract requires that the Special/Contract be setup for an entire Category or All Categories. When adding a Special/Contract for an entire Category it also requires that you identify if the Special/Contract is to only affect parts with a blank Discount Level or if it is to be all parts. If a specific Discount Level is assigned to the Special/Contract the Only if Blank will be automatically filled in.

Discount Group

Specials setup for a Discount Group will apply to all customers assigned to that discount group regardless of the “Allow Contract Pricing” setting on the customer.

Class/Subclass

The Special/Contract will apply to all part numbers contained in the Class or Class and Subclass. The pricing will be by Price Level and Discount (+/-).

Only at Net

When this is set to “N” [Net Only] the Special will apply to All Customers as the net price. This will override the customers regular discounts but if the Billing Parameters are set for “Contract Only” = Y then an existing Contract price will take precedence.

Start – End Dates

This is the time frame the Special/Contract will run for, inclusive of the start and end dates. If a To Be Sold quantity is used then the Special/Contract will be in effect until the available quantity is sold or the end date is reached, whichever occurs first.

Price

If the Special/Contract is for a specific part number then a Unit Price can be entered otherwise the price will be based on a Price Level and Discount (+/-)

Price Break

The Quantity Price Breaks option has been updated to allow Quantity Breaks for individual customers or discount groups as well as all customers. The dates may be used to limit the time this price break is offered. The net price is left blank and “0” (zero) is used for the price level with a blank  percentage value when adding a Price Break Special. The Price Break code is entered into the special, the Tab key can be used to search the codes setup in the system. Only S type Price Break codes can be used in the Specials.

Within the Billing Parameters the system must be set to not show line discounts in order to take advantage of Quantity Price Breaks. This setting, D% on screen YNDS is found on screen 3 of the Billing Parameter Maintenance and must be an N as shown in the parameter screen above.

Include Non-Stocked

Specials/Contracts setup for an entire category or discount level can be applied to Non-Stocked parts included in the price book.

To Be Sold

This will limit the Special/Contract to the number of units entered. When the quantity sold exceeds the “To be Sold” value the price will revert back to the normal price.

Quantity Sold

This value is updated automatically as sales take place

Flyer

This is a reference description used for reporting.

** Release Notes - Version 6+

Accounts Payable Invoice Matching

Overview

The Accounts Payable matching in Counterpoint®has been updated to allow matching of invoices, received through EDI or entered manually, to Purchase Order receipts and product received through Rush Receiving along with the ability to match a single invoice to multiple receipts.

Additional reporting has also been added for review of invoices or receipts that are not matched.

Processing

Accounts Payable Parameters


A new date has been added to the Accounts Payable parameters to limit the invoices listed in the matching screen at startup, ignoring invoices prior to the Match Date.

The Invoice Adjustment allows for inclusion of a default percentage or amount in the transaction entry to be included in the distribution amount and allocated to a separate G/L Account.

The Invoice Matching process uses is the Threshold Data where invoices that have a price difference less than the threshold will have the variance amount posted to the A/P Invoice Price Variance GL Account indicated in the branches Purchasing Parameters as described later.

image


Override Codes


A new database for Override Codes has been added to allow users to bypass the matching process, however these overrides are logged and can be reported on and require a PIN # to be used.

The new option to maintain these codes is Accounts Payable à Data Maintenance à Override Codes. The Add, Change and Delete options are available for the 2 character code and 30 character description.

Whenever an invoice for a Vendor which is setup for invoice matching is not matched a PIN # will be required and an Override Code will be required. The reason for this is to allow reporting of unmatched invoices.

image



Invoice Adjustment Codes

Transaction Adjustment Codes are used to apply a default adjustment amount to an A/P Transaction for a Vendor.

The menu option to setup these codes is Accounts Payable à Data Maintenance à Transaction Adjustment Codes. The Add, Change and Delete options are available for a single character code, 20 character description, adjustment type %age or $ amount, rate or amount and GL Account to post the adjustment to.

image

These codes can be applied as a default to the Vendor or can be entered manually during the Accounts Payable transaction input

Vendor Maintenance


Changes have been made to the Vendor Maintenance screen so the Vendor can be flagged as a Vendor which requires matching and a default transaction adjustment code.

image

This field must be populated with “Y” to invoke the matching process when processing Accounts Payable Invoices.

The Adjustment code will be applied to all A/P Transactions for the Vendor by default but could be removed during the transaction entry if needed.

Supplier Maintenance

As there can be many Purchasing Suppliers setup for a single Accounts Payable Vendor a new field has been added to the Supplier Maintenance screen to identify the Accounts Payable Vendor number. This can be a Canadian or US Vendor

image

Purchasing Parameters

A new GL Account entry has been added to the purchasing parameters for use with price variances between purchase receipts and accounts payable invoices. Amount variances within the allowable threshold will be posted to this account.

image

Accounts Payable Transaction Input

Vendors setup with a default Transaction Adjustment code will have the code and rate displayed when the transaction is entered.

image

For Vendors setup to require invoice matching, after the GL Distribution amounts are entered:


Select EDI Invoices for Payment

The EDI invoices to process will be selected from the list of EDI invoices received. When the selection is complete and Create Transaction Batch is selected:

image



Foreign Currency Rush Receiving Match

Adding an Adjustment Code for Foreign Currencies, coded to the GL Foreign Exchange account number, will assist in the matching of goods received through Rush Receiving from foreign suppliers allowing the transaction to be fully match through the transaction input screen.

image

Adding the Adjustment code to the transaction then updating the amount to match the receipt and Vendor invoice. Using the Adjustment value to increase the distribution amount by the currency exchange value.

Manual Matching

Menu option Accounts Payable à Transaction Processing à Manual PO Match is used to manually match invoices where an override was initially used or a price discrepancy exist between the vendor invoice and received value.

image

The Receipt PO number is used to recall a receipt of goods and the items to match are selected to match to the vendor invoice.

Invoice Match Override Clear

Menu option Accounts Payable à Transaction Processing à Invoice Match Override Clear is used to manually clear invoice match overrides where no further action is to be taken and a manual G/L Journal entry will be used to make the necessary adjustments.

image

A Vendor number can be entered to view a single vendors invoices or the field can be left blank to view all invoices overrides.

Enter a “Y” to select the invoices to be cleared.

The total selected to be cleared will be displayed at the to of the screen

When complete a PIN number and Override Code will be required to exit.

Reporting

Available Purch. For Payment

Menu option Accounts Payable à Reporting à Status Reports à Available Purch for Payment or Accounts Payable à Transaction Processing à Available Purch for Payment

This report is to list product receiving’s that have not been fully paid.

Report has been modified to include:

After the closing the Report Viewer window the option to open the extract with excel will be displayed

image

The extract file to import into excel manually is Z:\html\ap1\APAVAILLS.csv


Invoice Match Overrides

Menu option Accounts Payable à Reporting à Status Reports à Invoice Match Overrides or Accounts Payable à Transaction Processing à Invoice Match Overrides

Report to list all invoices that where an Override was used to complete the invoice process

This will create both a report and extract for import to excel.

After the closing the Report Viewer window the option to open the extract with excel will be displayed

Click on the Close Window to return to the menu


The extract file for import to excel is Z:\html\ap1\APLOGRP.csv

Vendor

Vendor Name

Invoice

Invoice Reference

Invoice Date

Federal Tax Amount

Invoice Amount

Amount to Distribute

Reason

User

Pin

001320

BALDWIN FILTERS INC.

23425684

2023-01-23

0

1075.8

1183.38

Force Pay Invoice

amslogin

3

001320

BALDWIN FILTERS INC.

23468406

2023-02-10

0

1368.36

1505.2

Invoice Not Paid

amslogin

698

001340

DAYTON PARTS

12345

0

0

0

Invoice Not Paid

amslogin

698

001340

DAYTON PARTS

123456

2023-05-01

19.05

400

0

Force Pay Invoice

amslogin

698



Accounts Payable

Manuals, Users Guides and Troubleshooting Guides for the COUNTERPOINT Accounts Payable Module

Accounts Payable

AP Month End

The Accounts Payable Month End does not have to be run on the last day of the month.  You may hold the period open, delaying the process until all vendor invoices have been posted for the previous month. 

Transaction Purge

  1. ACCOUNTS PAYABLE…à8. month end processing…à1.transaction purge

Purge any transactions that may be on file.  Only those invoices with payments or credit/debit memos in full will be removed.  This is the same process that is run from the 2. Accounts payable à 6. automatic cheque processing menu and may be skipped here if completed as part of each cheque run.

Set Month End Date

  1. ACCOUNTS PAYABLE…à8. month end processing…à2.set month end date

Enter the date to be used in ageing the remaining outstanding invoices.  This is most often the last day of the month being closed.  Once the month is closed, returned here and set the date to the end of the new current month.

Aged Detail Trial Balance

  1. ACCOUNTS PAYABLE…à8. month end processing…à3.AGED DETAIL TRIAL BALANCE

This report will print the details of each outstanding vendor invoice.  The report shows the vendor number and name, the invoice number, due and payment date, the ageing as well as the discount amount and date.

Aged SUMMARY Trial Balance

  1. ACCOUNTS PAYABLE…à8. month end processing…à4.AGED SUMMARY TRIAL BALANCE

Accounts Payable Month End Update

  1. ACCOUNTS PAYABLE…à8. month end processing…à5. ACCOUNTS PAYABALE MONTH END

The last step in the Accounts Payable Month End process is to advance the GL period, which is done by selecting this function once.  If you are in doubt whether this has been run, check the financial period field in 9. SYSTEM UTILITIES à 3. SYSTEM SETUP à 2. Accounts payable à 1. SYSTEM PARAMETERS

Accounts Payable

AP Reporting

VENDOR MASTER(NUMERIC)

  1. ACCOUNTS PAYABLE…à3. REPORTING…à1. MASTER FILE LISTINGS…à1. VENDOR MASTER(NUMERIC)

This report will print almost all of the information contained on the 2. Accounts payable… à 1. DATA maintenance… à 1. Vendor MaSTER screen in numerical (vendor number) order.

VENDOR MASTER(ALPHA)

  1. ACCOUNTS PAYABLE…à3. REPORTING…à1. MASTER FILE LISTINGS…à2. VENDOR MASTER(ALPHA)

This report will print almost all of the information contained on the 2. Accounts payable… à 1.DATA maintenance… à 1. Vendor MaSTER screen in alphabetical (vendor name) order.

VENDOR SUMMARY(NUMERIC)

  1. ACCOUNTS PAYABLE…à3. REPORTING…à1. MASTER FILE LISTINGS…à3. VENDOR SUMMARY(NUMERIC)

This report provides the basic information on one line per vendor: the number and name, address, and phone and fax number and prints in numerical (vendor number) order.

VENDOR SUMMARY(ALPHA)

  1. ACCOUNTS PAYABLE…à3. REPORTING…à1. MASTER FILE LISTINGS…à4. VENDOR SUMMARY(ALPHA)

This report provides the basic information on one line per vendor: the number and name, address, and phone and fax number and prints in alphabetical (vendor name) order.

MAILING LABELS – CREATE

  1. ACCOUNTS PAYABLE…à3. REPORTING…à1. MASTER FILE LISTINGS…à5. MAILING LABELS-CREATE

MAILING LABELS – ALIGN/PRINT

  1. ACCOUNTS PAYABLE…à3. REPORTING…à1. MASTER FILE LISTINGS…à6. MAILING LABELS-CREATE

Cash Forecast Report

  1. ACCOUNTS PAYABLE…à3. REPORTING…à2. STATUS REPORTS…à1. CASH FORECAST
  2. Vendors

Either use [A] to select all vendors or [S] to select specific vendors.  There is no default for this field.

  1. Type

Either use [d] for the detail or [s] for the summary version of this report.  There is no default for this field.

Whichever you choose, the purpose of this report is to give you the opportunity to see the cash that will be required in order to pay the outstanding invoices currently posted to vendor accounts. 

  1. Date 1
  2. Date 2
  3. Date 3

Enter three dates in ascending (from most recent to most future) order.  These would most likely be the next three cheque run dates.

The detail report shows the vendor number and name, the invoice number and date, and the discount amount and due date.  Plus, each invoice for each vendor is slotted into the appropriate date range.  Invoices that are due on or before the specified date will print in that column.

The summary report prints the same information, but just a total line for each vendor.  The amounts assigned to the dated columns would be the same, regardless of format.

VENDOR ANALYSIS

  1. ACCOUNTS PAYABLE…à3. REPORTING…à2. STATUS REPORTS…à2. VENDOR ANALYSIS

This report prints the vendor number and name, the hold expiry date (if there is one), the account balance.  The number of purchases, the YTD total purchases and the date of last purchase, the number of memos, the YTD totals for memos and the total discounts taken and lost are also included.

VENDOR HOLD

  1. ACCOUNTS PAYABLE…à3. REPORTING…à2. STATUS REPORTS…à3. VENDOR HOLD

Enter a date range or [enter] through the date fields for all.  This range refers to the hold expiry date field for any on hold vendor as set in 2. Accounts payable… à 4. automatic cheque processing…à 3. CASH REQUIREMENTS… à 1. set vendor hold status

The report will print most of the same information that is printed on the vendor analysis report.   

INVOICE HOLD

  1. ACCOUNTS PAYABLE…à3. REPORTING…à2. STATUS REPORTS…à4. INVOICE HOLD

 

Enter the vendor number range or [enter] through the fields to all vendors.  This report prints, for any on hold invoice as set in  2. accounts payable… à 6. automatic cheque processing à 3. cash requirements… à 2. set invoice hold status.

The report will print most of the same information that is printed on the vendor analysis report.

Vendor History – Summary

  1. ACCOUNTS PAYABLE…à3. REPORTING…à2. STATUS REPORTS…à5. VENDOR HISTORY-SUMMARY

This report will print the same information, based on the ranges you enter, as the Vendor History Inquiry – Summary.

Enter the starting and ending vendor numbers, or the specific vendor (use the same number for both from and to) or press [enter] twice to request all vendors.  Use the same philosophy for the date range.

Vendor History  – Detail

  1. ACCOUNTS PAYABLE…à3. REPORTING…à2. STATUS REPORTS…à6. VENDOR HISTORY-DETAIL

This report will print the same format as the Vendor History Inquiry – Detail shows on screen.  Your request may be as narrow as a single vendor for a specific invoice on a specific date or as wide as all vendors for all invoices for all time.

Accounts Payable

AP Year End

  1. ACCOUNTS PAYABLE…à8. month end processing…à6. Year end update

The Accounts Payable Year End Update will clear the YTD information for purchases, memos and discounts from the 2. Accounts payable… à 1. DATA maintenance… à Vendor MASTER screen.  It should only be run once, immediately following completion of the 2. Accounts payable… à 8. MONTH END PROCESSING… à 5. ACCOUNTS PAYABLE month end update process.

The 2.Accounts payable… à 3. REPORTING…à 2. STATUS REPORTS…à2. VEndor Analysis report should be run before completing this process.

Accounts Payable

Auto Cheque Processing

Set Cheque Date

  1. ACCOUNTS PAYABLE…à6. AUTO CHEQUE PROCESSING…à1. SET CHEQUE DATE
Required

Automatic cheques are those that pay invoices which have previously been entered to existing vendors via 2. Accounts payable à 4. transaction processing à 1. transaction input or through the PO Matching processes.  You can print the cheques and statements, which is the payment advice or remittance sheets for instances when there are more than 14 invoices being paid on one cheque, or hand-write your own cheques and just print the statements.

To start the process, enter in the date to use as the cheque date for this batch of cheques.  Any invoice with a payment or discount due date on or before this date will be flagged for payment during this process.  You may enter a date in the future, but you may not enter any date prior to the current one.

Transaction Purge

  1. ACCOUNTS PAYABLE…à6. AUTO CHEQUE PROCESSING…à2. TRANSACTION PURGE
Optional

Run this to clear out all paid invoices and invoices with credit memos that cancel each other.  This process will not destroy any outstanding invoices or credits and you may run this function at any time or many times during a month.  Should you choose not to run this with each cheque run process, the same function is accessible from the accounts payable à ap month end menu.

Set Vendor Hold Status

  1. ACCOUNTS PAYABLE…à6. AUTO CHEQUE PROCESSING…à3. CASH REQUIREMENTS…à1. SET VENDOR HOLD STATUS
Optional

When you do not wish to have a cheque generated to a particular vendor regardless of the state of the account or the due date of any particular invoice, set the Hold? field to [Y] and then indicate the hold expiry date when the Hold status will be lifted.  This vendor will be completely skipped during the selection of invoices.

Placing a vendor on hold is different than deferring payment until a later date.  Normally used is cases of dispute, setting a vendor on hold means that the vendor will not be considered for payment until the hold status is removed via this menu option.

Set Invoice Hold Status

  1. ACCOUNTS PAYABLE…à6. AUTO CHEQUE PROCESSING…à3. CASH REQUIREMENTS…à2.SET INVOICE HOLD STATUS
Optional

Sometimes, not all invoices on a vendor account are to be held back from being considered for payment until a specified date.  In that instance, this function will hold only those invoices specifically selected.  Enter the vendor number, or use the [tab] to search for a vendor number, then enter the specific invoice to be held.  The invoice number must match exactly to the one on file, including leading zeros and/or any spaces. 

Placing an invoice on hold is different than deferring payment until a later date.  It means that the invoice will not be considered for payment until the hold status has been removed and is normally used in cases of dispute.

Cash Requirements – All Vendors

  1. ACCOUNTS PAYABLE…à6. AUTO CHEQUE PROCESSING…à3. CASH REQUIREMENTS…à3.CASH REQ-ALL VENDORS
Optional

Run this report when you want a listing of all vendors with outstanding invoices due on or prior to the cheque date you entered in the set cheque date menu function. If you choose to include the holds, then they will appear on the report for you to decide whether or not they can be considered for payment, in which case, you must remove the hold status on the vendor or invoice using the set vendor (or invoice) hold status function.

Cash Requirements – Selected Vendors

  1. ACCOUNTS PAYABLE…à6. AUTO CHEQUE PROCESSING…à3. CASH REQUIREMENTS…à4.CASH REQ-SELECTED VENDORS
Optional

This is identical to the Cash Requirements – All Vendors function, except that you need to specify the vendor number (up to 16).  If they have outstanding invoices with payment due dates on or prior to the cheque date you entered earlier, then they will appear on the report.  The same rules apply for holds as with the All Vendors option.

Invoice Payment Deferral

  1. ACCOUNTS PAYABLE…à6. AUTO CHEQUE PROCESSING…à3. CASH REQUIREMENTS…à5.INVOICE PAYMENT DEFERRAL
Optional

Deferring an invoice is moving the payment due date forward, past the cheque date you set earlier, effectively removing that particular invoice from the list of those to be paid in this cheque run.  This is different than a hold as the hold process keeps all original dates, and will not consider the invoice for payment until the hold is removed. 

Deferring actually changes the payment due date, (although ageing is not affected) so that the invoice is considered for payment again once the new payment date falls on or before the cheque date you select in a subsequent cheque run.  If any vendor accounts have a credit balance (they owe you), then those documents must be deferred as well prior to continuing.

Payment Deferral – by Vendor

  1. ACCOUNTS PAYABLE…à6. AUTO CHEQUE PROCESSING…à3. CASH REQUIREMENTS…à6. PAYMENT DEFERRAL BY VENDOR
Optional

This is the same as the By Invoice option but is used if you need to defer multiple invoices for a particular vendor.  There is an option to defer all invoices to the new payment and discount dates you enter, or just selected invoices.  Even invoices that have previously been placed on hold will be deferred and will have new payment and discount dates applied from this function. 

Deferring an invoice has no affect on the hold process.

Deferred Invoice Report

  1. ACCOUNTS PAYABLE…à6. AUTO CHEQUE PROCESSING…à3. CASH REQUIREMENTS…à7. DEFERRED INVOICE REPORT
Optional

This report will print invoice information for the vendor(s) selected, as long as the vendor has deferred invoices.  The Vendor number and name, invoice number, invoice date and (new) payment date are printed as well as ageing information (will be the same as prior to the deferment since the invoice date hasn’t been changed), the discount amount and the new discount date.  Included on this report are not only deferrals just completed, but also any invoice that has been deferred since the last time the Auto-Cheque process was completed.

Cheque Calculation

  1. ACCOUNTS PAYABLE…à6. AUTO CHEQUE PROCESSING…à4. CHEQUE CALCULATION
Required

Once you have finalized the decisions on which vendors and invoices are to be paid by using the Hold and Defer functions to remove invoices from eligibility, use the cheque Calculation option to prepare the file from which the physical cheques and/or statements will be created and printed. 

This step may not be skipped for it is the foundation for all remaining cheque run tasks. 

You can enter in a minimum cheque value (the default was set in 9. SYSTEM UTILITIES à 3. SYSTEM SETUP à 2. Accounts payable à 1. SYSTEM PARAMETERS.  Either choose all vendors/invoices or again select specific vendors. 

If you choose to create cheques for all, then all invoices with a payment date on or prior to the cheque date set earlier will be paid.  If you choose to only pay selected vendors, then you have the opportunity to do that, as well as selecting the payment due date for each vendor.  Pressing [ENTER] through the due date field here will default to the cheque date you set as the first step in this process.  Any date is permitted when selecting specific vendors, even those in future periods.

Should you be required to make changes to the invoices or vendors that are selected for payment, this step may be re-run as many times as required as long as the step for auto-cheque / statement create has not been run.   In that instance, a warning message data already exists.  Continue and overwrite ? will be shown.  To continue, reply [y].  Any information previously created will be removed and will need to be re-created.

Cheque Register

  1. ACCOUNTS PAYABLE…à6. AUTO CHEQUE PROCESSING…à5. CHEQUE REGISTER
Required

This report prints the information for the selected vendors and associated invoices and shows the cheque number, the vendor number and name, the invoice number, date, reference number type, gross amount, any penalty or discount amount and the net amount.  Each vendor is totalled to provide a total cheque amount.

This is the last opportunity available for correcting any errors or omissions for this cheque run.  You may go back to the cheque calculation step to re-do it as many times as you need to in order make the data correct.

Cheque / Statement Create

  1. ACCOUNTS PAYABLE…à6. AUTO CHEQUE PROCESSING…à6. CHEQUE PRINT…à1.CHEQUE/STATEMENT CREATE

This step is Required and the POINT OF NO RETURN

Once this step is taken, the choices made in the steps above cannot be changed, as this is the process that physically creates the cheque and statement print files.  A statement is automatically created for any cheque that has more than 14 invoices being paid.  The stub portion of these cheques will be printed with the message see attached statement.

Cheque Alignment

  1. ACCOUNTS PAYABLE…à6. AUTO CHEQUE PROCESSING…à6. CHEQUE PRINT…à2.CHEQUE ALIGNMENT
Optional

Switch to your cheque forms and use the alignment to ensure that they will be printed correctly.

Cheque Print

  1. ACCOUNTS PAYABLE…à6. AUTO CHEQUE PROCESSING…à6. CHEQUE PRINT…à3.CHEQUE PRINT
Required

Once the alignment is correct, print the cheque forms.   If a problem with the physical printing of the cheques arises (ribbon break, paper jam etc), the cheques may be reprinted.  However, this means that the entire cheque run would reprint. 

Cheque STATEMENTS - ONLY

  1. ACCOUNTS PAYABLE…à6. AUTO CHEQUE PROCESSING…à6. CHEQUE PRINT…à4.CHEQUE STATEMENTS - ONLY

Cheque Update

  1. ACCOUNTS PAYABLE…à6. AUTO CHEQUE PROCESSING…à7. CHEQUE UPDATE
Required

Once the cheques have successfully printed, the last step is to apply the payments to the invoices on the vendor account and create the correct journal entries in the General Ledger. 

The Update will post the cheques against the invoices paid and purge them from the vendor file.  As with other Updates, a Transaction Journal and General Ledger Summary Journal will be printed.

Accounts Payable

Bank Reconciliation

Outstanding Cheque Report

  1. ACCOUNTS PAYABLE…à7.bank reconciliation…à1.outstanding CHEQUE report

All cheques processed through accounts payable are kept on file to assist you in balancing your bank account when the statement arrives.  This report is sorted in cheque number order and prints the source (automatic or manual/miscellaneous cheques), the cheque number, the vendor or payee (if miscellaneous cheque), and the date and amount of the cheque.

Bank Reconciliation Input

  1. ACCOUNTS PAYABLE…à7.bank reconciliation…à2.bank rec input
  2. start date

Press [enter] to default the stating date of the cheques to be cleared to the earliest date. 

  1. Source

Enter the source of the cheque, [A/P] for automatic or [M/C] for manual/miscellaneous cheques.  Pressing [enter] will result in cheques from all sources being displayed.

The cheques are displayed in numerical order, by date.  In the 9. SYSTEM UTILITIES à 3. SYSTEM SETUP à 2. Accounts payable à 1. SYSTEM PARAMETERS, the field called default cancel will control whether the cheques are automatically cleared or not.   If the default cancel is set to [y], then all cheques will be marked as cleared.    Should any cheque listed remain outstanding, enter the line number associated with the cheque number and change the cancel flag to [n].  If the default cancel field in the parameter file have been set to [y], then the opposite will apply. When exiting the program use F2 (reject) F1 (to accept), E (to exit) or Q (for quit). The system now asks to update cheques? (Y/N). The default is “Y” unless F2 (reject) is used then the default is “N”.

Bank Reconciliation Edit List

  1. ACCOUNTS PAYABLE…à7.bank reconciliation…à3.bank rec edit list

As with other processes, the Edit List is available for you to check your work before proceeding to the Update stage.

Bank Reconciliation Update

  1. ACCOUNTS PAYABLE…à7.bank reconciliation…à4.bank rec update

Use the Update process to remove all selected cancelled cheques from the Outstanding Cheque file.  A journal will print as proof that the file was updated and will show the source, cheque number and payee, date and amount.

Accounts Payable

Data File Maintenance

Vendor File Maintenance

  1. ACCOUNTS PAYABLE…à1. DATA MAINTENANCE…à1. VENDOR MASTER

Vendor

Enter in a vendor number that is up to 6 numbers in length.  The vendor number may only be a numeric number.  The number may be entered with or without leading zeros, there is no difference to the system between entering 000509 and just 509. 

If you are adding vendors with a particular numbering sequence, you may use the [tab] to search by vendor name.  Use ­(asterisk) to list all vendors in numerical order.  Or you may use the first letter of the vendor name followed by ­(asterisk) to list those specific vendors in numerical order.  Once you determine the desired number to be used for the new vendor, you may either [f2] to return to the entry screen and enter it in manually, or you may enter it on this screen and be automatically returned to the entry screen.

During the addition of the vendor record, the user will be asked if the new vendor should also be added to Purchasing as a supplier.  If the response is [Y], then the system will check to ensure that the number to be used is not already in existence within Purchasing.  If a supplier with the same number does not already exist, then a new supplier record will be automatically created, copying over the vendor name, address and telephone numbers previously entered into the vendor record.  Then the remainder of the supplier fields can be set up.  Once accepted, the user will be returned to the add vendor screen. 

Wherever possible, purchasing suppliers and accounts payable vendors should be set up with the same number, but it should be noted that changes to fields on the vendor record in Accounts Payable will not affect corresponding fields on the supplier record in Purchasing.

  1. Name
  2. Address
  3. POSTAL code

Enter the vendor name and address, including postal code exactly in the format that is to appear on cheques.   You may wish to use the last address line for the postal code if you are concerned about the window placement on your envelopes.  There is no formatting for this field so if you prefer spaces, you must enter them.  For American suppliers, the zip code may be entered with or without dashes as you prefer.

  1. Phone NUMBER

Enter in the phone number without spaces or dashes.  The phone number entered as 4445556666 will be displayed and printed as (444) 555-6666 during entry and on reports.

  1. Fax NUMBER

Enter the fax number in the same manner as the phone number.

  1. Balance

This field is never available for change.  It is updated from the processing of transactions and cheques and is the current amount that is owing to this vendor.

  1. Purch ytd
  2. # of purch
  3. last purch
  4. memos ytd
  5. # of memos

These fields are normally not changed by the user, however, during initial set-up, you may wish to enter this information.  These fields are updated by transactions and cheques made to this vendor. 

  1. hold?
  2. Hold expiry DATE

These fields display the hold status of the account that has been set in Automatic Cheque Processing à set vendor (or invoice) hold status.  They are not accessible from this screen.

  1. contact

This is an optional field.  Enter the name of the Accounts Receivable person at this company.

  1. remarks

This is an optional field used for information only.  Enter any free-form message of up to 40 characters in length.

  1. Fin year end

Enter the day and month of the vendor’s fiscal year end in this reference field (for info only).

  1. Discount taken
  2. Discount lost

These fields are not available for change by the user.  They are updated from cheques processed for this vendor.  If prompt payment terms are in place and cheques have been issued in time to qualify for those discounts, then the amount of the discount is applied to the Discount Taken field.  On the other hand, if prompt payment terms apply and the cheque to the vendor has not been in time to qualify for that discount, that amount is recorded in the Discount Lost field.

  1. G/L dist acct

If the part or service purchased from this vendor is always applied or expensed to the same General Ledger account, enter the number here. During accounts payable à transaction processing à Transaction Input, pressing [Enter] in the distribution area will default to this account number, reducing the number of keystrokes required. 

In the case where the vendor is also a supplier of product for re-sale, then this account number should be the clearing account number set up in the 9.system utilities  à 7. purchasing  à 3. purchasing parameters reset àScreen 2. system configuration screen. 

Notes for accounting personnel regarding inventory:

When inventory is received, the inventory account as set up in the associated 6.inventory  à  1. data maintenance à 1. master files à 1. category master record is increased (debited).  The opposite entry is to the clearing account (credited).

When the invoice has been received from the vendor, the distribution will remove the amount from the clearing account (debited) and increase (credited) the amount to the accounts payable control account. 

When the inventory is sold, the value of the inventory account is reduced (credited) and the expense called cost of goods sold is increased (debited).

  1. PAYMENT due day

Depending on how the 9. system utilities  à 3. system setup à 2. accounts payable à 1. system Parameters file is set-up, this field either indicates the number of days old that an invoice should be before payment is required, or on which day of the month following the invoice is due.  The due date for an individual invoice can be changed during 2. accounts payable à 4. transaction processing à 1. Transaction Input. 

  1. discount 1
  2. discount 2
  3. DiscOUNT inclUDE GST

These fields control how the prompt payment discounts work for this vendor. When the invoice is paid prior to the discount date entered during 2. aCCOUNTS payable à 4. transaction processing à 1. Transaction Input, these are the default discount amounts that will be applied to the invoice.  Normally, discounts do not apply to the gross value of an invoice, but the net of GST amount of the invoice, so the field called disc incl gst should be set to [N]

  1. gst rate

If your vendors have been converted from another accounting package to counterpoint,  field may be blank (all spaces).  If that is the case, the GST rate from 9. system utilities  à 3. system setup à 2. accounts payable à 1. system Parameters will be used.  There is no need to change the value.

  1. edi vendor
  2. edi always

Both these fields are reserved for future use.

Tab Set

The TAB SET function can be a useful tool in making repetitious changes to a single field or to multiple fields.

If you want to change the value in a field regardless of what the current value is, then enter in that field number.  If you need to check the current value of the field prior to making the change, enter in the field number before and then the field you want to change.  In other words, if you want to change field [32] and you want to see what the current value is first, enter in 31 [enter] and then [32] [enter].  After each field number is entered, press [enter].  After all the field numbers that require changing are entered, [F1] to accept your choices.

Some field numbers will not be accessible to you for change due to their function within the software. 

After acceptance of your field choices, you will be prompted for the vendor number.  Pressing [F7] will bring up the first record on file.  You will be brought to the first field you requested.  If there is a no change to be made to any of the fields on this record, reject with [F2] and request the next record with [F7].  If there is a change to this field, make it now and press [enter] to either move to the next requested field or to the any change prompt.  Once at the any change prompt, if the changes made are correct, [F1] to accept, then [F7] to request the next record. 

You may [F2] to exit at any time, either in the middle of a record (the changes will not take effect) or instead of pressing [F7] for the next record.  Any changes that you’ve made and accepted with [F1] will be kept.  You may start again at any time, but you will have to re-select your requested fields.

Parameter File Maintenance

The parameter file is generally set-up by AMS personnel during the initial installation of the Accounts payable system.  It is advised that no changes to it take place after the initial options have been chosen without first checking with AMS.

The 9. system utilities… à 3. system setup… à 2. accounts payable… à 1. system parameters File contains the GL information required by the system to correctly update the General Ledger.  All transactions posed through AP find their way to the GL.  The Parameters File ensures that all transactions are processed with a minimum of keystrokes.  This file also stores the current GL period. 

  1. A/P account

This is the liability account in the General Ledger where all outstanding invoices accumulate until paid.

  1. Discount earned account

Any discounts taken from supplier/vendor invoices are posted to this GL account.

  1. Bank account

This is the default GL account to record the payment of invoices.

  1. Gst credit acct

This account is updated with the amount of the GST on posted vendor invoices.

  1. Penalties account

If penalties are charged against a vendor, the amount of the penalty is updated to this account.

  1. Financial period

This period is the current month according to the AP system.  Entries may be updated to a future period, but not a prior period.  It is updated when the  2. ACCOUNTS PAYABLEà 8. month end processing  à5. ap month end update procedure has completed.

  1. Cheque run date

This field is updated with each cheque run.  When the 2. accounts Payable…à8. Month End processing… à5.    ap month end update procedure is run this date is also updated. Cheques can not be dated for

any date prior to today’s date.

  1. last cheque no.

The system keeps track of the cheque numbers that are used in the 2.Accounts payable… à 6.automatic cheque processing steps. 

  1. minimum cheque

In the case where a cheque amount is too low to print a cheque for, enter that number here. Entering 100 (for $1.00) here means that any cheque valued at less than $1.00 will not be printed but deferred until the value is greater than $1.00.  This field may be over-ridden when completing the 2.accounts payable… à 6.automatic cheque processing… à4.cheque calculation step.

  1. last misc cheque

The 2.accounts payable… à5.Miscellaneous cheques processing function is usually used to record hand-written cheques.  These cheques would have a separate numbering sequence from those used in automatic cheques.

  1. Gst rate

Enter in the current GST rate as 600 (6%)

  1. Days Type

You may select the type of payment terms; either proximo (a specific date in the next month) or days (number of days old) for payment to be due.  If you enter [D], then when the vendor is added, the Pmt Due Day field will mean which Date in the following month will the default due day be.  If you enter in [#], then the Pmt Due Date field in the Vendor file will be the number of days after the date of the invoice the due date will be.  Only one of the two options may be chosen and works as a company wide default.  There is no ability to change a vendor to have the opposite method.

The next three fields are used in conjunction with the 2. accounts payable…à 4.transaction processing… à2. Match PO receipts function.  They indicate the type and amount of variance allowed before needing authorization.

  1. type
  2. base
  3. value

Reserved for future use.

  1. Penalties

A contract with a vendor may sometimes have penalties included for failure to supply.  Indicate with [y] or [n] if you will use this feature.

  1. default cancel?

In the 2.accounts payable …à 7.bank reconciliation… à 2.bank reconciliation input function, you can have the cheques automatically set to a cleared [y] status and then alter the status for the ones that did not clear.  Or, if you set this flag to [n], then the status on the cheques will be not cleared and the status will have to be changed for the ones that have cleared.  This option can be changed at a later date if you feel the alternative is a better option.

  1. New cheques
  2. g/l cheque detail

Penalty Code Maintenance

  1. ACCOUNTS PAYABLE…à1. DATA MAINTENANCE…à2. PENALTY CODES
  2. code

Enter either a letter or number for this penalty.

  1. name

Enter a description of the penalty. 

  1. type

The penalty can be a percentage [%] or a dollar value [$]

  1. Rate

Enter the percentage rate or dollar value that will be discounted from any invoice tagged with this penalty code.

History Data Purge

  1. ACCOUNTS PAYABLE…à1. DATA MAINTENANCE…à3. history data purge

History is kept for all vendor invoices and their associated payments in a separate file. 

  1. Prior to date

Enter the date up to which you wish to purge.  Entering [2009 12 31] will mean that all history for the specified vendor up to that date will be removed.  Any history in the year 2010 and subsequent will be retained.

  1. Vendor

Enter the number of the vendor for which you wish to purge history, or press [enter] for all vendors.

Accounts Payable

Misc Cheque Processing

Misc Cheque Input

  1. ACCOUNTS PAYABLE…à5. MISC. CHEQUE PROCESSING…à1. MISC. CHEQUE INPUT

Miscellaneous Cheques are those written to a vendor that is not currently set up in as a vendor in 2. accounts payable à 1. data maintenance à 1. Vendor master, consequently the vendor name (payee) and address must be manually typed in.  You may print the cheques or use hand-written cheques, whichever you prefer, but you can not mix the two together in the same batch.   Entries may be made to the current financial period or one in the future, but more than one financial period in a batch is not permitted.  Since this option is designed for cheques written to non-vendors, the majority of the fields are the same as if you were entering a vendor invoice for the first time. 

  1. Cheque #

Press [enter] to accept the default cheque number taken from 9. SYSTEM UTILITIES à 3. SYSTEM SETUP à 2. Accounts payable à 1. SYSTEM PARAMETERS or enter the cheque number to use.

  1. date

Enter the date of the cheque.  Because this process can be used to record cheques that were written earlier in the period, any date is allowed, even a date for a prior period.

  1. gross

Enter the amount of the cheque.

  1. fed tax amt

This amount will NOT be automatically calculated, it must be manually entered.

  1. Discount 1
  2. Discount 2

In a regular transaction, these amounts are calculated from the information contained on the vendor record.  Since miscellaneous cheques are for those vendors without a vendor record, this process requires that any discounts taken be manually entered. 

  1. fin period

Enter the financial period for the general ledger transactions that will be created during the update process.  You may not use a financial period that has been closed in the General Ledger.  You may use a financial period in the future, however you may not mix the financial periods in one batch.  Should there be cheques to record from two separate periods, enter the cheques for one period first, and complete the steps through to update.  Then repeat the steps for the second financial period.

  1. Payee
  2. Address

Enter the name and address of the vendor exactly the way you wish them to appear on the cheque form. 

  1. Remarks

Enter remark you wish to have printed on the cheque in exactly the way you wish them to appear.  There is no formatting for this field. 

  1. Br / Account / Job num / D / Po no / Amount

Because miscellaneous cheques also record the vendor invoice at the same time as the cheque, the distribution that is required is to the expense portion of the transaction, not the bank as with manual cheques as entered in 2. Accounts payable à 4. transaction processing à 1. transaction input, type [2].  That is because the manual cheques are paying invoices already recorded in the system and therefore, the expense side has already been done.

Misc Cheque Edit List

  1. ACCOUNTS PAYABLE…à5. MISC. CHEQUE PROCESSING…à2. MISC. CHEQUE EDIT LIST

You may print the Edit List to verify your work before moving onto the next steps.  As with other edit lists, a General Ledge Summary Edit List is also generated so that you may double-check the distributions of both the cheque and the invoice.

Misc Cheque Run – Create

  1. ACCOUNTS PAYABLE…à5. MISC. CHEQUE PROCESSING…à3. MISC. CHEQUE RUN-CREATE

If you are recording a hand-written cheque, you may skip directly to the Misc cheque Update step, however if you are now required to print the cheques you’ve entered, continue with the steps for Create, Align and Print before selecting Misc cheque Update.

The creation of the file for printing cheques has no other screen, simply select the option from the menu and the file will be created.

Misc Cheque Run – Align

  1. ACCOUNTS PAYABLE…à5. MISC. CHEQUE PROCESSING…à4. MISC. CHEQUE RUN-ALIGN

If you have switched paper on your printer in order to print the cheques, run the alignment option until you are satisfied with the set-up and then proceed to the Print option.

Misc Cheque Run – Print

  1. ACCOUNTS PAYABLE…à5. MISC. CHEQUE PROCESSING…à5. MISC. CHEQUE RUN-PRINT

Your cheques will be printed.

Misc Cheque Run – Update

  1. ACCOUNTS PAYABLE…à5. MISC. CHEQUE PROCESSING…à6. MISC. CHEQUE RUN-UPDATE

When all cheques have been recorded and printed, run the misc cheque Update option to post the information.  A Transaction Journal and a General Ledger Summary Journal will be printed.

Accounts Payable

Transaction Input

Transaction Input

  1. ACCOUNTS PAYABLE…à4. TRANSACTION PROCESSING…à1.TRANSACTION INPUT

There are a number of types of transactions that are available from this input screen.  Invoices and credits from the vendor are type [0] and the default if you simply press [ENTER].  Type [1] will allow you to enter a reversing transaction to an existing invoice and type [2] is used to record manual cheques against an existing invoice.

Type 0 - Invoice

  1. Vendor

Enter in the vendor account number or use the search function by pressing [TAB].  If you are using the search, enter in all or a portion of the vendor name followed by an [­], then select the line number associated with the correct vendor in order to copy it back to the input screen. 

If you are entering a number of invoices for the same vendor, you can press [ENTER] at this field to default to the last vendor number you entered.

  1. Type

There are a number of types of transactions that you are able to do from this input screen.  Invoices from the vendor are type [0] and the default if you simply press [ENTER].

  1. Invoice

This is the vendor’s invoice number and can be either numeric or alphanumeric, up to 10 characters in length.  The system will check to see if the same invoice number has been previously used for the same vendor and will then disallow its entry.  However, it is possible to enter the same vendor/invoice number combination in the same batch, so caution is required.

  1. Invoice date

This is the date the invoice was issued by the vendor.  It is used in the calculation of the due date, either with number of days or proximo days (a specific date in the month following) depending on how the flag is set in 9. SYSTEM UTILITIES… à 3. SYSTEM SETUP… à 2. ACCOUNTS PAYABLE… à 1. SYSTEM parameterS.  The default date (what you get when you press [ENTER] through a field) is always today’s date.

  1. Reference

This is usually your own Purchase Order number, but the field is free form and could also remain blank.

  1. Payment days

The system will check the pAYMENT due day field that you have previously set up vendor record in 2. Accounts payable… à 1. DATA maintenance… à 1. vendor maSTER and use it as the default.  If there are special terms for this particular invoice, then the payment days may be changed, either by altering the days field (number or proximo) field or by changing the actual date.

  1. DiscOUNT days

Following the same format as the payment days field, you can change this date or enter in the number of days in order to reflect the date that the payment is required by the vendor in order to receive the early payment discount.

  1. FinANCIAL period

In an Open Payables system, invoices may be posted or assigned to more than one financial period.  While you can not backdate an invoice to a previously closed financial period, you may assign the invoice to a future period.  You may not assign invoices to different financial periods within the same batch.  If that becomes necessary, enter the invoices for one period; print the transaction edit List to check the entries and then transaction update to complete the processing.  Then you may continue with the entry of invoices for the next financial period.

  1. Invoice amount

Enter the total of the invoice, including any taxes or shipping and freight surcharges.

  1. FedERAL tax amount

Press [ENTER] through the % field to default to the percentage of GST that is charged on this invoice.  The amount of GST will be calculated.  If the calculated amount is the same as on the vendor invoice, continue entry.  If the amount calculated for GST is different than that of the vendor invoice, use the [f4] to return to the GST amount field, change it and continue. 

  1. Penalties

Enter in the appropriate penalty code if you are using this feature as determined by the penalties? field in 9. SYSTEM UTILITIES… à 3. SYSTEM SETUP… à …2. ACCOUNTS PAYABLE à 1. SYSTEM parameterS.  You can accept the calculated amount or percentage and amount set up from the codes in Penalties Maintenance, or change them as you wish.

Dist amount

This is the amount that needs to be distributed in the next section and is the subtotal of the fields above.  It is a calculated field and may not be changed.

  1. Discount 1
  2. Discount 2

These fields will default to the percentages that have been set up in 2. Accounts payable à 1. DATA  maintenance à 1. Vendor MaSTER and are applied to the invoice when the cheque date is on or prior to the discount date.  The GL account number for discounts is set up in 9. SYSTEM UTILITIES à 3. SYSTEM SETUPà 2. Accounts payable à 1. SYSTEM ParameterS, so there is no need to specify that account in the next section.

Net amount

This is the total of the invoice amount, plus taxes and penalties; minus any discounts and will be the same as the amount to distribute.  This amount may not be changed.

To distribute

The system will always calculate the net amount required to be distributed to the General Ledger and will not allow the transaction to be accepted for updating until the to distribute amount is at 0.00

  1. Br / Account

Enter the branch number (or just press [ENTER] for the default branch and then enter the account number you wish to have the invoice distributed to.  If the default GL dist acct field has been set up on the vendor record in 2. Accounts payable à 1. DATA maintenance à 1. vendor maSTER, pressing [ENTER] here will default to that account.  However, you can enter in any valid account number.  This is NOT the Accounts Payable account number, by default that account is used automatically.

The tab search routines are available at the GL distribution (branch and account) fields.  A tab in the br field will mean that the search will return accounts from all branches (for multiple branchs).  A tab at the account field will return accounts from just the entered branch.

Job no / D / PO number

Reserved for future use

  1. Amount

Either press [ENTER] to apply the entire net amount of the invoice to the indicated account, or enter in the amount you wish to apply, then repeat until the to distribute amount is 0.00. 

Type 1 – Debit Memo

Only fields that are different from Type [0] are listed here

  1. Type

For this section, the type is [1], indicating a debit memo, which reduces the amount owed to this vendor. 

  1. Invoice

The invoice number must already have been posted for this vendor and the number entered here must exactly match the one that is on file, including leading zeros or spaces. 

  1. Invoice amount

Enter the total of the debit memo, but do NOT enter with a [–] as the system already knows the sign of the document.

Type 2 – Manual Cheque

Only fields that are different from type [0] are listed here.  Manual cheques are used to immediately record hand-written cheques, usually when you have to pay only one or two invoices that have previously been entered and updated to the vendor account.

  1. Type

For this section, the type is [2], indicating a manual cheque.

  1. Invoice

The invoice number must already have been posted for this vendor and the number entered here must exactly match the one that is on file, including any leading zeros or spaces. The remaining fields are defaulted to the values from the originating invoice.

  1. Reference

At the chg Hdr? prompt, enter in the field number for the Reference and enter in your cheque number.  The same cheque number can be used to record the payment for more than one invoice. 

  1. Br / Account

Press [enter] at the branch and account fields unless you wish to change the entry from the default GL account for the bank as set up in 9. SYSTEM UTILITIES à 3. SYSTEM SETUPà 2. Accounts payable à 1. SYSTEM ParameterS   

Match P.O. Receipts

  1. ACCOUNTS PAYABLE…à4. TRANSACTION PROCESSING…à2.MATCH P.O. RECEIPTS

When a vendor invoice or credit has been received for goods processed through Purchasing or Returned Goods, the new menu option 2. accounts Payable à 4. Transaction Processing à 2. Match PO Receipts may be used to process the transaction and update the vendor account (in place of transaction processing à transaction input). 

Transactions created in Match PO Receipts are updated to the vendor accounts in the same manner as regular Accounts Payable transactions using 2. Accounts Payable à 4. Transaction Processing à 4. Transaction Update.  If there are regular A/P transactions not yet updated on file, they will be updated to the vendor account at the same time.  Match PO transactions look identical to regular transactions on the vendor account. They also update to the General Ledger in the same way.  The GL Summary Journal from 2. Accounts Payable à 4. Transaction Processing à 4. Transaction Update will show the offsetting entry to the A/P Clearing Account.

  1. po number

Press [enter] to bypass the field and enter the AP vendor number instead. 

  1. vendor

Enter the vendor number to search the available purchase orders, the branch and date range are also required.

  1. branch

Enter the branch for the purchase order

  1. date from
  2. date to

Enter the date range ([enter] for the default dates).

A list of all unbilled PO’s available for the vendor and entered date range will be displayed.  Select from the list each packing slip (one or more) that is to be matched.  The amount shown on the screen is the total available for that packing slip.  If the total amount is not what is being invoiced, enter the amount, and the detail for that packing slip is displayed to allow the selection of individual lines for that packing slip.

Continue until all desired packing slips have been accounted for, then press [f1] to return to the invoicing screen.   When the header is accepted, the system will search for the originating transaction within the Purchasing system and automatically fill in the rest of the fields.  Enter the invoice number and make any changes that may be required.  Accept the entry with [F1].  Multiple AP invoices/credits are possible for the same PO until the total amount of the PO/RGM has been recorded as invoiced/credited.  Once fully invoiced, an RGM or PO may not be not be used again in this function.

Transactions created in Match PO Receipts are updated to the vendor accounts in the same manner as regular Accounts Payable transactions using 2. Accounts Payable à 4. Transaction Processing à 4. Transaction Update.  If there are regular A/P transactions not yet updated on file, they will be updated to the vendor account at the same time.  Match PO transactions look identical to regular transactions on the vendor account. They also update to the General Ledger in the same way.  The GL Summary Journal from 2. Accounts Payable à 4. Transaction Processing à 4. Transaction Update will show the offsetting entry to the A/P Clearing Account.

Transaction Edit List

  1. ACCOUNTS PAYABLE…à4. TRANSACTION PROCESSING…à3. TRANSACTION EDIT LIST

The Edit List process creates and prints the Transaction Edit List to provide you with the opportunity to check your work before proceeding.  A GL Summary edit list will also print.

Transaction Update

  1. ACCOUNTS PAYABLE…à4. TRANSACTION PROCESSING…à4. TRANSACTION UPDATE

The Accounts Payable and General Ledger files are updated according to the information entered in transaction process à transaction Input and verified with the Edit List.  Reports for the Transaction Update and General Ledger Summary Journal are printed.

FLAG RECEIPT FOR NO PAYMENT

  1. ACCOUNTS PAYABLE…à4. TRANSACTION PROCESSING…à5. FLAG RECEIPT FOR NO PAYMENT

AVAILABLE PURCH. FOR PAYMENT

  1. ACCOUNTS PAYABLE…à4. TRANSACTION PROCESSING…à6. AVAILABLE PURCH. FOR PAYMENT
Accounts Payable

Vendor Inquiries

Vendor Inquiry

  1. ACCOUNTS PAYABLE…à2. inquiry functions…à1.vendor

Enter the number of the vendor desired.  A [tab] to search option is available from the vendor number field. 

This option allows the user to check the current activity for each selected vendor.  The screen displays year-to-date information as well as any currently outstanding invoices and the balance on the account.

Vendor History Inquiry – Summary

  1. ACCOUNTS PAYABLE…à2. inquiry functions…à2. history-summary

The Summary version of the Vendor History Inquiry allows you to enter a specific date for the vendor and view the invoices since that date.  There is only one line per invoice displaying the invoice number, date and amount, any amounts for debit memos attached to this invoice, any payments made against the invoice, either automatic or miscellaneous, the balance of the invoice still owing, as well as the balance on the account.

Vendor History Inquiry – Detail

  1. ACCOUNTS PAYABLE…à2. inquiry functions…à3. history-detail

Enter in the vendor number and a starting date as with the summary version of this inquiry.  The invoices are displayed in date order, and as well as the information in the summary version, the type and reference, discount information, due date, any penalties and cheque number information are also displayed.

 

batch history inquiry

  1. ACCOUNTS PAYABLE…à2. inquiry functions…à4. BATCH HISTORY INQUIRY

Enter in the BATCH NUMBER. The vendor, invoice, date, invoice amount, federal tax, discount, net information are displayed and by choosing a line will display the details of the batch.                                                         

Inquiry by Cheque Number

  1. ACCOUNTS PAYABLE…à2. inquiry functions…à5. CHEQUE NUMBER

Enter in the cheque number, and the vendor history record will be located and displayed.  The information shown for invoice number, reference, date and amount are specific to that particular cheque number.

Inquiry by Invoice Number

  1. ACCOUNTS PAYABLE…à2. inquiry functions…à6. VENDOR INVOICE NUMBER

Enter in the specific invoice number.  This inquiry has the same layout as the Vendor History Inquiry – Detail screen, however, only the specific invoice entered will be displayed with all of its associated information.

Vendor Hold Inquiry

  1. ACCOUNTS PAYABLE…à2. inquiry functions…à7. VENDOR HOLD

This option will display all vendors on file that are on hold for payment purposes for the selected date range.  The date relates to the date that the hold will expire.

Invoice Hold Inquiry

  1. ACCOUNTS PAYABLE…à2. inquiry functions…à8. INVOICE HOLD

This option will display all invoices on file that are on hold for payment purposes for the selected vendor or vendor range.

Accounts Receivable

Accounts Receivable

AR Month End

a checklist is provided with this documentation to assist you in the successful completion of the accounts receivable month end. 

Set Statement Date

1. ACCOUNTS RECEIVABLE > 5. MONTH END PROCESSING > 1. SET STATEMENT DATE

The date should be the last date on which Invoices or other Transactions were processed, normally the last date of the month. The Accounts Receivable > ar Month End routines are run after the last business day of the month, and after the Sales desk control > Sales desk month End routines have completed.  The AR Month End must be completed before the next End of Day process is run, and is designed to be run from start to finish at one time. 

Service Charge Processing

Calculate Service Charges

1. ACCOUNTS RECEIVABLE >5. MONTH END PROCESSING >2. SERVICE CHARGES >1. CALCULATE SERVICE CHARGES

This program will calculate the Service Charges based on the figures that you have previously set up in 9. SYSTEM UTILITIES >3. SYSTEM SETUP > 1. ACCOUNTS RECEIVABLE > 1. SYSTEM Parameters , you may wish to double check the ensure that they are correct before you run this procedure for the first time.

Only those customers flagged [y] in the 1. accounts receivable  > 1. data maintenance  > 1. customer field number 55.  Service charges will be considered for calculation.

Once the service charge calculation has taken place, do NOT use this option again, until and unless you have deleted all the system calculated service charges using the service charge adjustments process.  If you do so, then customer records will be updated with duplicate service charges.

Service Charge Edit List

1. ACCOUNTS RECEIVABLE > 5. MONTH END PROCESSING >2. SERVICE CHARGES >2. SERVICE CHARGE EDIT LIST

This process will create and print a Transaction Edit List of all transactions entered/created for verification before updating and will also print a GL summary Edit List, which totals the proposed entries to the General Ledger during Update.

Service Charge Adjustments

1. ACCOUNTS RECEIVABLE >5. MONTH END PROCESSING >2. SERVICE CHARGES >3. SERVICE CHARGE ADJUSTMENTS

Any changes you wish to make to the calculated entries shown on the Transaction Edit List have to be done as a Change or Delete (to remove the service charge completely).  The Add option will allow you create a Service Charge to a Customer’s account when none has been calculated and follows the same format as those processed in accounts receivable > transaction processing.  Make sure that type [1] is chosen.

Service Charge Update

1. ACCOUNTS RECEIVABLE >5. MONTH END PROCESSING >2. SERVICE CHARGES >4. SERVICE CHARGE UPDATE

Press [ENTER] to continue if you are ready to update the Service Charge Transactions, then [ENTER] to start the Update.  The screen will display the date and time as it completes each step.  A Transaction Journal and a GL Journal will print automatically.  Once the update completes, the service charge entries will appear on the customer account and can be displayed in accounts receivable > customer analysis screen.

Trial Balance Reports

Detailed Trial Balance

1. ACCOUNTS RECEIVABLE > 5. MONTH END PROCESSING >3. TRIAL BALANCE REPORTS >1. DETAILED TRIAL BALANCE

This report will print the Customer number and name, the document type and number, date, reference and the amount for any and all entries made to the customer during the period, or since the last open item purge completed.  Each customer account is totalled, but there is no ageing on this report.

Open Item Purge

1. ACCOUNTS RECEIVABLE > 5. MONTH END PROCESSING > 3. TRIAL BALANCE REPORTS > 2. OPEN ITEM PURGE

This program will purge all fully paid items from the customer’s account.  A fully paid invoice is one that has either a payment or Credit Memo applied against it, or a combination of the two in or to bring the net amount of the invoice or document to $0.00.

Aged Detail Trial Balance

1. ACCOUNTS RECEIVABLE > 5. MONTH END PROCESSING > 3. TRIAL BALANCE REPORTS >3. AGED DETAIL

The Detailed Aged Trial Balance report will age the amounts owing on the customer’s transactions based upon the criteria set up in the 9. SYSTEM UTILITIES > 3. SYSTEM SETUP > 1. ACCOUNTS RECEIVABLE > 1. SYSTEM ParameterS  file.  You may wish to check this to ensure it is correct prior to running these reports for the first time.

This report shows the customer number and name, the document number, date and reference, and the net amount owed on the account.  Then the documents are aged as current, 30 days, 60 days, 90+ days and any future amount (if you used the cash receipts processing > Dating Terms function).  The net amount and the aged amounts are totalled.

Aged Summary Trial Balance

1. ACCOUNTS RECEIVABLE > 5. MONTH END PROCESSING > 3. TRIAL BALANCE REPORTS > 4. AGED SUMMARY

The Summary Aged Trial Balance report will age the amounts owing on the customer’s transactions based upon the criteria set up in the 9. SYSTEM UTILITIES > 3. SYSTEM SETUP > 1. ACCOUNTS RECEIVABLE > 1. SYSTEM ParameterS file.  You may wish to check the fields called summary aged totals prior to running this report for the first time.

This report shows the customer number, name and phone number, the documents/invoices are aged at current, 30 days, 60 days, 90+ days and any future amount (if you used the Dating Terms function) and the totals are printed.

Aged Detail Trial Balance – Alpha

1. ACCOUNTS RECEIVABLE > 5. MONTH END PROCESSING > 3. TRIAL BALANCE REPORTS > 5. AGED DETAIL - ALPHA

This is the same report as the Aged Detailed Trial Balance, but it prints in Customer Name order instead.

Aged Summary Trial Balance – Alpha

1. ACCOUNTS RECEIVABLE > 5. MONTH END PROCESSING > 3. TRIAL BALANCE REPORTS > 6. AGED SUMMARY - ALPHA

This is the same report as the Aged Summary Trial Balance, but it prints in Customer Name order instead.

Aged Detail by Salesman

1. ACCOUNTS RECEIVABLE > 5. MONTH END PROCESSING > 3. TRIAL BALANCE REPORTS > 7. AGED DETAIL BY SALESMAN

This is the same report as the Aged Summary Trial Balance with the customers by SALESMAN

Aged Summary Trial Balance by Salesman

1. ACCOUNTS RECEIVABLE > 5. MONTH END PROCESSING > 3. TRIAL BALANCE REPORTS > 8. AGED SUMMARY BY SALESMAN

This is the same report as the Aged Summary Trial Balance with the customers grouped by Salesman.  After each salesman’s customers are printed, a total is printed for each of the ageing periods.

Here you would process your statements. Review the Statements documentation and resume from here.

Balance Forward Update

  1. ACCOUNTS RECEIVABLE >5. MONTH END PROCESSING >5. COMPLETE MONTH END >1. BALANCE FORWARD UPDATE

If you have balance forward customers, then use this option to take all the current invoices for each customer and combine them into one balance forward total.  Once this step has completed, all details that have been displayed on the Customer Analysis screen will be removed and replaced with the balance forward figure.

Balance Forward Aging

1. ACCOUNTS RECEIVABLE >5. MONTH END PROCESSING >5. COMPLETE MONTH END >2.. BALANCE FORWARD AGING

Once the details have been combined to one value, the ageing process must take place, advancing each balance into the correct age, current, 30 days, 60 days and 90+ days.

AR Month End Update

  1. ACCOUNTS RECEIVABLE >5. MONTH END PROCESSING >5. COMPLETE MONTH END >3. a/r month end update

Once all steps are complete, the ar month end Update can commence.  This option will advance the GL period for Accounts Receivable.  If you want to confirm that the update has completed successfully, then check the accounts receivable > data file maintenance > AR Parameters File for the value in the Financial Period field.

SET STATEMENT DATE

1. ACCOUNTS RECEIVABLE > 5. MONTH END PROCESSING >5. COMPLETE MONTH END > 4. SET STATEMENT DATE

Set the statement date to the next month end for proper aging on the invoice screen.

Customer Counter Balances Reset

1. ACCOUNTS RECEIVABLE > 5. MONTH END PROCESSING >5. COMPLETE MONTH END > 5. COUNTER BALANCES RESET

Use this option to recalculate the customer’s ageing figures that appear at the bottom of the screen during sales desk > Invoicing/transfers.  The statement date should be reset to the end of the new month prior to resetting the customer balances.  Otherwise, any sales made in the new month will be considered as future.  

Accounts Receivable

AR Reports

Customer Master List (Numeric)

1. Accounts receivable >3. reporting >1.customer listings >1. customer master -numeric

This report shows most of the information from the Customer Record and is printed in numeric order based on the Customer code (number)

Customer Master List (Alpha)

1. accounts receivable >3. reporting >1.customer listings >2. customer master -alpha

This report shows most of the information from the Customer Record and is printed in alphabetical order based on the Customer name.

Customer Summary List (Numeric)

1. accounts receivable >3. reporting >1.customer listings >3. customer SUMMARY-NUMERIC

This report shows the Customer number, name, and phone number, as well as the complete address (all three lines) and postal code (you entered this in the 4th address line) in numerical order based on the Customer code (number).

Customer Summary List (Alpha)

1. accounts receivable >3. reporting >1.customer listings >4. customer SUMMARY-ALPHA

This report shows the Customer number, name, and phone number, as well as the complete address (all three lines) and postal code (you entered this in the 4th address line) in alphabetical order based on the Customer name.

Shipping Address Report

1. accounts receivable >3. reporting >1.customer listings >5. SHIPPING ADDRESS REPORT

This report prints in Customer number order and shows the Customer number and name, and the code and addresses set up in data file maintenance > Shipping Addresses Maintenance.

 

VIP CUSTOMER LIST

1. accounts receivable >3. reporting >1.customer listings >6. VIP CUSTOMER LIST

This programme needs the input range of VIP Customers numbers and a selection of a print order. The order may be “V” for VIP no order, “A” for VIP name order, “T” for telephone order, “C” for Cell phone order or “N” for card # order.

Customer List by Salesman

1. accounts receivable >3. reporting >1.customer listings >7. CUSTOMER LIST BY SALESMAN

This is the same report layout as the Customer Summary List, except that in this report, you can select any or all territory and/or salesman to limit the list.  If you choose to print all territories and salesmen, then the report is sorted numerically by salesman number, with a page break between salesmen.

Customer List by industry

1. accounts receivable >3. reporting >1.customer listings >8. CUSTOMER LIST BY INDUSTRY

This is the same report layout as the Customer Summary List, except that in this report, you can select any or all industry types in order to limit the list.  If you choose to print all industries, then all customers for all industries will be printed, grouped by industry.

INACTIVE Customer LIST

1. accounts receivable >3. reporting >1.customer listings >9. INACTINVE CUSTOMER LIST

The customer record is updated with a last sale date with each invoice.  This report will show all customers having no sales after the date you enter.  The report prints the customer number, name and phone number, the account balance and aging in summary, including any future amount and the date of the last sale.

Customer Mailing Labels

1. ACCOUNTS RECEIVABLE >3. REPORTING >3. LABEL PRINTING >1. CUSTOMER MAILING LABELS

The standard format for customer mailing labels is 3-1/2” x 15/16” 1 wide

  1. Starting Customer
  2. Ending Customer

Select the individual customer or range of customers.  Pressing [enter] through these fields will default the selection to all, or from the beginning to the end of the customer records.

  1. Starting Territory
  2. Ending Territory

Select the individual territory or range of territories.  Pressing [enter] through these fields will default the selection to all territories.

  1. Starting Salesman
  2. Ending Salesman

Select the individual salesman or range of territories.  Pressing [enter] through these fields will default the selection to all salesmen.

  1. Include Ship-to’s

Reply [y] if you wish to have a mailing label for the customer’s shipping addresses as set up in data file maintenance > shipping address maintenance.

  1. Days Overdue

You can further limit the selection of customer labels to print if you wish to only send to those customers with an outstanding and overdue account status.  Enter the number of days a customer account is to be aged before being considered for this selection.

  1. Specify Categories

If you only wish to send a mailing to customers having purchased a specific product line (category) then reply [y]; otherwise all customers regardless of their purchase history will be selected for labels, as long as they also fulfil the other selection criteria.

  1. – 20. Categories:

You may enter up to six categories.

vip mailing labels

1. ACCOUNTS RECEIVABLE >3. REPORTING >3. LABEL PRINTING >2. VIP MAILING LABELS

This programme allows the entry of a range of VIP customers. This is a create programme and would be printed from the CUSTOMER MAILING LABELS–ALIGN/PRINT

Label AlignMENT TEST

1. ACCOUNTS RECEIVABLE >3. REPORTING >3. LABEL PRINTING >3. LABEL ALIGNMENT TEST

Place the forms in your printer and use this option to align them and then print when the alignment is correct.

Customer Over-Due Report – Summary

1. ACCOUNTS RECEIVABLE >3. REPORTING >2. CREDIT REPORTS >1. SUMMARY OVERDUE

  1. Starting territory
  2. Ending territory

Select the individual territory or range of territories.  Pressing [enter] through these fields will default the selection to all territories.

  1. Starting salesman
  2. Ending salesman

Select the individual salesman or range of territories.  Pressing [enter] through these fields will default the selection to all salesmen.

  1. Days overdue

You can further limit the selection of customer to print on this report if you wish to only include those customers with an outstanding and overdue account status.  Enter the number of days a customer account is to be aged before being considered for this selection.

  1. Date for Aging

Enter the date upon which to calculate the overdue status of the account.

This report has a similar layout to the Ar month end > trial balance reports > aged Detail Trial Balance, showing the customer number, name, contact and phone number, the last payment date and amount, and a summary of the account with the overdue amount and account balance.

DETAIL OverDue

1. ACCOUNTS RECEIVABLE >3. REPORTING >2. CREDIT REPORTS >2. DETAIL OVERDUE

This report has a similar layout to the Ar month end > trial balance reports > aged Detail Trial Balance, showing the customer number, name, contact and phone number.  The last payment date and amount, and the details of each invoice with the overdue amount and account balance are also printed for each customer

Over Credit Limit Report

1. ACCOUNTS RECEIVABLE >3. REPORTING >2. CREDIT REPORTS >3. CREDIT LIMIT REVIEW

This report will list all customers with outstanding balances greater than that of the credit limit amount set on the customer record.  You can include customers with no credit limit (cash customers) if you wish. 

This report prints the customer number and name, the salesman, the balance of the account and the credit limit from the data file maintenance > customer maintenance record, as well as calculating and printing the amount over the credit limit.  Any future amount is printed as well should you have used the transaction processing > Dating Terms function.

CUSTOMERS ON HOLD

1. ACCOUNTS RECEIVABLE >3. REPORTING >2. CREDIT REPORTS >4. CUSTOMERS ON HOLD

This report all customers on credit HOLD or COD.

PAYMENTS REGISTER

1. ACCOUNTS RECEIVABLE >3. REPORTING >2. CREDIT REPORTS >5. PAYMENTS REGISTER

This report shows the monthly payments by customer, invoice number, date, amount, discount.

Accounts Receivable

AR Year End

A/R YEAR END UPDATE

  1. ACCOUNTS RECEIVABLE >6. YEAR END PROCESSING >1. A/R YEAR END UPDATE

This program clears the Year-To-Date sales figures on the customer record.  It must be run immediately following the completion of the final month end procedures for the year.

SALES SUMMARY YEARLY CLEAR

  1. ACCOUNTS RECEIVABLE >6. YEAR END PROCESSING >2. SALES SUMMARY YEARLY CLEAR

This function will clear the Year-To-Date salesman figures as seen in Salesman Maintenance.

SUB-SYSTEM YEARLY CLEAR

  1. ACCOUNTS RECEIVABLE >6. YEAR END PROCESSING >3. SUB-SYSTEM YEARLY CLEAR

This function will clear the YEAR-TO-DATE total from SUBSALES used in sales by category type.

Accounts Receivable

Cash Receipts Processing

Cash Receipts Input

1. ACCOUNTS RECEIVABLE > 4. TRANSACTION PROCESSING >5. CASH RECEIPTS PROCESSING >1. CASH RECEIPTS INPUT

The receipt of monies from a customer in order to pay their account may be accomplished either at the till/counter through sales desk > invoicing/transfers or through cash receipts processing in accounts receivable.

Enter in the customer number for the payment you have received, the contact from the customer record will be displayed.  The date will always default to today’s date.  If you enter another date, be aware that each record after this one will duplicate that date, unless you specifically change it.  Enter in a reference number (usually the customer’s cheque number) and the amount of the payment being made.

If you use separate gl accounts for the different types of payments received in sales desk > Invoicing/transfers, you can use those same codes here to indicate the type of payment that was received.  The choices are [c] cheque   [$] CASH   [D] DEBIT   [V] VISA   [M] MASTERCARD.   Other payment methods are available if you have set them up in 4. Sales desk > 7. ADMINISTRATION  > 1. DATA  maintenance  > 2. credit card.  If you only have one GL account for your bank, then you may choose to simply accept the default [c] for cheque.

You will notice that the left to allocate figure is set to the same amount as the amount received.

If the Cash rec autopay (FIELD 43) flags in the 9. SYSTEM UTILITIES > 3. SYSTEM SETUP > 1. ACCOUNTS RECEIVABLE > 1. SYSTEM ParameterS screen is set to [N], then you can choose whether or not to apply the payment to the oldest invoices first.  If you choose to not automatically apply the payment, then you will need to pick and choose the invoices to be paid, entering in the gross amount (usually accepting the value there, unless this is a partial payment) and any discount that may apply to the invoice.

If the customer is an Open Item customer, then the screen will display the first 12 outstanding invoices on file. When the amount to allocate is 0.00, pressing F1 may complete the entry. 

If you have turned on the flags for Cash Rec autopay in the Parameter file, then the oldest invoices will be shown as automatically paid, with any partial payments being applied to the more recent invoice.

If the customer is a Balance Forward customer, and the Cash rec autopay flag is set to [N], then you will have to decide whether or not to pay the oldest balance first in the same manner as an Open Item customer.  If the Cash rec autopay flag is on, then the oldest balance will be paid automatically.  You are always given the option of changing what the system has done before the record is accepted.

If a payment is received and it is unknown at the time of entry which invoices are being paid, enter the amount to the UNAPPLIED line.  Application of the payment to the appropriate invoices may be done at a later date.

Cash Receipts Edit List

1. ACCOUNTS RECEIVABLE > 4. TRANSACTION PROCESSING >5. CASH RECEIPTS PROCESSING >2. CASH RECEIPTS EDIT LIST

This (optional) program will create and print a Cash Receipts Edit list of all transactions entered so that you can verify your entries before updating.  A GL Summary Edit list will also print, which totals the amounts that will be posted to the General Ledger during the cash receipts Update process.

When you press [Return] to begin, the date and times that the process completes each step will be displayed.

Cash Receipts Update

1. ACCOUNTS RECEIVABLE > 4. TRANSACTION PROCESSING >5. CASH RECEIPTS PROCESSING >3.. CASH RECEIPTS UPDATE

The start of any Update program begins with an extra screen display to alert you to the fact that the Update has been selected.  If you do not wish to continue, press the [F2] key to exit this screen and reply [N] to the next prompt.

If you do wish to continue, then press [enter] to get to the next step:

As with Cash Receipts Edit, once you have replied [Y] that you want to start the update, the date and times of each step will be displayed upon completion of that step.   You will receive a Cash Receipts Journal and a GL Journal when all steps are complete.  If the update fails to complete properly, please note any error message on the screen and contact the Support Department at AMS.  You will not be able to do another update until the problem is resolved.

Apply unapplied cash

1. ACCOUNTS RECEIVABLE >4. TRANSACTION PROCESSING >5. CASH RECEIPTS PROCESSING >4. APPLY UNAPPLIED CASH

Use this screen to apply payments that have not previously been applied to invoices and/or transactions or those payments taken at the counter through the sales desk > Invoicing/transfers process.  This option applies only to open item customers.

The amount of unapplied cash is displayed and matches the amount to allocate.  Either accept with [f11] the amounts as displayed or change the to allocate amount to be the appropriate amount.  Once the header has been accepted, the unpaid invoices are displayed and you can indicate whether or not to pay them and how much to apply to each one.  Once the amount to allocate is 0.00 the transaction can be completed and not before.

The allocation of the unapplied cash takes affect on the customer account immediately.  There is no report generated by this function.

Unapplied cash listing

1. ACCOUNTS RECEIVABLE >4. TRANSACTION PROCESSING >5. CASH RECEIPTS PROCESSING >5. UNAPPLIED CASH LISTING

This is a report showing all of the payments within the Accounts Receivable system that are as yet unapplied to specific invoices or balances.   The report shows the customer number and name, the date of the payment, the reference if any, and the amount of the unapplied payment. 

Payment history inquiry

1. ACCOUNTS RECEIVABLE >4. TRANSACTION PROCESSING >5. CASH RECEIPTS PROCESSING >6. PAYMENT HISTORY INQUIRY

Use this function to display a customer’s paid invoices between dates that you specify or from the first date on file to today’s date if the default dates are accepted (by pressing enter through the field).  If the reference number (usually the cheque number) is known, it may be entered as well.  If the reference field is left blank, all references will be included.

Payments processed in accounts receivable cash receipts and payments applied in the apply unapplied cash function are available for inquiry.  The reference number, payment date, and discounts applied, the original invoice amount, the original invoice date and the method of payment are displayed.  A [?] is used as a method of payment for all invoices paid as part of the apply unapplied cash process.

Accounts Receivable

Customer Analysis

1. ACCOUNTS RECEIVABLE > 1. INQUIRY FUNCTIONS > 1. CUSTOMER ANALYSIS

These screens will provide an overview of the AR customer’s financial position with your company.

The customer must already exist, and the information displayed here comes from the customer record you have previously set up.  At the bottom of the screen show detail Y/N is displayed.  Reply [Y] to have the customer’s outstanding invoices displayed.  If the customer is a balance forward customer, then any outstanding invoices prior to the current month will have been summarised into the bal. Fwd figure at the top of the detail screen.

From the detail screen, you can enter [E] to return to the menu, or [Q] to quit this customer and then enter in another customer to retrieve their information.

Accounts Receivable

Customer Notes Inquiry

1. ACCOUNTS RECEIVABLE > 2. INQUIRY FUNCTIONS >3. CUSTOMER NOTES INQUIRY

Enter in the customer number and press [enter].  Indicate the type of note to inquire into.  If un-sure of the type, pressing [enter] at the type will display all notes associated with the selected customer, in date order (regardless of type).  When a specific type is selected, only notes of that type will be displayed. 

The [A] option within the inquiry screen will take the user to add notes feature.

Accounts Receivable

Customer Notes Maintenance

1. ACCOUNTS RECEIVABLE > 1. DATA MAINTENANCE >6. CUSTOMER NOTES

Providing that the note types have previously been set up using the menu option 9. SYSTEM UTILITIES  > 3. SYSTEM SETUP  > 1.  ACCOUNTS RECEIVABLE  > 3. NOTES PARAMETERS,

free-form notes may be added for any customer currently on file.

There are a total of 6 note types, spread across two styles: reserved and non-reserved, with a maximum number of reserved note types of three (3).  In future releases of the software, reserved notes will be accessible with hot/function keys from inside various processes (example: invoicing / cash receipts etc.)

A TAB to search is available from the customer number field.  Only A/R customers are available for notes, not VIP customers.  The note is date and time stamped and the user is prompted to classify this note with a particular type. 

When sorting the order of note types displayed during maintenance, reserved notes are listed first, in the order in which they have been entered in the parameter file.  After reserved types, numeric and then upper case alphabetic types are listed, and finally lower case alpha types.  Reserved note types are indicated with ­ after the code.

There are 6 text fields available for the free-form note, contained on three lines numbered [1] [2] and [3].  The first line has 2 fields; the first is 40 characters in length, followed by 36 characters in the second field.  The same applies to the next 2 lines.  Should the note extend further than the number of characters available in any one field, the note will automatically be wrapped to the next one.

Word wrapping is done on a letter by letter basis, meaning that a single word may be split across two lines.  No hyphenation of the split word is done.  Pressing [enter] anywhere on a line will advance to the beginning of the next section, either on the same line or on the next.  When the note text has been completed, press [enter] to complete the field, then [F1] to accept. 

Changes are allowed at the any change? prompt.  Entering the line number for change will bring the user to the beginning of the line.  Changes are ALL overtype mode, meaning as soon as typing begins in a field/section, what is currently written will be over-written.  If the first field of the line requires no change, pressing [enter] will advance to the beginning of the second field/section on that same line.   Changes to notes are also available from the change notes menu option.  A note that has been assigned to a reserved type may still be deleted.

Accounts Receivable

Customer Search

1. ACCOUNTS RECEIVABLE > 1. INQUIRY FUNCTIONS > 2. CUSTOMER SEARCH

Enter in the customer name or portion of the customer name followed by the [­] to pinpoint the starting place for the search.  Enter in only [­] in the customer number to start the search at the beginning of the customer file.

If there are multiple customers that are displayed, you can press [enter] or [N] [enter] to advance to the next page.

Accounts Receivable

Data File Maintenance

Customer File Maintenance

 

1. ACCOUNT RECEIVABLE > 1. DATA MAINTENANCE > 1. CUSTOMERS > SELECT ADD/CHANGE/DELETE AS APPROPRIATE

Account #

When adding new customers, you must first specify the customer number to be used.  In 9.SYSTEM UTILITIES…-> 3.SYSTEM SETUP…-> 4. SALES DESK…-> 2. PARTS BILLING PARAMETERS , (Screen 1) FIELD 13 CUSTOMER CODE the type of customer code is selected. You should have indicated which type of customer code you want your countermen to be using, alphanumeric or numeric - (A  for alphanumeric is recommended). 

If you have chosen alphanumeric, then entering 1000 as the customer will mean that the customer number will be entered as 1000 throughout the system.  If the customer number type is numeric only, then 1000 will mean 001000 and the leading zeros will have to be entered. 

Start with a number greater than 100, since accounts numbered less than 100 have special uses. (See the explanation for the field Sales Summary number # later on in this section)  

Once entered, the customer code may not be changed, although the entire customer record may be deleted under the correct circumstances.

  1. Name
  2. Bill to

Enter these fields in the format you wish to have printed on invoices and statements.  Use the 4th line of the Bill to field for the customer’s postal code. 

  1. AR method

Enter in either [O] (open item) or [B] (balance forward).  For Balance Forward customers, the application of payments is very simple, but the ability to justify or reconcile specific invoices is more difficult. 

At the end of the month, customers that have been set to balance forward will have all current invoices summarised into one amount.  The aged amounts for 30, 60 and 90 days are kept, but all invoice detail is removed.  No detail is removed for outstanding invoices for customers that are set to open item.

You may wish to assign some customers to balance forward, while keeping others at open item.  Should you desire to change a customer from one method to another, you may do so only immediately following the completion of the AR Month End process, prior to any Cash Receipts or End of Day process.  The function is found in

9. SYSTEM UTILITIES > 9. FINANCIAL SUB-SYSTEM > 1.OPEN/ITEM BAL. Fwd. Switch.

  1. Phone
  2. Fax

Phone and fax numbers are to be entered without any formatting and will print with dashes between the sections.  If the module called Repair Shop has been installed on your system, then the fax number can be used during invoicing to locate a customer.

  1. LD?

Enter [y] to indicate a long distance number, [n] to indicate a local number.

  1. Contact

Enter in the primary contact for this customer.

  1. Salesman

This is a validated field, which means that the salesman number must have already been created in

1. ACCOUNTS RECEIVABLE >1. DATA MAINTENANCE > 4. SALESMAN 

prior to being able to use it here.  Validation also means that the salesman number may not be changed at the time of billing (point of sale) to a number other than a valid one.  A [TAB] to search for a valid salesman number is available.

Once sales have taken place, a change to this field will affect those sales reports that are created out of the month end process.  However, daily sales reports will not be altered, keeping the sales rep information from the invoice as it was created.

  1. Territory

You may wish to divide or assign your customers to specific territories.  These fields are used in the Sales Analysis reports to separate the customers. This is NOT a validated field and so may be left blank or set to any value.

  1. Start Date

Pressing [enter] will default the date to today’s date, reflecting the starting date of your business relationship with this customer.

  1. GST Lic. #

An entry of any kind in this field exempts this customer from GST taxes on all sales. 

  1. PST Lic. #

An entry of any kind in this field exempts this customer from PST taxes on all sales, including end user levies (e.g. battery tax etc) that have been set up in

4. SALES DESK >7. ADMINISTRATION > 2.CUSTOMER PRICING > 6.  LEVY/ECO FEE

  1. Remarks

Enter in any remarks to display (but not print) when looking up the customer in

1. ACCOUNTS RECEIVABLE >2. INQUIRY FUNCTIONS >1. CUSTOMER ANALYSIS

or billing the customer in

4. SALES DESK > 1. INVOICING / TRANSFERS

  1. Default Shipper

Enter in the customer’s preferred method of shipping.

  1. Standing PO

If the customer wishes to have one PO for all purchases within a given time, enter it here.  It will be the default to the PO field in Sales/Invoicing.

  1. Start

Enter start date for Date Limited PO

  1. End

Enter end date for Date Limited PO

  1. Industry Reporting Group

In the same way that the territory field is a way of assigning specific customers together in a group for sales reporting purposes, the industry type allows a different grouping to be created.  The individual types are created in 5.  Sales and core analysis…. >  1. data maintenance….>   7. industry types and therefore this is a validated field.  Press [TAB] to search for the appropriate industry to select.

  1. Default Payment Terms

This is a validated field, with the codes being set-up in 1. accounts receivable… > 1. DATA maintenance…> 3. payment terms.  Use [TAB] to search for appropriate terms code.  If this field is blank, then the invoice generated will use the default payment terms that are set-up in the 9. SYSTEM UTILITIES…-> 4. sales desk…-> 2. PARAMETERS FILE RESET > Screen 2: user configuration (FIELD 21 Terms).  Regardless of what the individual invoice shows, all invoices are aged by invoice date, there is no due date calculated by the system.

  1. Default Invoicing Branch
  2. Account Control Flags

Select up to 8 (eight) options which will apply to this customer, pressing [enter] until the next field is reached.  Available options are:

$ - COD Customer

Adding this flag indicates that the customer’s preferred method of payment is COD.  At the time of billing (point of sale) the individual invoice may be altered to have a payment type of account, providing that the customer is not overdue and not over the assigned credit limit.

P – Purchase Order is Required

This indicates that either your business or the customer requires all purchases to have a purchase order.   If this flag is set, then a PO must be entered at the time of billing (point of sale).  If the standing PO field has been assigned, then that number will become the default.

U – US Dollar Account

Invoices generated to US customers are generated and charged to the customer account in Canadian dollars.  When the cash receipts are updated, monies received are sent to a separate account in the General Ledger.  Please advise AMS if you have US customers.

B – No Backorders

This customer does not permit backorders.

Y – Price the Packing Slip

If using packing slips, prices will be printed.

# - Add customer to special sales report

If you wish to run sales and core analysis > comparative reports > Territory/Selected customer/category then add the [#] here to ensure that the data will be collected.             

m – (Lower Case)  Multiple Invoice Copies

Multiple invoice copies are required at billing time.  If this flag is added to this field, the functionality of the ME invoices field further down changes. In the ME invoices field, enter in the number of copies that are required in total.  Each time an [I] invoice, [r] refund [c] payment or [t] voided payment type invoice is created, a duplicate invoice will print immediately following the original.

Use of this flag fundamentally changes the concept of the ME invoices field below.  When this flag is set, no invoices are copied for use during 1. accounts receivable…> 5. month end processing…>4. create statements…> 5. invoice copies. 

W - Warranty

This is a warranty customer.  This option is only required if the module Service Dispatch is being used.

c – (Lower Case) Consignment Inventory Customer

            This flag must be set to mark a customer as being one that holds consignment inventory.  The consignment features will not work until this is set. 

I – Prorated Customer

The presence of this flag will indicate that this customer is a cross province customer and thus subject to special taxation rules. 

v – View Balances

            If this feature is activated, the customer account balances shown during billing will not

            be displayed.

  1. Overdue Control Flag

In the parameter file, you should have already indicated the default setting on whether an overdue status on the account will result in the accounts being placed on HOLD or COD.  This field determines the number days overdue this specific account must be in order to activate either the HOLD or COD.  [1]=30 days, [2]=60 days, [3]=90 days.  If you wish to ignore the overdue day processing and manually place customers on HOLD or COD, use [0] or [9] in this field.

If you are going to use this feature, please be sure to advise AMS so that your End of Day processing can be configured to correctly update the customer record with the appropriate information.

If the default is to place the customer on COD, then cash sales to this customer will be permitted, but not charges to the account.  However, if the default is to place the customer on HOLD, then only Return and Received on Account type transactions will be permitted.

Payments received in the office and applied to the customer account in 1. Accounts Receivable…> 4. transaction processing…>5. cash receipts processing will automatically update the COD/HOLD status on the customer record.  This is the field called rating, which can be manually adjusted as long as this field is set to [0] or [9] for ignore.

  1. Sales Summary Number

The sales summary number is used for those customers who do not require individual Sales Analysis Reporting, perhaps due to volume or frequency of purchases.

In order to use this field, you must have first set up a customer record, using a customer number of less than 100.  An example of the functionality of this field is when you have a number of clients of a similar nature, for example farmers.  The sales for each individual customer may not be of significance, however when grouped together, the volume or value would be considerable.  If you wish to have this customer’s sales merged with those of like types, enter the customer number of your summary account.   This only affects sales reporting dollars.  All accounting information belongs with the individual customer.

  1. Allow Contract pricing

Before a special or contract price is set-up in 4. sales desk control… >  7. ADMINISTRATION…> 2. CUSTOMER PRICING …> 3. contract/specials, the customer must be flagged as being permitted to have a contract price. If the customer is not permitted to have contract or special pricing, reply [N].  A special or contract price is different than the other pricing discounts, in that a contract or special is normally for a specific item or range of items within a category or product line and is also date driven.

  1. Global Discount type

This field could also be called discount group since the choices available for selection are set-up in  4. sales desk…> 7. ADMINISTRATION… > 1. DATA maintenance… > 4. discount LEVELS.  A discount group is usually the most general pricing available.  It is based on a discount or surcharge on either a specific or all categories for a specified price level.  Each customer can then be placed into a specific group, using [tab] to locate the most appropriate one.  All customers within that group will be charged the same price for any item within the category, unless a more specific pricing discount over-rides the group.  (See the Sales Desk Control User Guide for further information on pricing).

  1. Prefer Quotation Via

Click the down arrow to open help window.  Quotation preference are: E = Email; F= Fax; P=Print

  1. Credit Limit

This is the maximum amount of credit you wish to extend to this customer.  If this is a COD customer or if you are not concerned with the amount this customer will owe at any one time, use [0] to indicate OPEN credit, that is – no limit.  Once a customer has charged a sale to their account that takes them over their credit limit (a message will be displayed for the countermen), no further sales activity is permitted on the account until there is an available credit amount.  This is displayed at the bottom of the billing screen as the AVA value.   The office may raise the credit limit, or the customer may provide a payment to be processed through 1. accounts receivable… > 4. TRANSACTION PROCESSING …> 5. cash receipts processing.  As soon as the cash receipts update is complete, further sales activity is again permitted.

  1. Rating

If the 9. SYSTEM UTILITIES…> 4. SALES DESK… > 2. Parameter File RESET > SCREEN 1 : system defaults field called cust credit check (fielD 19) is set to [Y], then this field will be automatically updated with each End of Day and Cash Receipts update to reflect the status of the account.  This field works in conjunction with the field called overdue control flag. 

If this customer is always a cash only customer, you may manually enter in [COD].  If this customer is no longer permitted to purchase from you for any reason, manually enter in [HOLD].  If you are manually entering in the rating of this customer, then you must set the field above called overdue control flag to either [0] or [9] for ignore, otherwise the overdue status may change and thus this field would be automatically updated.

This process is completely separate from that of the credit limit processing.  It is possible for the customer to be both over their credit limit and on HOLD/COD because of their overdue status. 

  1. Allow Prompt Pay Discount

If you wish to give this customer a discount for the early payment of invoices, enter [y].  If this customer is not to receive an early or prompt payment discount, enter [n].

  1. Max Number of Days
  2. Discount

These fields default to the information set-up in 9. SYSTEM UTILITIES… > 3. SYSTEM SETUP… >1. ACCOUNTS RECEIVABLE… > 1. SYSTEM parameterS (FIELD 36) and cannot be changed.

  1. Require Statement

Is this customer to receive a statement at month-end? Y OR N

  1. Service Charge

Is the customer to be charged a service charge on over-due amounts?

  1. M/E Invoice Copies

This field has two separate and distinct uses. Use of the [m] flag in the acct control flag above fundamentally changes the concept of this field.

It can be used exclusively during the accounts receivable > a/r month end > statements > invoice copies optional step to create an extra invoice copy to be sent with the statement.  If that is the case, enter [1] here.  In that instance, each invoice generated will have a copy added to a separate file for use during the month end processes.

It can also be used in conjunction with the [m] flag in the acct control flag field above.  When that flag is present, the invoicing process will look to this field for the total number of invoice copies to print immediately following the printing of the original invoice.  If an extra copy is required, enter [2] here, meaning that a total of 2 invoices will print at the time of sale, the original and 1 extra copy.  Since the extra copy(s) have already been printed, no copy is added to the separate file for use at month end.

  1. Redirect To

If used, the customer number in this field represents the parent company for this customer.  The customer may be a head office, or it may be the office of a buying association.   This is different than having multiple ship-to addresses for the same customer.  In that instance all sales dollars are reported to the same customer.  In this situation the sales dollars belong to the individual customer, while the invoices are all charged to the parent or head office account and paid by them.  If this situation applies, enter the customer number of the parent/head office account.

Customer Credit Control

Available from the any change prompt, customer credit control provides a summary view of a customer’s purchase and credit information for the current period, year to date and last year.  Either while adding a new customer or editing/changing an existing customer, the customer credit control may be accessed by selecting the c)redit control at the any change prompt.

This information is for inquiry only and is updated automatically by the point of sale end of day, accounts receivable cash receipts update and accounts receivable transaction update.  

The accounts receivable month end clears the Current Period values and the accounts receivable year-end clears the year to date values and moves them to last year.

Definitions:

Current Period, Year to Date, Last Year

Invoice amt       Total of invoices processed through point of sale modules

No of invoice     Total number of invoices processed through point of sale modules

Payment amount Total of all payments received through accounts receivable cash receipts and point of sale

modules

No of paymts   Total number of payments received through cash receipts and point of sale

Cred.note amt                                        Total of all credit notes processed through point of sale modules

No of cred.nts                                Total number of credit notes processed through point of sale modules

Debt.note amt                           Total of all transactions posted through accounts receivable transactions

No of debt.nts                                 Total number of transactions posted through a/r transaction input.

Discounts amt                                                        Total of all discounts given through a/r cash receipts

No of discnts                                                 Total number of discounts given through a/r cash receipts.

Interest amt                                           Total of all service charges applied as part of the a/r month end

No of int.chg                             Total number times service charges applied as part of the a/r month END.

Curr Year Largest, Last Year Largest

Inv amt   Largest total invoice value for the period

Date                                                                                                                         Date of the largest invoice

Bal amt                                      Largest outstanding balance for the period including future due amounts.

Date                                                                                             Date of the largest outstanding balance

Date of Last

Adjustmt                                                                        Date of last accounts receivable transaction entry

Cust mnt                                                                           Date of last change to the customer information

Interest                                                                                                  Date of last service charge

Statement                                                                                                           Date of last statement

Invoice                                                                         Date of last invoice through point of sale modules

Cr note                                                                    Date of last credit note through point of sale modules

Payment                          Date of last payment through a/r cash receipts or point of sale parts billing

Paymt amt                                                                                                     Amount of the last payment

Total no of invoices paid                      Total number of invoices paid in the current year.

Last year average pay days                  Average days to receive payment of an invoice.

                                                       This is only applicable to Open Item customers

Customer Pricing Control

The second feature available at the any change prompt during customer maintenance (either add or change) is p)ricing.  Selecting this option will display all discount structures associated with this particular customer.  Industry type or global discounts are displayed first, followed by customer specific discounts.

The user may choose to select either d)iscounts or c)ontract pricing from this screen, and will be redirected to sales desk control > file maintenance > customer discount maintenance or sales desk control > file maintenance > Contract/special pricing maintenance in order to enter new discounts or contract/special pricing, alter existing discounts for this specific customer number, or delete un-necessary discounts.  In all cases, the customer number during discount processing will default to the current customer.

tab set

The TAB SET function can be a useful tool in making repetitious changes to a single field or to multiple fields.

If you want to change the value in a field regardless of what the current value is, then enter in that field number.  If you need to check the current value of the field prior to making the change, enter in the field number before and then the field you want to change.  In other words, if you want to change field 32 and you want to see what the current value is first, enter in 31 [enter] and then 32 [enter].  After each field number is entered, press [enter].  After all the field numbers that require changing are entered, press [F1] to accept your choices.

Some field numbers will not be accessible to you for change due to their function within the software. 

After acceptance of your field choices, you will be prompted for the customer number.  Pressing [F7] will bring up the first record on file.  You will be brought to the first field you requested.  If there is a no change to be made to any of the fields on this record, reject with [F2] and request the next record with [F7].  If there is a change to this field, make it now and press [enter] to either move to the next requested field or to the any change prompt.  Once at the any change prompt, if the changes made are correct, [F1] to accept, then [F7] to request the next record. 

You may [F2] to exit at any time, either in the middle of a record (the changes will not take effect) or instead of pressing [F7] for the next record.  Any changes that you’ve made and accepted with [F1] will be kept.  You may start again at any time, but you will have to re-select your requested fields.

Shipping Address Maintenance

1.ACCOUNTS RECEIVABLE…>1. DATA MAINTENANCE…>2. SHIP TO CODES

  1. Customer

When the customer has more than one location to ship to, enter a code numeric location number and the address.  The customer entered here must already exist in the customer file.  If there is only the one location for shipping to this customer, nothing need be entered.

  1. Code

The default will always be the lowest location number, so it is recommended that the bill-to address from the customer record be entered as ship-to address number 1.  At point of sale time, the ship to address may be selected if it is not the main location.

Enter the branch number or shipping location number

  1. Ship to
  2. Postal

Enter the address exactly as you wish it to appear on the invoice.

Parameter File Maintenance

  1. SYSTEM UTILITIES…>3. SYSTEM SETUP…>1. ACCOUNTS RECEIVABLE…>1.SYSTEM PARAMETERS

The parameter file is generally set-up by AMS personnel during the initial installation of the Accounts receivable system.  It is advised that no changes to it take place after the initial options have been chosen without first checking with AMS.

  1. Aging period 1
  2. Aging period 2
  3. Aging period 3
  4. Aging period 4

These fields control how the Aged Detail Trial Balance is formatted, in this sample, invoices aged up to 31 days will appear under the title Current, invoices aged up to 61 days will appear under the title 30 days etc.

Summary Aged Totals

  1. Period 1
  2. Period 2

These fields control the ageing that will be used with the AR Month End > trial balance reports > aged summary trial balance reports.

  1. Statement Date

This field will show the last date that statements were run and updated during the month end procedures.

  1. Financial Period

This is the current GL period for Accounts Receivable and Invoicing.  It is updated during the accounts receivable >AR month end > ar month end update procedure.

Service Charges

  1. Percentage

This percentage is used during accounts receivable > ar month end > service charge processing > CALCULATE service charge. This amount must be calculated to the annual compounded percentage.  For example, 2% per month is 26.82% annually.

  1. Days

This is the number of days old an invoice will have to be before being considered part of the calculation for service charges.

  1. Next Number

This is a system-generated number and may not be changed.  It is used to generate the invoice number associated with the service charge.

  1. G/L Account

When the service charges are created, they generate a dollar value that will be posted to the General Ledger account entered here.

  1. S/C min?

If there is a minimum service fee you charge that is to over-ride the calculated amount, enter Y and that amount.

  1. Months Overdue

If ageing by months (as opposed to days) enter the age the invoice must be before a service charge applies. 

  1. Default Return Email Address
  2. Show Zero Balances
  3. Default A/R Type

Are the majority of your customers Balance Forward or Open item?  Remember that this is only the default response and that you can alter it in the individual customer record. 

If a customer is set to Balance Forward, during the AR Month End processes, the outstanding invoices are aged and then summarised into one summary total.   Accounts Receivable > Cash receipts processing simply applies whatever monies are received to the outstanding summarised balance.

If a customer is set to Open Item, then each individual invoice is available for review in accounts Receivable > Customer Analysis.  During accounts Receivable > cash receipts processing, payments are applied to specific invoices.  A field called cash rec autopay appears later in this section to speed the process of paying those individual invoices.

  1. Age B/Fwd Credits

This field only applies to the processing of balance forward invoices.  When a credit is issued, if this flag is set to [n], then the credit will be part of the current balance of the account.  If this flag is set to [y], then the credit will act like a payment and reduce the oldest aged balance and thus the balance forward amount.  It is important to note that if this is the case, sales reports for the period (perhaps used to calculate commissions) will not match the accounts receivable since the credit amount will have been applied to a prior period. 

  1. Addr Pos (H/L)

When your statements print, the customer address may not fit exactly into the window in the envelope.  [H] prints one line higher than [m], which prints one line higher than [L] and may assist you in a better fit.

  1. Payment History

Reply [y] if you wish to keep a history of all invoices that have been paid and retired through the accounts receivable > Cash Receipts process.

  1. Aging by Months

This response is usually [y].  The system will age invoices according to the number of days in a month.  During a leap year, the number of days is automatically readjusted for you.  If you respond [n], then the ageing of invoices is calculated on the average number of days in a month.

  1. Fiscal 01 = cal

This field connects you fiscal year with the calendar year.  If your fiscal year begins in March, then fiscal 1 is equal to calendar [3], if the fiscal year begins in June, this field will be [6].

  1. Prompt Pay
  2. Prompt Pay Days
  3. Prompt Pay Disc
  4. P.pay if Overdue
  5. P.pay incl GST / 39. PST? / 40. FRT?

These fields control how (or if) prompt payments apply to your customer accounts.  Indicate the number of days an invoice needs to be paid in before receiving the discount and the percentage of that discount.  If the account is overdue, the p.pay if overdue flags whether the client would or would not receive a prompt payment discount on a particular invoice even if that particular invoice is paid within the prompt payment parameters.  Normally, discounts do not include the GST or PST.  However, if the discount is to be on the total of the invoice plus any freight that was added, reply [y] to the frt? field.

  1. Cash Receipt Sequence

If you have multiple locations for your installation, then the recommended reply to this flag will be [D], (date) since each location may be working with separate invoice numbering sequences.  During accounts receivable > Cash receipts processing the invoices will be displayed in date order. Otherwise, [I] for invoice number sequencing is fine.

  1. Cash Receipt Autopay
  2. Default

These flags allow the accounts receivable > Cash receipts processing to partially imitate the speediness of processing payments for a balance forward customer.  If the flag is set to [y], then the payment is automatically allocated to the oldest invoices until either all invoices are paid, or until the amount to allocate runs out.  If there is not enough money to fully pay an invoice, it will be partially paid.  An opportunity is given to alter the automatic allocation before acceptance.  If this flag is set to [n], then the question apply to oldest is given as an option with each cash receipt.   

  1. Default Overdue

For HOLD or COD purposes, at what age is an invoice considered overdue.  [1] is 30 days, [2] is 60, etc.  If [2] is the default, then the HOLD/COD status applies after the account goes into 60 days.

  1. Credit Hold Date

This is the date, either [s] for statement date or [t] for today’s date, to use when calculating whether or not an account is considered overdue.  If option [s] is chosen (recommended), when the statements are printed, the hold or COD rating on the customer account will be removed automatically when payment is made.  A report prints during the accounts receivable > Cash receipts processing > Cash receipts Update when the account has been paid to notify you that the hold / cod rating has been updated / removed. 

 

If option [t] is chosen, then the HOLD/COD rating will float over the course of the month, since it would be possible to have the account be OK today, but overdue tomorrow.   

  1. Check Holds

If the [s] option is chosen for the credit hold date field, then reply [y] to this field to have the HOLD/COD status checked and updated with Cash Receipts.

  1. Overdue Type

When the account is overdue, the account will be placed on HOLD or set to COD.  This is a fundamental question that will affect all customers except those that have been set to ignore the overdue by setting the accounts receivable > File maintenance > customer maintenance customer record field for overdue control FLAG to [0] or [9].  When the customer is placed on HOLD, no sales activity is permitted except for Returns [r] and Payments on Account [$].  If the customer is set to COD however, the customer may still purchase product, but is not permitted to charge anything to their account. 

  1. Allocate Invoice Number
  2. Next Invoice

Reserved for future use.

  1. Reserved Note Types

Customer notes are free-form notes that are date and time stamped during entry and then assigned to a particular type. A reserved note type is one that may not be changed or deleted until it has been removed from this field, although it is not necessary to have a reserved note type.  In future releases of the software, reserved notes will be accessible with hot/function keys from inside various processes (example: invoicing / cash receipts etc.) 

To begin using notes, determine the types of notes that may be helpful in working with customers, even if that means starting with a single type.  As an example, a note type called NSF may be useful for office staff.  Then, use the menu option accounts Receivable > file maintenance > customer notes parameter maintenance to add (example) a type [n] with a description of nsf.  The singe character note type may be alphabetic or numeric.   Once the note type is created, add it here to set it as a reserved type.

  1. Last Payment on Statement

Payment Terms Maintenance

  1. ACCOUNTS RECEIVABLE…>1. DATA MAINTENANCE…>3. PAYMENT TERMS

You may offer different payment terms to certain customers; they can be set up here and entered to each individual customer record.  The customer’s terms will print on both Invoices and Statements, however this is an informational field only, as all ageing in the system is done from the invoice date.  No due dates are calculated.

Statement Text Maintenance

  1. SYSTEM UTILITIES…> 3. SYSTEM SETUP…> 4. SALES DESK…> 1. ACCOUNTS RECEIVABLE…> 5. DEFAULT STATEMENT TEXT

Any message entered to the GST, PST or FREIGHT fields on this screen will print with the associated dollar amount on the customer statement.  The amounts are extracted for use during the sales desk control > sales desk month end procedures > extract taxes for ar statements process.  Messages added for the taxes and prompt pay fields have no associated dollar values. 

Any statement message can be altered during the accounts receivable > ar month end > Statements > Statement run (or blank paper statement) create option.

Salesman Maintenance

  1. ACCOUNTS RECEIVALBE…>1. DATA MAINTENANCE…> 4.SALESMAN

This option provides a means for tracking salesman sales figures. The salesman ID can be either numeric or alphanumeric. The daily figures will be updated to this record with each end of day process.  The monthly figures are updated during accounts receivable > ar month end > sales summary monthly clear and the yearly figures are updated during the sales summary yearly clear.

VIP Customer Maintenance

  1. ACCOUNTS RECEIVABLE…> 1. DATA MAINTENANCE…> 5. VIP MASTER

A VIP customer is at once, the same and different from a cash or walk-in customer. VIP customers do not charge their purchases to an account; they are on a COD basis the same as any other cash customer.  However, adding a repeat walk-in customer to a VIP list (database) allows you to track their purchases separately from cash sales and optionally set up special pricing.

Adding a new VIP customer is normally done through sales desk >invoicing by pressing [F11] at the customer number field to move over to the phone number field.  The customer’s phone number may be found as a regular customer or an already existing VIP or in the AMS (Address Made Simple) database.  If the customer is found in none of these places, then pressing [F11] again (in the phone number field) will allow you to enter in the VIP manually with this menu option.  If a VIP customer already exists with the same phone number, the user is informed, but still allowed to add the second VIP. More details are offered in the Sales Desk User Guide.

Should you know prior to any sale being made that a particular customer is a VIP, then they may be added here.  VIP records may also be ‘removed’ by changing the phone number to 000-000-0000.

VIP

  1. Last Name
  2. Given Name

The name must be entered entirely in CAPITAL letters.

  1. Address
  2. City

The city must be a valid city name and the correct spelling is important.

  1. Province

The provincial abbreviation must be one that is accepted by the federal government. (NU is the correct abbreviation for Nunavit).

  1. Postal
  2. Phone
  3. Work Number
  4. Cell Number
  5. Fax Number

Enter the personal information of the customer being added to the VIP database, exactly as you would wish to see it on an invoice or mailing label.

22..  Card Number

The card # field is available if you are using identifying cards for your VIPs.  These are normally scanned cards, like Air Miles ®,

  1. PIN

Enter the personal identification number (PIN) for this VIP customer’s card.

  1. GST Lic #
  2. PST Lic #

Any character entered in either of these fields will cause the suppression of taxes at the time of sale, the same as with a regular accounts receivable customer.

  1. Contact

If there is another contact for this VIP, enter that name.

  1. Email Address

There are 40 spaces available for the entering of the VIP’s email address.

  1. Remarks

This is the same field as the regular customer record has.  It will be displayed with the next sale on the billing screen.

  1. Industry

If this VIP is connected with one of the industry codes you have previously set-up, you may add them here.  Sales dollars reported will include any sales made to this VIP customer.

  1. Direct Mail

If your business sends direct mail, a [y] here indicates that this customer will be included with the next mailing.

  1. Date Added

This date indicates the date that this customer was added to the VIP database.  The default is for today’s date.

  1. Last Invoice

This is the date of the last sale made to this VIP customer.

  1. A/R Customer Number

The AR customer field is available if you have special pricing set up for an AR customer that you wish to also give to this specific VIP customer.  Otherwise leave this field blank and pricing will be taken from the default pricing for the VIP customer number that has been set up in 9. SYSTEM UTILITIES…> 3. SYSTEM SETUP… > 4. SALES DESK… > 2. PARTS BILLING PARAMETERS (sCREEN1 : System defaults).

VIP Parameter Maintenance

  1. SYSTEM UTILITIES…>3. SYSTEM SETUP…>1. ACCOUNTS RECEIVABLE… > 2. VIP PARAMETERS

Since VIP customers are normally set up during invoicing, completion of the following fields will assist your users in setting up new VIP customers quickly.

  1. City

Enter your own city, as the majority of your VIP customers will likely come from the same area.  The city must actually exist, and the correct spelling is important.

  1. Province

Enter your own province, in the format that is acceptable to the federal government.

  1. Area Code

Enter the area code.

  1. Next Customer

This field will be automatically updated with the addition of each new VIP customer and needs only be entered with the original setting up of this file.

  1. Prefix List

Develop a list of 5 prefixes to be used in the generation of new VIP customer numbers

  1. Force DIY Number

If this field is set to [y], then during sales desk > invoicing the use of the card will be mandatory. 

  1. Validate Postal

Leave this field turned off [n] to allow US zip codes when setting up new VIP customers.

  1. 10 Digit Dialing
  2. Special Char in Name
  3. Allow A/R Create
  4. A/R Customer Template
  5. Current A/R Prefix

There are five prefixes available for use in generating new VIP customer numbers.  Select the one that will be used as the default.

  1. Next A/R Customer
  2. A/R Prefix List

customer notes Parameters Maintenance

9. SYSTEM UTILITIES… > 3. SYSTEM SETUP… > 1. ACCOUNTS RECEIVABLE… > 3. NOTES PARAMETERS

The single character note type may be alphabetic or numeric and requires a description.  Enter up to a total of 6 note types.  As an example, a note type called NSF may be useful for office staff.

If this note is to be reserved, use the accounts receivable > file maintenance > 1. SYSTEM parameter field called resrvEd note types (FIELD 50).  There is a limit of 3 reserved note types. 

Accounts Receivable

Loyalty Rewards Program

Loyalty Rewards

Definition

The new LOYALTY REWARDS program will allow you to offer and track point rewarded to customers for purchases made. This program can be for selected customers and products and the rewards value can be maintained by Category.

The new suite of programs is available through Sales Desk > Administration >

 

Loyalty Rewards

Loyalty Programs

Loyalty Customers

Loyalty Adjustment Codes

Loyalty Rates

image-1631837478993.png

Loyalty Reward Adjustments

Loyalty Rewards Inquiry

Loyalty Rewards Report

Loyalty Rewards Statement

Once the customers have been assigned to the program and the rates have been setup the point information can be built from invoice history from a start date if desired.

Invoicing

Accounts Receivable

Move ROA Payment from one Customer to Another

(Note – this procedure has multiple steps so it is recommended that you do it only when you can run it from beginning to end uninterrupted.)

Accounts Receivable… à4. Transaction Processing… à1. Transaction Input à1.  Add Transactions

 

 

 

  1. Accounts Receivable… à 4. Transaction Processing… à 3. Transaction Update

 

If the customer account is a Balance Forward account, then you are done.

 

 

See following page for Open Item Account Completion Procedure

 

Accounts Receivable

Setting Up Invoice Copies

COUNTERPOINT™ Provides a feature that allows you to set up the capture of a customers invoices for reprinting on Plain Paper at Month end. If there are customers set up with this feature, at the end of the statement run you will be asked to put plain paper on the printer and all invoices created during the statement period will be reprinted on Plain paper. This feature is turned on using the following procedure.

Bring up the customer A/R record in change mode using the following menu path

  1. Accounts Receivable…->1. Data Maintenance…->1.Customers

This will bring up the following screen.

image-1631748406217.png

The field that controls this feature is Field 56. As the prompt shows -  entering a 1 in this field will cause the system to capture an image of all invoices done during the statement period for reprinting on plain paper after the completion of the statement printouts.

by entering a 2 in this field you can also cause the printer to produce 2 copies of EVERY invoice generated for this customer whenever they make a purchase.  

If you wish to set up the multiple copies at time of purchase you must also set one of the fields in 36 to “M”.

Once set up WITH A “1” in Field 56 this customers invoices will be captured from this point forward for Month end plain paper reprinting.

Accounts Receivable

Statements

If you have pre-printed statement forms, please use the statement run create option.  If your statements are going to be printed on regular paper, please use the blank statement create option.

Statement Run – Create

1. ACCOUNTS RECEIVABLE > 5. MONTH END PROCESSING >4. CREATE STATEMENTS >1. STATEMENT RUN-CREATE

This option is for statements printing on special forms.

The statements must be created prior before the first end of day process for the new month, otherwise new charges will appear on the statements as future

  1. Starting Customer
  2. Ending Customer

The statements will be based on the starting and ending customer range entered here, and the Statement flag from the customer record in data file maintenance > Customer Maintenance.  If the response to that flag was [N], then no statement will be created in this step.

  1. Statement Message

Enter any message that you wish to appear on all statements.  If a default message was entered in accounts receivable > data maintenance > statement text maintenance then pressing [enter] here will default to that message.

  1. Show Prompt Pay

Use [y] if you are allowing prompt pay discounts and wish to notify the customer of the amount of the discount available to them.

  1. Prompt Pay Message

If you wish to show the value of any prompt pay discount on the statement, reply Y and then enter in the text that you want to appear on the statement next to the discount amount. If a default message was entered in accounts receivable > data maintenance > statement text maintenance then pressing [enter] here will default to that message.

  1. GST Message

If you wish to show the value of any GST associated with the charges on the statement, reply [Y] and then enter in the text that you want to appear on the statement next to the amount. If a default message was entered in accounts receivable > data maintenance > statement text maintenance then pressing [enter] here will default to that message.

  1. PST Message

If you wish to show the value of any PST associated with the charges on the statement, reply [Y] and then enter in the text that you want to appear on the statement next to the amount. If a default message was entered in accounts receivable > data maintenance > statement text maintenance then pressing [enter] here will default to that message.

  1. Freight Message

If you wish to show the value of any freight associated with the charges on the statement, reply [Y] and then enter in the text that you want to appear on the statement next to the amount. If a default message was entered in accounts receivable > data maintenance > statement text maintenance then pressing [enter] here will default to that message.

  1. Taxes Message

These fields will default to the values you previously entered in Accounts Receivable > File Maintenance > Statement Text Maintenance.  You may change them here for this statement run. 

  1. Only Overdues

You can further define the range of customers to include on this statement run.  If you select this option, then only customers with overdue accounts will have a statement created for printing.

  1. Show Zeros

If you wish to print statements even for customers where the balance of the account is zero, then select this option.  Customers with no activity and a zero balance are not included, only those with activity in the period.

  1. Show Credits

If you wish to print statements for customers where the balance of the account is negative, then select this option.

  1. Sequence

The statements can be created to print in customer number [n] or customer name [a] order.

  1. SEND VIA FAX/EMAIL

Y(es) or N(o) to send electronic data for all customers having contact information set up customer master file EDI info.

  1. PRINT PAPER COPY ALSO

Offers the option to print hard copy Y(es) or N(o) for those getting their statement electronically.  Customers not set up with EDI information will print hard copies.

  1. SHOW FUTURES

This option is to allow you to complete your accounts receivable month end after the first of the month and only print invoices from the previous month on the statement.

Statement Run – Align

1. ACCOUNTS RECEIVABLE > 5. MONTH END PROCESSING > 4. CREATE STATEMENTS > 2. STATEMENT RUN – ALIGN

Place your statement forms in the printer, and then use this option to test your alignment.  Continue until the form is correctly aligned and then [Q]uit this function.

Statement Run – Print

1. ACCOUNTS RECEIVABLE > 5. MONTH END PROCESSING > 4. CREATE STATEMENTS > 3. STATEMENT RUN – PRINT

Before running this option, make sure that the alignment has been done.  The statements will print according to the parameters you have set up in the Statement Run - Create (or blank paper statement create) option and when the statements have finished printing, the Statements Menu will re-display.

Blank Paper Statements – Create

1. ACCOUNTS RECEIVABLE > 5. MONTH END PROCESSING > 4. CREATE STATEMENTS > 4. BLANK PAPER - CREATE

If you have decided to use plain paper instead of pre-printed forms for your statements, then use this option in place of Accounts Receivable > AR Month End > Statements > Statement Run – Create, then continue with the steps for aligning and printing.  The blank paper format is identical to the one that creates statement for pre-printed form, only this option will also print your company name and address, along with column headings.

The statements must be created prior before the first end of day process for the new month, otherwise new charges will appear on the statements as future

  1. starting customer
  2. ending customer

The statements will be based on the starting and ending customer range entered here, and the Statement flag from the customer record in data file maintenance > Customer Maintenance.  If the response to that flag was [N], then no statement will be created in this step.

  1. Statement message

Enter any message that you wish to appear on all statements.  If a default message was entered in accounts receivable > data maintenance > statement text maintenance then pressing [enter] here will default to that message.

  1. Show prompt pay

Use [y] if you are allowing prompt pay discounts and wish to notify the customer of the amount of the discount available to them.

  1. Prompt pay mess

If you wish to show the value of any prompt pay discount on the statement, reply Y and then enter in the text that you want to appear on the statement next to the discount amount. If a default message was entered in accounts receivable > data maintenance > statement text maintenance then pressing [enter] here will default to that message.

  1. GST message

If you wish to show the value of any GST associated with the charges on the statement, reply [Y] and then enter in the text that you want to appear on the statement next to the amount. If a default message was entered in accounts receivable > data maintenance > statement text maintenance then pressing [enter] here will default to that message.

  1. PST message

If you wish to show the value of any PST associated with the charges on the statement, reply [Y] and then enter in the text that you want to appear on the statement next to the amount. If a default message was entered in accounts receivable > data maintenance > statement text maintenance then pressing [enter] here will default to that message.

  1. Freight message

If you wish to show the value of any freight associated with the charges on the statement, reply [Y] and then enter in the text that you want to appear on the statement next to the amount. If a default message was entered in accounts receivable > data maintenance > statement text maintenance then pressing [enter] here will default to that message.

  1. Taxes message

These fields will default to the values you previously entered in Accounts Receivable > File Maintenance > Statement Text Maintenance.  You may change them here for this statement run. 

  1. Only overdues

You can further define the range of customers to include on this statement run.  If you select this option, then only customers with overdue accounts will have a statement created for printing.

  1. Show zeros

If you wish to print statements even for customers where the balance of the account is zero, then select this option.  Customers with no activity and a zero balance are not included, only those with activity in the period.

  1. Show credits

If you wish to print statements for customers where the balance of the account is negative, then select this option.

  1. SEQUENCE

The statements can be created to print in customer number [n] or customer name [a] order.

  1. SEND VIA FAX/EMAIL

Y(es) or N(o) to send electronic data for all customers having contact information set up customer master file EDI info.

  1. PRINT PAPER COPY ALSO

Offers the option to print hard copy Y(es) or N(o) for those getting their statement electronically.  Customers not set up with EDI information will print hard copies.

  1. SHOW FUTURES

This option is to allow you to complete your accounts receivable month end after the first of the month and only print invoices from the previous month on the statement.

Accounts Receivable

Transaction Processing

Transaction Input

  1. ACCOUNTS RECEIVABLE > 4. TRANSACTION PROCESSING > 1. TRANSACTION INPUT

Transaction process is used primarily to record charges or credits which do not affect inventory.  These are normally service charges, rebates, PST adjustment and the recording of NSF payments.  Any charge or credit to a customer that involves either the reduction or return of inventory should be completed through the appropriate billing module.

Sales reports will not reflect any charge or credit made through transaction processing to a customer.

Customer

Enter in the already existing customer number.  If you don’t know what it is, you can use the Search function by pressing [TAB].  Then enter in either the entire customer name or a portion of the customer name followed by the [­].  Then select the line number of the customer you desire to return it to the customer number field.

Transaction Type

Enter the appropriate code for which type of transaction you wish to process for this customer, [0] invoice, [1] service charge, [2] credit memo.

Invoice Number

If you are entering an invoice or credit note not connected to an existing invoice, then enter in a unique number (there are no duplicates allowed).  If you are entering a service charge [1], or a credit note [2] against an existing invoice/credit memo, then enter in the originating document/invoice number.

  1. Date

Today’s date is always the default, but you can over-ride this date if you need to.  Remember that every entry after the first one will default the date to what was entered on the previous record. 

  1. Reference

If there is a reference from the customer regarding this transaction, then enter it here.

  1. Amount

Enter in the amount of the transaction.  Remember that the system already knows which sign (+ or -) the transaction should be dependant upon what type you selected.  If you selected type [0] for invoices, you can make it a negative by typing in the amount with a [-].  If you are reversing a service charge using type [1], or issuing a credit to the customer using type [2], then the amount is not preceded by the [-] since the type already indicates that this is a reduction to the customer’s balance. 

  1. GL Distributions

Enter in the account number(s) you wish to distribute the transaction to.  You can have multiple lines of distribution.  You can not complete this section and exit until the total of the distribution is equal to the amount from above.  Tab to search functionality is available at the branch/account fields.

Enter in a full or partial name followed by the ­ for the account search.  If searching from the branch field, all accounts, regardless of location are displayed.  If searching from the account field, only those accounts associated with the previously entered branch number will be displayed.

Transaction Edit List

  1. ACCOUNTS RECEIVABLE > 4. TRANSACTION PROCESSING > 2. TRANSACTION EDIT LIST

This (optional) program will create and print a Transaction Edit list of all transactions entered so that you can verify your entries before updating.  A GL Summary Edit list will also print, which totals the amounts that will be posted to the General Ledger during the Update process.

When you press [Return] to begin, the date and times that the process completes each step will be displayed.

Transaction Update

1. ACCOUNTS RECEIVABLE > 4. TRANSACTION PROCESSING > 3. TRANSACTION UPDATE

The start of any Update program begins with an extra screen display to alert you to the fact that the Update has been selected.  If you do not wish to continue, press [F2] to exit this screen and reply [N] to the next prompt.  If you do wish to continue, then press [ENTER] to get to the next step:

As with the Transaction Edit, once you have replied [Y] that you want to start the update, the date and times of each step will be displayed upon completion of that step.  You will receive a Transaction Journal and a GL Journal when all the steps are complete.  If the update fails to complete properly, please note any error message on the screen and contact the Support Department at AMS.  You will not be able to do another update until the problem is resolved.

APPLY Dating Terms

  1. ACCOUNTS RECEIVABLE > 4. TRANSACTION PROCESSING > 4. APPLY DATING TERMS

Enter in the already existing customer and invoice number with leading zeros if applicable.  If a match is found, then the rest of the information for date, reference and amount will be displayed.  You are asked to confirm that this is the correct invoice.

Use this screen to take the existing invoice and either spread the payment out over a period of time (called split terms or dated-out) or to advance the due date for the invoice as a whole.  A ‘new’ invoice number will be assigned to each split using the originating invoice followed by  -1, -2, -3 etc.  The date to be entered for each split is the date that the payment is due and the amount of that payment needs to be entered as well.  As soon as the amounts of each split total the originating invoice amount (when the ‘to allocate’ figure is 0.00), the system will automatically complete.  Press [F1] to accept what you have done or enter in the line number to change the values.

Internally, the system will write a Credit Memo to the original invoice and create entries on the customer account for each of these split (dated out) invoices.  A print out will be generated automatically identifying the original invoice and the new invoices.

If some of your invoices have been entered with dates for a future month, then they will not be picked up by the accounts receivable > ar month end > Balance Forward update process until the appropriate Month End.

Delivery Dispatch

Delivery Dispatch

Dispatching Invoices - Counterpoint.

Basic Usage Notes

Adding Drivers

  1. Sales Desk > 7. Driver Dispatch > 2. Driver Maintenance

Dispatching Invoices

Manually Confirming Invoices

Cancelling/Retiring Invoices

Pulling Dispatched Invoices Back

 

 

How-To Guides

How-to guides and FAQs are being migrated to our FirstCall knowledgebase @ https://firstcall.amscomp.com/kb

Inventory

Complete inventory guide for COUNTERPOINT

Inventory

Bump All Price levels

 

1. You will want to update the pricing on all items. This can be done via the following menu path:

6. Inventory > 4. Pricing > 5. On-Line Price Changes > 3. All Categories - By %age

In this screen, you will want to enter in the 3% increase against all price levels. Similar to this:

image-1598393755475.png

This is assuming you aren't updating your cost. Once you've entered the last set of price level info, F1 will bring you to the 'any change' message and another F1 will begin the process.

2. The next step will be to set the pricing parameters so that your next wave of price updates won't revert back to old pricing matrices. This is accomplished via the following menu path:

6. Inventory > 4. Pricing > 1. Data Maintenance > 4. Reset Multipliers By %

In This screen you can opt to modify Stocked item parameters, Non-Stocked parameters or both. In this case, I assume that you would be bumping the sell prices on both, so the screen would look like this:

image-1598393696021.png

Again, assuming you are only applying this to sell prices, not cost.

Inventory

Common Problems / Troubleshooting

WRONG QUANTITY RECEIVED

ITEM NOT SHOWING ON SUGGESTED ORDER

ITEM IS NOT PRICING PROPERLY

ERROR 23 SHOWS WHEN RUNNING REPORT ON CATEGORY

Inventory

Concepts

INVENTORY vs PRICEBOOK ITEMS

STOCKED vs NON-STOCKED ITEMS

Inventory

Deleting Categories

There are two options to delete a category. One essentially will just 'flag' a category as deleted, but the items within that category are still held on the system. The other option wipes all of the information (Category and Part) out of the system.

Flag Category For Delete

This will only mark the category as deleted. All parts will still exist, but the category/parts will not show in reporting.

  1. Navigate to 6. Inventory > 1. Data Maintenance > 1. Master Files > 1. Category Master
  2. Select the Delete Category option
  3. Enter the category you wish to delete and you will be prompted with the question Is this the right record? Press Y

  4. The category has now been flagged for delete. This means it will be hidden from reporting and physical counts.
Deleting Entire Category, Including Parts

This option deletes the entire category, parts and all

Before deleting all items, you should confirm that none of the items within the category are on order and that none are on packing slips.. This can cause an issue if a PO with these items is received at a later date. Also, it is recommended (but not required) that you do a physical count to remove all on hands for a proper paper trail

If a category has only been flagged for delete, it has not been removed from the system. Revisiting this menu and opting to change a category will allow you to 'un-flag' the category. If you decide, after flagging a category for delete, that you want to fully remove the data you will need to follow the 'Unflagging A Deleted Category' instructions

  1. Navigate to 9. System Utilities > 6. Inventory > 3. Entire Category Delete
  2. Enter the category you wish to delete and 'Y' to confirm it is the correct category

  3. You will then be presented with 3 additional questions. 
    - Absolutely Positive? - Press Y to proceed
    - Any on packing slips? - Press N to proceed
    - Any in purchasing? - Press N to proceed
  4. There is one final confirmation presented. 'Y' will remove category. Press Y here to process the full delete of category and items

Unflagging A Deleted Category
  1. Navigate to 6. Inventory > 1. Data Maintenance > 1. Master Files > 1. Category Master
  2. Select the Change Category option.
  3. Enter the category you wish to delete and you will be prompted with the question MARKED 'DELETE'! IGNORE?  Press Y to un-flag the category. Press F1 to accept your changes and the category will be reactivated.


     

Inventory

Home Hardware Barcode Receiving

The barcode receiving process is designed to allow the receiving of Home Hardware shipments based on the invoices sent by Home hardware. This process checks that the item is on the Purchase Order and has been invoiced by Home Hardware and does not allow items to be received if they are not on a PO or invoiced.

 

Procedures

Barcode Receiving On Screen

The barcode receiving is found in the Home Hardware menu.

The screen starts at the barcode where items are to be scanned. Using the F3 key from the barcode field will allow the part to be entered by category and part number.

Each time a unit is scanned the quantity received will be incremented by 1 unit.

After the item is scanned it will show in the body of the screen.

If the purchase order no longer exists for the item a message will appear “no PO 99999”. Press enter to pass these messages. Items not found on a purchase order will need to be received manually.

If the item has not been invoiced by Home Hardware or it has been fully received, a message will appear “not in received file”, these items will also have to be received manually if they were not previously received.

To enter a quantity received rather than scanning an item multiple times press the TAB key after scanning the item and you will be positioned in the Qty received field. The quantity entered here is the additional quantity to be received.

When all scanning is complete press the Ctrl A key to accept from the barcode field.

A prompt will appear “Print Edit List”. This will provide you with an edit list of the PO’s being received.

The next prompt will be “PO’s OK to update?”. Answer “Y” to this prompt and then proceed to the PO Update option in the main menu, Purchasing à Purchase Order Receipts à PO Receipts Update.

 

Barcode Receiving RF Gun

The barcode receiving is found in the RF menu, “Receive HH PO”.

The screen starts at the barcode where items are to be scanned. Using the Ctrl C key from the barcode field will allow the part to be entered by category and part number.

Each time a unit is scanned the quantity received will be incremented by 1 unit.

After the item is scanned it will show in the body of the screen.

If the purchase order no longer exists for the item a message will appear “cant find PO 99999” and then a message will appear “could not receive all qty”. Press enter to pass these messages. Items not found on a purchase order will need to be received manually.

If the item has not been invoiced by Home Hardware or it has been fully received, a message will appear “not in received file”, these items will also have to be received manually if they were not previously received.

To enter a quantity received rather than scanning an item multiple times press the TAB key after scanning the item and you will be positioned in the Qty received field. The quantity entered here is the additional quantity to be received.

When all scanning is complete press the F1 key to accept from the barcode field.

A prompt will appear “Print Edit List”. This will provide you with an edit list of the PO’s being received.

The next prompt will be “PO’s OK to update?”. Answer “Y” to this prompt and then proceed to the PO Update option in the main menu, Purchasing à Purchase Order Receipts à PO Receipts Update.

 

Report of Items Invoiced But Not Received

A report has been provided to show all items invoiced by Home Hardware that have not yet been received in the system. This report is found in the Home Hardware menu “Items_Invoiced_Not_Recd_List”. This report will show items invoiced by Home Hardware that were not received. This should be used to verify your receiving and report errors. Once the receiving is compete the Receiving file should be purged using the option in the Home Hardware menu.

Inventory

Inventory Counts

OPTIONAL COUNTERPOINT SETTINGS

COUNTING WITH THE RF GUN (RECOMMENDED)

Counting with the RF gun is the recommended method of updating inventory counts. This method allows for consistent, real-time updating of inventory quantities without the hassle of printed count sheets and manual entry of quantities. This allows you to count lines in chunks, without worrying about messing up counts on update.

Getting Started:

  1. Log in to the RF gun.
  2. Select Option 9 from the RF menu.
  3. The RF count routine requires a PIN before starting the program. This is the same as used for physical adjustments, etc. If you cannot remember your code please call AMS support.
  4. The count scan begins by asking whether you wish to use Autoscan or Not. Selecting “Y” for Autoscan indicates that you will scan each item individually. Selecting “N” for Autoscan indicates that you will scan an item and manually enter in a quantity.

  5. After you choose Y or N the cursor will move to the Bar Code field.

Scanning Product 

These are the options from the Bar Code field

If you are in AUTOSCAN mode pressing the ENTER key will perform the same as a second or subsequent scan.(Add 1 to the Qty)

Error Messages & Notices/Prompts

Variance Report;

The variance report allows you to view or print how any user is progressing

Update Count History

Updating the count history tells the system that you have completed counting all of the items you planned on counting at this time. Failure to update the count history will mean that, when you scan any of the items you have counted, you will be prompted with the “Recent Scans” screen popping up constantly.

  1. Select the same program as for Variance reporting
  2. Select ALL user ID’s by pressing Enter
  3. Input U and press Enter
  4. Select the type of report you want; A=All items scanned OR V=Variances only.
  5. Accept the options selected at the “Any change?” prompt.

COUNTING WITH WORKSHEETS

Getting Started

  1. Log in to COUNTERPOINT with your regular “menu-based” login
  2. Navigate to Inventory > 6. Physical Inventory

Creating Count Files

There are several different methods for creating Count Files. 

  1. Navigate into the Count File Create
  2. The first major one is Count File Create ‑ All Categories , which creates a single count file for the entire inventory. This method is best used when counting your entire inventory at one time. A single count file can be created for all categories, or all categories by location (bin location, not branch).  A third report will create by location, but the category is individual selected.
  3. The second option is Multi‑Category Count File/Worksheet, which is best used for cyclical counts or spot counts, creating individual count files for each category.
  4. NOTE: Please be sure there is an understanding of the different Count Methods and how they can be set up in the Parameters File for more efficient use.
  5. NOTE: When printing count sheets, an entry is added to the CARDEX, labelled “Physical Count Reset” this is NOT an adjustment of inventory, but a reporting of how many items were on hand at the time the sheet was printed. 

Count File Create ‑ All Categories

This program creates a Single count file of the entire inventory in the system at the current time.  It creates a work file that allows the user to create and print Count Sheets and adjust the On‑hand counts. It does noT adjust the On‑hand quantities in the Product Master File until the Update is run.

To Create a Count File for the entire inventory select [2] from the Physical Inventory Menu and the program will create the count file. Upon completion the screen will display:              

                   records extracted  =  999999

                   press ENTER to continue

When printing count sheets, an entry is added to the CARDEX, labelled “Physical Count Reset” this is NOT an adjustment of inventory, but a reporting of how many items were on hand at the time the sheet was printed.

Create and Print the Physical Count Worksheets

Once you have created the count file, select Physical Count Worksheets.

Simply press [ENTER] if you have created the count files with Count File Create ‑ All Categories using menu option [2].  It is not necessary to enter a category here.

-OR-

If you are re‑printing a specific category that had been created with Multi‑Category Count File Create (menu option 4) type that category code and press [ENTER].  When complete, move to the next step of printing the count sheets.

Multi‑Category Count File/Worksheet

This program creates individual work files for each category designated. This program is designed for those users who do cyclical counts or are "just checking" particular lines. It automatically creates the Physical Count Work Sheet print file.

When printing count sheets, an entry is added to the CARDEX, labelled “Physical Count Reset” this is NOT an adjustment of inventory, but a reporting of how many items were on hand at the time the sheet was printed.

To create and print individual work files, select option 4 from the Physical Inventory Menu and the following screen will display:

Physical Count Input

This program is used to enter the adjusted counts to inventory. It does not immediately adjust the Product Master file but allows the user to print an Edit List to check for input errors before Updating.

 

If the All Category Count file create menu option was used, reply [y] to the All categories work file question, otherwise answer [N].

Any part numbers which are NOT in the Product File but have been noted on the Count Sheets should be entered to the Product Master File AFTER the Physical Count updates have been run.

Physical Count Edit List

This program creates and prints an Edit List to check for errors during Input before actually updating the new counts to the Product Master File.

NOTE: A Category cannot be accessed by more than one person at a time!

Physical Count Update

This program updates the entries made in the Physical Count Input program, either by Category or for the entire Inventory File depending on the method selected.  The Physical Count Edit Lists should be printed and verified before the update is run. When the update is complete, it produces a Journal that shows the discrepancies between the System Count and the Actual Count.

The screen will list up to 126 of the available work files that are on the system. The default is [Y] to update. Make the necessary changes for which categories are NOT to be updated.

There must be NO BACKGROUND GROUPS running, no one using the Inventory Control system, no one in Invoicing, and ALL INPUT MUST BE COMPLETE before the update may be run.  The Update will proceed and a Physical Count Journal will print upon successful completion.

Physical Count Reports – Print (Optional)

As many of the reports and worksheets created in the Physical Count Routines are deemed unnecessary, the user may select to print only those reports that are required.

Inventory

Item Maintenance

PRODUCT MASTER MAINTENANCE

 

 

ADD/CHANGE/DELETE ITEM

BARCODES

Inventory

Kit Maintenance

The inventory system has been enhanced greatly with the introduction of Kit items.  A kit is defined as either a counter kit: one that is created at the time of sale, or a manufactured kit, one that is created and placed on the shelf ready for sale.  A counter kit has no inventory on hand, a manufactured kit does.

 

A kit item may belong to any category, or a separate category may be created for manufactured kits, if desired.  There is no difference between a regular category record and one that is created for kit items.

 

Add the kit item

Identifying a kit item involves two steps.  First, enter [k] (not displayed as an option) in the reorder field on the item record in inventory control à file maintenance à product master maintenance.  Then differentiate the item as a counter [c] kit or a manufactured [m] kit in the kit type field directly below.  The remainder of the fields may be set up as usual.

 

Attach components to the kit

Once the kit item has been created and [F1] accepted, the user is prompted with maintain kit definition?  If [n], the function is complete and the user is able to add a new kit number.  The kit definition will have to be set up at a later date using the change product menu option.  If the response to maintain kit definition?  Is [y], a secondary input screen is presented for entry.  The category, part number, description and barcode are displayed, as well as the average cost and kit type.  Changes are not permitted to these fields. 

 

The user will enter the category/part number combination for each product that will be used in the manufacture of this new item and the quantity that will be used. If the kit type is [m], the default for the sub field will be [n] and may not be changed.  If the kit type is [c], then the sub field is available for entry and may be either [y] or [n]. 

 

A sub refers to the user’s ability to substitute another item for the one listed in the kit definition at the time of sale.  Since a manufactured [m] kit is created and assembled prior to sale, no substitutions are permitted.  However, a counter [c] kit is assembled at the time of sale and by its nature, requires the ability to sub out items on the fly.

 

The hide field refers to whether or not to hide the component items on the printed invoice.  If the items are hidden on the printed invoice, then only the kit item will appear as with a normal item.  When the items are not hidden on the printed invoice, then the kit item is printed as usual, and the component items are listed underneath.  No pricing information is printed for the component items.

 

Kit Master File Listing

A new report has been added to the inventory control à inventory reports à additional inventory reports menu, called Kit Master File Listing.  The user enters a specific category, a category range or [enter] to default to all categories. 

 

For each kit item, the 5 price levels and the associated GP % are printed, as well as the cost and core price.  Then, the details of the components for the kits are presented with category / part number and description, the quantity required for each kit and the costs, unit, extended and core.  Totals per kit are provided.

 

Inventory considerations

As stated previously, no inventory is held on hand for counter [c] kits.  The components are subtracted from inventory at the time of the sale, just as if each individual item was sold separately. 

 

Manufactured [m] kits, however are held on the shelf ready for sale and therefore must be received prior to being able to be sold.  Increases in inventory levels for [m] type kit items are done through Purchase order à Purchase Order Receipts processing à rush receiving.  As the inventory of the full good is increased, the inventory of the component goods is reduced.

Inventory

Multiple Bin Locations

Multiple Bin Locations

There is now the option for setting up alternate bin locations for each item.  Before proceeding, make sure that the flag to allow multiple bin locations (field # 45) has been set to [y] in SYSTEM UTILITIES > Systems Setup > Sales Desk > parts billing parameters > Screen 2.

Bin Location Maintenance

This option is used to set up, view a specific location or view all locations for a specified product.  Deleting an alternate bin location is also available from this menu.  This option is found in the menu inventory > Data Mantenance > Master Files > Bin Location Maintenance.

Bin Location maintenance can also be performed when in the Product Master maintenance by selecting “B(ins)”.

The Bin Type “R”, Retail, is used to identify product in the retail space of the store. Nightly reporting is available to indicate which retail products currently have zero available and need to be replenished from other locations.

The retail bin location can only be the primary location if it is the only location for the product and POS transactions will update the on hand in the Retail location.

Receiving and Stock Transfers will update the quantity on hand in the primary location which is the location shown on screen in Product Maintenance and Inquiry.

Any product with multiple bin locations and the Retail location that has a negative on hand quantity will have the Retail location adjusted up to zero and the primary adjusted down by the same quantity nightly.

 

Stock Relocation Adjustment       

inventory > Data Mantenance > Inventory Adjustments > Stock Relocation Adjustment

Use this option to adjust the on-hand quantities for each alternate bin location.  Enter the category and part number.  All of the locations will be displayed.  At the any change prompt, press enter to get to the quantity to adjusted by field.  Enter the quantity (followed by a minus sign) that is to be moved to other locations.  Then distribute that amount to the alternatives.  The total field at the bottom must be 0 in order to [f1] accept the entry. Pressing enter after the accept will allow you to continue with further adjustments and “N” will exit to the menu

 

Stock Relocation Report           

This will report all Retail Locations that have and On Hand Quantity of 0 or less which is to be used to replenish these locations. This report will be run automatically each night.

 

On Dock Purchase Orders

To flag a purchase order as On Dock use Purchasing > Purchase Order Receipts > On Dock Assignment. Enter the PO Number then confirm it is the correct PO, the first page of lines on the PO will be displayed and answer “Y” to create the Dock locations for this PO.

image-1631834919475.png

The Dock locations are automatically removed when the PO Receipts Update is completed for the PO.

 

P.O. Receipts Relocation Listing  

Multiple bin location items are automatically received to the primary bin location as listed on the  product master maintenance screen.  This report provides the information necessary for the user to relocate the quantity received to different locations.

This report is Purchasing > Purchase Order Receipts > P.O. Rec. Relocation Listing

 

P.O. Receipts Relocation Adjustment

Similar to the Stock relocation adjustment, the user is able to move the recently received quantity from the primary (default) location to multiple locations.

 

P.O. Receipts Relocation Update   

The adjustments made in the above step will be updated.

Alternatively the adjustments can be made using the Stock Relocation Adjustment described earlier in this document.

 

Inventory Adjustments

When entering Inventory Adjustments, inventory >

 

Data Mantenance > Inventory Adjustments > Stock Adjustments, if a part is assigned to multiple bin locations you will need to enter the quantities adjusted by bin location when completing the adjustment

image-1631834946264.png

The default is to adjust the primary bin but you can change the quantities however the adjusted quantity for the bin locations must equal the total adjustment quantity.

This is the same procedures as used in the Stock Relocation Adjustment

 

Bin Location Lookup in Invoicing

Products with Multiple Bin Locations that have an on hand quantity will be identified on the invoice screen with a comment of “*MANY*” and products that have zero on hand but are included in an On Dock PO will have a comment of “*DOCK*”.

 

To check the available quantities for multiple bin locations within the invoicing screen press Shift F4 from the line Type field and you will be prompted for a line number to search. The bin location quantities for the selected part will be displayed in the Information Window. The sale of a product will always reduce the on hand quantity for the Retail bin location if one exists and if no retail location exists the Primary location will be adjusted.

All bin locations will be included on the printed invoice.

Inventory

Pricing Guide

Overview

This document outlines the files and processes involved in updating and applying pricing to items and/or customers in the COUNTERPOINT ERP system. We will discuss the very basic fundamentals of pricing (stocked vs. non-stocked) down to some very specific utilities that can add significant dollars to your bottom line. This document will also define the various places where parameters need to be set up, the behind-the-scenes updating of prices and some common issues that can occur in the pricing module.

Supporting Files/Information

BILLING PARAMETERS

 

CATEGORY FILE

Pricing the Item

 

PRICE PARAMETERS

 

RETAIL ROUNDING

Pricing Updates

UPDATE INQUIRIES

AUTOMATIC UPDATES

 

MANUAL UPDATES

ONLINE PRICE CHANGES

 

 

By Category By Part

 

 

By Category By %age

Discounts For Point-Of-Sale

One thing to note in this section is that, discounts take president based on their specificity. So, the hierarchy for what discount will take effect (from highest precedent to lowest) is:

  1. Special (If Price is lower than calculated)
  2. Contract (If billing parameter is set. More in the contracts/specials section)
  3. Customer Discount By Category
  4. Industry Discount By Category
  5. Customer Discount (All Categories)
  6. Industry Discount (All Categories)
  7. List Price (Or alternate list price, if set in billing parameters as described in ‘Billing Parameters’ section)

Separate to all of those though, is Price Point Pricing, which is applied BEFORE any customer specific discounts or specials are applied.

INDUSTRY DISCOUNTS

CUSTOMER DISCOUNTS

CONTRACTS / SPECIALS

 

 

PRICE POINT (VELOCITY) PRICING

QUANTITY PRICE BREAKS

Utilities

RESET MULTIPLIERS BY %

UPDATE MULTIPLIERS

DELETE PRICEBOOK VENDOR

Troubleshooting

COMMON PROBLEMS

Inventory

Product Popularity Listing

As a normal part of working with your inventory there will be times when you need to understand the contribution to sales being made by the items within a line. Counterpoint provides a report specifically for this purpose. The report is accessed via the following menu path.

  1. Inventory…-> 7. Reporting…-> 2. Performance Reports…-> 2. Product Popularity

Which brings up the following screen.

image-1631748531300.png

Enter data into fields as follows.

1 Based on – Click the drop down box arrow to see available options. Enter your choice as appropriate to your needs. Click the close button to close the popup.

2 Report By – Enter Enter % or Q as appropriate to your need.

3 Report On  – Enter the number of parts you wish to see analyzed or hit [Enter] to see all parts in the line.

4 Price Level -  Enter the Price level to be used in for reporting purposes.

5 Use Branches? – Enter Y if you wish to include branch sales in the computations on ranking. Enter N to compute based on your store only.

6 Inventory Quantities? – Enter Y to have report include On hand balances. Enter N to suppress printing of on Hands..

Fields 7 thru 65 – Enter categories you would like included in the printout

When you have entered all desired fields hit [F1] to run the program.

 

Report can be displayed on screen or printed out as appropriate to your intended usage.

Inventory

Receiving Product

The purchasing module, specifically the receiving portion, is how all items will be brought in to inventory. There are two main methods of bringing product in, those items on a purchase order, and those items NOT on a purchase order. Regardless, for proper tracking of product, it is recommended that all product be introduced into the system.

 

OPTIONAL COUNTERPOINT SETTINGS

 

PO RECEIVING WITH THE RF GUN (RECOMMENDED)

As long as barcodes are on all of the product, the recommended method of receiving product into inventory is via the RF gun. Even if there are no barcodes in the COUNTERPOINT system, the RF gun will allow you to add a barcode to an item when receiving

 

Getting Started:

  1. Log in to the RF gun.
  2. Select Option 3 from the RF menu.
  3. Once in the PO receiving menu, the program will list all of the outstanding Purchase orders on the system and will allow you to select one to be received.

 

Scanning Items In

  1. The first question to be answered is if you wish to use “Autoscan” Y or N.. The use of “Autoscan” prompts you to scan each item and it defaults the received quantity to 1 unit for each scan and then goes back to the barcode field for the next scan. Alternatively if “Autoscan” is turned off N you will be prompted for a quantity each time you scan an item. You will have to accept each entry with CTRL followed by A.

If you are using the “Autoscan” mode you can correct the quantity after the item is scanned by pressing Tab or CTRL I. After entering the new quantity press CTRL A at “Any change” to accept the entry

  1. You will then be placed in the barcode field. From here you can begin scanning items from the order

Pressing CTRL C at the barcode will place you in the part number field, in case an item’s barcode does not scan. Once you enter the part, the cursor will move to the Received field, where you can enter the quantity received.

  1. Once you are done scanning all items, Pressing CTRL A at the barcode will start the completion process where you will be asked if the editing is complete where the options are Y or N. If the editing is complete the next option is to print the edit list Y or N. If the edit list is printed. The next option is to flag the P.O. for update. When Y is used the PO will be flagged for update at your work station.
  2. You may continue scanning more PO’s or go to your workstation and perform the update process. Purchasing > 6. Purchase Order Receipt processing > 4. Purchase Order Update.

 

PO RECEIVING VIA THE MENU

When receiving large orders, or for orders where minimal changes are needed, it would be more expedient to receive the product via the COUNTERPOINT PO menu options.

Getting Started

  1. Log in to COUNTERPOINT with your regular “menu-based” login
  2. Navigate to Purchasing > 6. Purchase Order Receipts

PO Receipts Input

The PO Receipts Input is an onscreen program that allows you to quickly accept large orders that have minimal changes or discrepancies. The program allows bulk receipts and the ability to add products to an order at the time of receiving.

  1. Enter the PO Receipts Input menu option
  2. Enter the Purchase Order number that you wish to receive
  3. Your first option is to make a bulk decision on what to do with all numbers on the PO
    1. B(ackorder All) – Will set the status of each item on the PO to Backordered.
    2. C(ancel All) – Will set the status of each item on the PO to Cancelled.
    3. R(eceive All) – Will set the status of each item on the PO to Received.
    4. enter to receive by line # - Will leave all items untouched and allow you to receive line by line.
  4. Once you have made an initial decision, you will be allowed to pick lines to alter, or begin updating the received quantity.
    1. Pressing Shift/F6 from this point will allow you to add a new item to the PO
    2. On each line, the D column defines the disposition of the item.
      1. C – Indicates that the item is Completed, and will update when you trigger the PO to update.
      2. K – Indicates to Keep the item on the PO and do NOT update it when you trigger the PO to update
    3. Once all lines have been properly received, Press CTRL/A until the OK to update prompt appears.
      1. A Y will initiate an update of the PO
      2. An N will NOT update the PO, and keep the PO open, allowing you to make changes later.

RUSH RECEIVING VIA THE MENU

Rush receiving is meant to handle the receipt of items NOT on a purchase order. This can range from drop ship, to special order items. The use of rush receiving allows you to quickly add items to inventory without the creation of a purchase order.

Getting Started

  1. Log in to COUNTERPOINT with your regular “menu-based” login
  2. Navigate to Purchasing > 6. Purchase Order Receipts > 5. Rush Receiving

Receiving Product

  1. The rush receiving program requires a PIN be entered, if you are unsure what your PIN is, contact AMS.
  2. You begin by entering a packing slip or invoice number that came with the product. Anything can be entered here.
  3. Next you will enter the Category, Part Number and quantity received. The Vendor field is optional
  4. For pricing, you can enter a Jobber price (with a discount to get your cost), or enter your cost. Then enter a core and/or levy if necessary.
    1. NOTE: If the supplier for this item (or the supplier you entered) is set to update the cost to inventory, and the item is a stocked item, then the cost of the item will be updated when finalizing the receipt
  5. If the item is non-stocked, you will be presented with a listing of any sales that may have been made on this item and an option to add the item to inventory.
    1. When electing to add the item, you will be brought to the product maintenance screen and any pertinent info from the receiving screen will be brought over.
    2. NOTE: If the item has recently been sold, and this is a receiving to cover that sale, be cautious about adding the item. If the item is on a completed invoice, the system has no way of knowing that this receiving is in regards to that invoice, and adding it to inventory will falsely up your quantity on hand.

 

RUSH RECEIVING VIA THE RF GUN

Getting Started:

  1. Log in to the RF gun.
  2. Select Option 10 from the RF menu.

  3. The RF rush receiving routine requires a PIN before starting the program. This is the same as used for physical adjustments, etc. If you cannot remember your code please call AMS support.
  4. The receiving scan begins by asking whether you wish to use Autoscan or Not. Selecting “Y” for Autoscan indicates that you will scan each item individually. Selecting “N” for Autoscan indicates that you will scan an item and manually enter in a quantity.
  5. After you choose Y or N the cursor will move to the Bar Code field.

Receiving Product

 

  1. Scanning product from the barcode field will receive the item on to the rush receipt transaction.
    1. All defaults for an item will be accepted, and you should not need to do anything else on any of the items
  2. Once all items are scanned CTRL/A will accept the receiving, and you will be presented with an option to print your journal.
Inventory

RF Count 'Cheat Sheet'

Getting Started

Scanning Product

These are the options from the Bar Code field

Error MESSAGES

Variance Report

To view or print how any user is progressing select the following menu path from any workstation;

6. Inventory / 6. RF Count Reporting / 6. Update RF Count Detail / 1. Update RF Count Detail

Update Count History

Select the same program as for Variance reporting

Inventory

Stock Adjustments

For one-off changes to inventory, it is recommended that you use the Stock Adjustment routines. It is NOT recommended to use this option to do any type of inventory count, as the audit trail is not as verbose.

 

ADJUSTING INVENTORY VIA THE MENU

In the Inventory > File Maintenance > Product Master Maintenance options, the on-hand, committed and on-order quantities are audited fields and may not be changed.  In order to alter the quantities outside of Invoicing, Purchasing or Physical Count functions, stock adjustments must be entered and updated.

Getting Started

  1. Log in to COUNTERPOINT with your regular “menu-based” login
  2. Navigate to Inventory > 1. Data Maintenance > 2. Inventory Adjustments > 1. Stock Adjustments

Adjusting Inventory

  1. Inventory Adjustments require a [PIN] when starting the program. While entering the [PIN] nothing will be displayed on the screen and you must press [ENTER] to complete the entry.  If you do not have a PIN type [QUIT] to exit the function.  PINs are assigned in sales desk controL > file maintenancE > counterman maintenance.

 

  1. When the transaction is complete, the user will be asked whether or not to Print adjustment journal [y] will print the journal [n] will bypass the printed journal and [p] prints for this packing slip only (normally used for rush receiving)
  2. Adjustments to inventory levels through stock adjustments update to the General Ledger with the end of day Those entries are printed on the report called General Ledger Summary Edit list that is automatically printed at that time.

ADJUSTING INVENTORY ON THE RF GUN

Getting Started

  1. Log in to the RF gun.
  2. Select Option 5 for Stk Adjustment.
  3. The RF count routine requires a PIN before starting the program. This is the same as used for physical adjustments, etc. If you cannot remember your code please call AMS support.

Adjusting Inventory

  1. Scan the item in question and fill in the fields as necessary

If recording a sale adjustment using type [5], enter in the associated customer number for the history records.  If the adjustment type is either [3] or [7], the default vendor will be displayed from the product record.

Inventory

Stock Transfer Reconciliation

Basic Overview

This document outlines the recent discrepancy report and the new listing report that will print at your branch each night and how they relate to the reconciliation of inter-branch stock transfers, and the effort to try and catch on hand problems.

Packing Slip Confirmation Report

This report will print each night at each location, and is a listing of any unconfirmed Packing Slips & Stock Transfers sent from your location as of that night. Stock transfers will be identifiable by the customer they are assigned to with all stock transfers will be assigned to another branch.

Any stock transfers listed on this report are unconfirmed. If the stock transfer is over 24 hours old, it may be outstanding and should be reviewed with the contact at the receiving branch to ensure that the product was properly received. Any issues of product not being received, or quantities less than requested should be dealt with via the stock transfer confirmation so that the discrepancies can be properly recorded and presented back to the sending branch.

Stock Transfer Discrepancy Report

This report will also print each night at each location, and is a listing of any stock transfers that were confirmed by the receiving branch, but with discrepancies.

These discrepancies will need to be reviewed to ensure inventory levels are correct. If a stock transfer was requested, but the requested quantity was unavailable from your branch, this report will act as a trigger to go and review the on hand levels for that item. In the case where the system shows an on hand that is different than what is physically on the shelf, a stock adjustment should be made to correct the error.

If you know of an error that is not reported on the discrepancy report, you should review the Packing Slip Confirmation report to ensure that the transfer was, in fact, confirmed by the receiving branch.

Inventory

Supporting Files/Information

BILLING PARAMETERS

CATEGORY FILE

Inventory

Transferring Parts

Transferring single items

The utilities used for transferring product at an item level from one number or category to another are found in the Inventory > 1. Data Maintenance > 5. Utilities menu

Product/Part # Transfer

6. Inventory > 1. Data Maintenance > 5. Utilities > 2. Product/Part # Transfer

This option takes your old number and moves it to a new number. Does not need to be within the same category. This should be used when creating a new number

  1. Enter the Category / Part of the item you wish to transfer
  2. Enter the Category / Part where you would like to transfer the part to

Product History Transfer

6. Inventory > 1. Data Maintenance > 5. Utilities > 3. Product History Transfer

This option takes only the history of an old number, and merges it with an existing number. No on hand information is transferred in this routine.

  1. Enter the OLD part number
  2. Enter the NEW part number
  3. Choose whether to append to or replace the history of the new part with the old part. 
  4. Optionally change the description of the number you are transferring to
  5. Optionally change the alternative description

Transferring ranges of items

Before running any category based transfer routines, it is always suggested to run a category resequence
Inventory > 1. Data Maintenance > 5. Utilities > 1. Category Resequence

Category Transfer

9. System Utilities > 6. inventory > 4. Category Transfer

This utility should be used when moving all or part of a category to a NEW category. In this routine, the new category should not yet exist. You can, however, choose only a portion of the old category to move.

A stock status report can be very useful in determining the start and end of a category

  1. Enter the old category which you want to move product out of.
  2. Select the starting and ending part number for the range that you wish to move. If you are moving the entire category, you can press ENTER to default to start/end of the category.
  3. Enter the new category into which you want to move the product.

Category Merge

9. System Utilities > 6. Inventory > 4. Category Merge

This utility should be used when moving all or part of a category to an EXISTING category. This routine will add items to to the new category and merge the history of any duplicated items

A stock status report can be very useful in determining the start and end of a category

  1. Enter in the category you wish to add the parts to. (it should skip past field 3 (Part number)
  2. Enter the category you wish to move parts out of.
  3. Select the starting number you wish to move
  4. Select the ending number you wish to move
  5. Overwrite on dup?  Y = replace any duplicates;   N = merge any duplicates
Inventory

Uploading Min/Max/Reorder

This document will outline the steps required to extract an inventory list, manipluate the Min/Max/Reorder in excel and then upload the values back in to COUNTERPOINT.

  1. Navigate through the menu to 6. Inventory > 1. Data Maintenance > 5. Utilities > 6. Inventory Item Extract

  2. Select your starting and ending categories
  3. A .csv file named pmdelim.csv will be placed on your Z: drive in html > b1
  4. Either use windows explorer to browse to the file, or open excel and open the file via excel
    The file layout is as follows
    Cagegory Part Description Branch Reorder Rank On Hand On Order Min Max Shelf Cost Purchase Qty SALES (13 columns)
  5. Edit the Reorder/Min/Max Quantities in the excel spreadsheet as needed

    DO NOT reorder the columns in the file. The upload works with a specific layout and this can cause serious issues with your inventory

  6. Save the file back to the Z drive under html > b1. Save the file as a "Comma Delimied (.csv)" file named pmload.csv

    A reminder that the file contains all branches. Remember to remove any branches you do not want to update before you save the file

  7. To upload the infomation back in to COUNTERPOINT, navigate to 6. Inventory > 1. Data Maintenance > 5. Utilities > 7. Min/Max/Reorder Upload

    The menu option starts the upload right away and there is no screen interaction. 

Inventory

Zero Category On-Hands

In Some cases, it becomes necessary to zero out the entire inventory within a category. The recommended way to do this so that you have a proper paper trail is to do a 'zero' physical inventory count. You can accomplish this by following these steps.

  1. Navigate to 6. Inventory > 6. Physical Inventory > 1. Parameters Maintenance

  2. Adjust field 2 Print On Hand (Y/N) to N. With this set to N, when you print an inventory count sheet, it will print a zero as the onhand in the inventory count file.
  3. Navigate to 6. Inventory > 6. Physical Inventory > 2. Count File Creates > 5. Multi-Cat. Count Worksheets
  4. Enter in the category you wish to zero on hands for

  5. Pres F1 to accept the category and F1 again when asked Any change? to create the count files
  6. When the print preview shows up, you can close the window without printing the count sheets
  7. Navigate to 6. Inventory > 6. Physical Inventory > 5. Count Update
  8. You will be presented with 2 different questions to confirm that you wish to update. Please answer them accordingly to proceed:
    - Press RETURN to continue Y: Press the Enter key
    - Are you sure?: Press Y
  9. You will now see a screen with any outstanding count files. Press Enter to go into the list. 
  10. Press N next to ALL categories you do not wish to update

    This is VERY important. Updating old count files can severely throw out your counts on categories

  11. Ensure that the category you DO wish to update has a Y next to it.
  12. Press F1 to accept the changes to the list and F1 again to start processing the update.
  13. You will now be presented with a listing of all items whose onhand was zeroed out. This gives you a proper paper trail for inventory adjustment and financial purposes

Invoicing

How-to guides for the COUNTERPOINT invoicing screen

Invoicing

Adding Flyers to Invoicing

Overview

The promotions button on the Invoicing screen has the ability to allow the user to specify a currently running, or Future Dated flyer and have it available as a clickable item under the promotions button on the COUNTERPOINT Invoicing screen.

This also sets up attachment’s to be included with Customer A/R Statements

Setup

To do this the user must save the PDF document in the Z drive on their system under the HTML directory.

Once filed there they must identify the flyer by name using the Flyer Maintenance program.

The instructions below walk the user through the process of doing this.

Step 1

 

Write down the name that you saved it under as you will need this for the next step.

Record Capitals and lower case exactly as this is important.

Step 2

Using Menu Search (Tab key from any menu – or Mouse Click on the Binocular Icon), Search for “FLYER”. Because there is only one program with that name, it will launch the program.

Enter 1 – ADD FLYER

image-1635551960306.png

Fill in the fields as required.

 

When complete Hit F1-Accept.

Close the program.

Flyer should now be available as a clickable option under Promotions Button.

Invoicing

Bin Selection in Invoice

Definition

New feature when using Multiple Bin Locations and wanting to force the users to select the Bin Location that the product is going to be picked from in order to keep the on-hand quantities for each bin location accurate.

Processing

Billing Parameters

New option added to screen 5 of the Billing Parameters “Select Bin Loc. In Invoice” would need to be set to “Y

For Counter Kits where product is kept in multiple Bin Locations the parameter “18. Kit Detail Display” on screen 3 would also need to be set to Y

Invoicing

In the invoice screen the user will be prompted to select the bin location the product will be picked from after the quantity is entered. Bin locations are displayed in descending order based on quantity on hand. Dock locations are shown at the end of the list and cannot be selected, these are information only. A line number MUST be chosen.

image-1631835161005.png

 

Only the Bin Location chosen will be printed on the invoice and the overall inventory of the part will be reduced and the quantity available in the chosen Bin Location.

Exceptions where this screen will not be displayed:

When selling a “C”ounter Kit the Kit components will be displayed on screen and if any of the components are located in multiple bin locations you will be prompted to select the Bin Location those parts will be pulled from. The components and the chosen Bin Locations will be printed on the invoice.

image-1631835149566.png

Invoice Print

The invoice print will only show the bin location selected for a part.

Exceptions:

Inventory Update

The on-hand quantity will be updated for the selected bin location.

The on-hand quantity will be updated for the Primary bin location:

Invoicing

Customer History Part Search for Unknown Number

Occasionally you will get a customer asking for the same part as they ordered last Week/Month/Year etc. (Pick one). To compound the problem that will typically not know the part number. If they know the time frame of the purchase use the following procedure to locate the part number they ordered.

 

Invoicing

Fleet Part Tracking

Fleet Tracking Setup

The Billing invoice screen has a built in Customer Fleet Part Tracking module. This module allows the counter staff to in affect build customer, unit, specific electronic catalogues. The creation of these catalogues can have a dramatic affect on the accuracy and speed with which counter staff can service parts requests on a customers fleet vehicles. The fleet part tracking is available  from the LINE TYPE field on any invoice line while building an invoice by hitting Shift/[F10]. Doing so will launch the following screen.

image-1631748969530.png

If this is the first time you have launched fleet part tracking on the system you will need to take the (M)aintain records option. Which will change the prompts at the bottom of the screen to read as follows.

“(E/P/G) Equipment, Parts , or Groups”

Again If this is the initial launch of Fleet Part Tracking take the (G)roups option. Which will bring up the Add Change Delete Screen. Select ADD which brings up the following screen.

image-1631749008560.pn.png

 

Sub Groups are required to support future reporting potential, so in this case you can make the subgroups very simplistic if you choose. For example if your operation sells HD parts and well as automotive and light truck you may want to set up only two sub groups being AUT and HD as shown below.

image-1631748987214.pngimage-1631749037333.png

 

 

 

Once your groups are set up you will only need to return to this screen if you decide to change the basic groups that you set up.  Upon Completion of the Groups Maintenance hit [F2] to exit this routine which will return you to the initial screen. As shown below.

image-1631749059798.png

Note that the prompt at left bottom starts with “No Records” This is an indication that this customer, has not had any vehicles added to his fleet. In this case take the M(aintain Files) option then select The Equipment option which will bring up the Add/Change/Delete screen. Selecting Add brings up the following screen

image-1631749072069.png

Enter Data as outlined below.

Description – Enter a meaningful description of this vehicle. Try to use the description that the customer will relate to as they will likely tell the counter staff that they are working on the “old red beast” or some other such internal name for this unit when they call in for parts.

Year – Yr of Vehicle.

Make – A three digit Alpha code for the make of the vehicle. Hit TAB to see a list of valid Car and Light Truck models. If the Unit is not automotive/light truck (ie a Heavy Duty or Construction vehicle) simply enter in the information required.

Model – A three digit Alpha code for the model of the vehicle. Hit TAB to see a list of valid options. If the Unit is not automotive/light truck (ie a Heavy Duty or Construction vehicle) simply enter in the information required.

License Plate, VIN,  - Fill or leave blank as appropriate you your use

Unit Number – Typically a customer assigned number or name for this vehicle.

Odometer – Optional Enter if  required. When field is accepted cursor to skip down to Remarks field.

Last Service, Last Invoice Number – These fields are system maintained from the repair shop module if it is used.

Fields 19 thru 14 - Reserved for Future use. No entry is required or possible in this screen.

When all fields are complete and you are happy with the results hit [F1] to add this vehicle to the customers fleet. If there are no other units to be added to this fleet, hit [F2] to exit the program. This will return you to the Fleet Vehicle list page.

Select M(aintain) and then select PartsList  enter Add/Change/Delete as appropriate which will bring up the screen as shown on the following page.

image-1631749113312.png

Enter Data as follows

Customer – Entered by the system.

Customer Unit Number – Enter the unit number or name that the part(s) you are about to enter will be used on.

Product Group – Enter the Product Group that the entered parts will have sales data captured under. (ie HD or AUT in this example)

Category – Cursor will skip this field and auto fill when you enter a part number. In the case where the part exists in more than one category you will need to select the correct category from the displayed options.

Part Number – Part number used on the specified vehicle.

Quantity Required – Enter the quantity required in this units use of the part.

Comment – Optional Enter a free form comment that will assist in ensuring this part is correctly chosen when the request comes in (ie “Used on the PTO for the hydraulic pump”) or something similar.

When you are happy with the screen hit [F1] to accept the entry.

Repeat for all other parts used on this Unit. When done hit [F2]

This completes the set up of a Unit and it associated parts.

 

Using The Fleet Part System Within COUNTERPOINT

When a customer calls in for parts and identifies that these are for a unit in his fleet proceed as follows.

1 Set up the invoice for the customer as normal (ie enter customer number PO if required and your customer number.

2 When the cursor is in the Line Type field  hit Shift/[F10] which will bring up the customer fleet list similar to that shown below.

image-1631749208302.png

3 Select the appropriate unit as specified by the customer which will bring up the parts list. As shown below.

image-1631749223165.png

4 Enter line number(s) corresponding to the parts you need to sell. Note that as you select line numbers the program moves selected lines to the space just above the “Maintain files” line.

5 When you have selected all required parts hit “E” to exit the screen and move the parts in the quantities specified at the customers prices onto the invoice.

Notice that the parts list displays the quantity on hand and the quantity required for each part.

If you need to add, delete or change a part for this unit it can be done at this point by entering M to launch the maintain files routine.

Invoicing

General Charges & Deposit Handling

Definition

General charges are a new line type in the COUNTERPOINT invoicing program which allows you to include amounts on the invoice which do not impact inventory or apply standard comments to an invoice. The charges can be automatically applied to all transactions based on a percentage up to a maximum value or a set dollar amount. General charges can also be added to an invoice manually. This feature will also allow deposits to be added to Order transactions which will automatically reduce the amount owed when the order is completed and turned into an invoice.

Processing

General Charge Codes

The maintenance of General Charge Codes is found through System Utilities > System Setup > Sales Desk > General Charge Code Maintenance.

A maximum of two characters is used for the code. The description used will be put on the invoice when the code is used. The Type can be a $, % or C for a standard comment. The charge can either be setup as a percentage or as a dollar value. This is used for automatic charges and deposits. For manually added charges the value would be left at zero. If a percentage charge is to be capped at a certain value that would be entered in the maximum value. The tax codes are based on the values setup in the Billing Parameters. If levies are to be included in the calculation of an automatic charge this flag must be set to Y. Deposits are not to be set as an automatic charge. If the “enter text” setting is Y the user will be able to alter the comment which will be printed on the invoice. If the value is allowed to be changed or entered manually the “enter value” setting must be Y. In the case of a return the date range is also used to determine if an automatic charge should be refunded based on the original purchase date.

Customer Maintenance

Customers that are exempt from automatic general charges require a “G” be entered in one of the “account control flags” in the customer maintenance screen.

Invoicing

Any automatic charges will be added as the last line on an invoice when the body of the invoice is accepted. If new lines are added later, the value of the automatic charge will be adjusted to reflect the new total of the invoice. Should an automatic charge be adjusted manually it will not be altered if any other changes are made to the lines on the invoice.

To enter a general charge or standard comment manually use the new line type of “G”. This will display a list of up to 18 codes in the information window or you can use the TAB key to search additional codes

Deposit type codes may only be used on Order transactions.

Comment codes will have no value associated with them.

When taking a deposit for products that will be delivered at some future time you must use a transaction type of “O”rder. The items being purchased are to be added to the order as Backorder "B" linetype (Normally stocked items) or a Special Order "S" linetype (Non Stocked/Pickups) lines. When the items have been added enter a “G” line for the deposit and select the deposit code which has been setup. Providing the deposit code has been setup with a percentage the amount of deposit required will be shown on the screen. This can be changed if necessary providing the code has been setup to allow the value to be entered.

When recalling the order and turning it into an invoice the value of the deposit will automatically be reversed so the total owing will reflect the price of the items less the amounts previously received. If a customer returns to make additional deposits the original order must be recalled and the second deposit added to the order.

Customer Backorders

When a backorder is being fulfilled upon receipt of the product and an invoice is created the standard comments contained on lines 1 through 3 of the original transaction will be included on the fulfillment invoice.

Invoice Register

The total value of any Freight and General Charges will be shown on the invoice register in the relabelled column “Freight /Oth Chgs”.

 

 

Invoicing

Invoicing with Global Payments Terminals

To process a cash sale (paid by cash or credit card):

Always take the credit card first and cash last

  1.  Create your invoice as normal
  2. If a charge customer decides to pay by cash or credit/debit you will need to change the customer on the invoice to your cash sale customer. When asked “recalculate pricing” the default is N.
  3. You cannot change the method of payment for a charge customer unless taking a deposit on account.
  4. Select F1 in Counterpoint for payment; this will bring you directly to the payment screen:

  5. Select F1 in Counterpoint to accept the amount owing. This amount will pass to the terminal
  6. Tap or insert the customer’s credit card, all credit card and payment information will feed back to Counterpoint
  7. The screen will go back to the invoice screen
  8. If the customer would like to pay with multiple payment types:
    1. At the payment screen, select F3 in Counterpoint to change the value, then process the credit pmt
    2. Now the new balance owing appears on the same payment screen

      You can do up to 3 payment types

  9. If the balance is paid by cash, enter “$” on the bottom of the screen (to the right of F11)
  10. If the card is swiped, a signature is required, a ‘signature capture’ screen will appear, customer is to sign   on the signature pad
  11. If the card is declined, the message ‘declined’ will be on the terminal, select F1 to go back to the terminal to use another payment card
  12. If you start to pay a transaction paid by cash/credit/debit you must complete this prior to processing another cash sale on the same work station

 

To process a credit invoice on the customer’s credit/debit card:
  1. Create your credit as normal
  2. Select F1 in Counterpoint for refund, screen will go straight to the payment screen
  3. Select F1 in Counterpoint to accept the credit amount
    • This amount will pass to the terminal
    • You will need to enter the manager password (this will be provided in your go-live documentation)
  4. Tap or insert the customer’s credit card, all credit card and payment information will feed back to Counterpoint

    The method of payment must be the same as the original invoice

  5. The screen will go back to the invoice screen

    Daily refund limits per terminal per day:  credit card $5,000, debit card $2,000, for refunds over those limits, please use a different terminal or call the help desk to put the credit through

               

To void an invoice that was processed on the customer’s credit/debit card:        
  1. Select F11 in Counterpoint, this will reverse the transaction, including multiple payment types
  2. F11 Can also be used to void a transaction in the payment screen where no payment can be received because of insufficient funds.
 
To process a credit card payment on an invoice, card NOT present:
  1. Manually enter the credit card number in the terminal
  2. You will be asked if the card is present, you must answer ‘NO’ otherwise you will be prompted to get a customer signature after completing the card payment

The 3 digit CVV number is required (card verification value) on the back of the card (not required for a credit return)

You can bypass the other questions on the machine (order number, address, postal code) with the enter key

To process a deposit on order:

Use this function when you are taking a deposit for products that will be delivered at some future time

  1. When taking a deposit:
    1. Use transaction type ‘O’ (order)
    2. The items being purchased are to be added to the order as a Special Order (non stocked/pickups)
    3. When the items have been added, enter a ‘G’ line for the deposit
    4. Select DP (deposit on order)
    5. Take payment from customer
  2. When the product has been received and you are creating the invoice:
    • Recall the order and turn it into an invoice
      • The value of the deposit will automatically be reversed so the total owing will reflect the price of the items less the amounts previously received
    • If the customer does not want the part anymore, you can void the invoice. The deposit is not refunded to the customer
When a customer makes a payment on account with a credit card:

do not use this method if customer is paying on account with a cheque

this will be a separate transaction from any current purchases

  1. From invoicing screen, enter Customer #
  2. Enter Clerk #
  3. Now you are at line type – select F4 – this will bring you to payment method
  4. – select the payment method
  5. Now you are at Transaction Type – enter ‘C’ for ‘Payment on Account’
  6. You are back to line type – enter ‘$’ – this brings up part # ‘Received on Account’
  7. Enter the amount of the payment, this will bring you to the payment screen
  8. An invoice will be generated
 
End of day procedures:

The units will automatically close every evening.  The next morning you will see a tape of all of your transactions from the previous day.  Please give to your designated person who will collect all the tapes and submit to Head Office.

Check your terminal in the morning.  If the unit says “Out of Balance” please call Accounting.

 
If prompted by the Global terminal to call in for an authorization number:

The dedicated Authorization phone number is provided in your go-live documentation

Once you receive the authorization code, go to the main menu on the terminal and choose “Force”

Then choose “Credit” to complete the transaction with the authorization code

 

FYI
Invoicing

Selling a Core

There may be ocassions when it is desired to sell a core to a customer. This is done by entering a “C” line type and entering “-1”  (Negative 1) as a quantity. Because, in a core line, the quantity amount is automatically reversed from what you entered the end result is a core sale.

If you try this and it will not accept “-1” as a sale quantity it means that you need to change         Field 72 Allow Core Sales  in the Sales Parameter Maintenance,  Screen 1 to a “Y” This program is accessed via menu path as follows.

  1. System Utilities… -> 3. System Setup… -> 4. Sales Desk… -> 2. Parts Billing Parameters -> Screen 1 – System Defaults
Invoicing

Suspense Payments with Payment Terminal

Payment Terminal – Semi-Integrated

Changes to invoicing related to Suspense Payment Type

Invoicing

Updating Credit Hold Invoice

Overview

In instances where an online wholesale customer submits an order but is over their credit limit, a credit hold invoice is created. This is a suspended transaction with all of the items they have ordered, which can be released once they are back below their credit limit.

Receiving The Order

When the original order is submitted, a credit hold transaction will print. This will look much like a regular invoice, but will be marked as a 'Credit Hold Invoice' on the paper. It will also have a number in the 9,000,000 range.

Before releasing the credit hold invoice, you must bring the customer back down below their credit limit. To do this, you may increase their limit or receive a payment against the account.

Releasing the Invoice

To release a credit hold invoice, you will need to take the following menu path:

4. Sales Desk > 5. Transaction Queries > 7. Credit Hold Invoice Release

image-1631747989088.png

Once you have a listing of the invoices, selecting any line number will give you the option to take action against that respective invoice. 

image-1631748102937.png

Your options are:

 

Pricing

Pricing

Customer Price List

COUNTERPOINT® provides the user with an ability to produce customer specific price lists for a line or range of lines, with customized column headers. This program is accessed via the following menu path.

6.Inventory…->7.Reporting…->4.Price Lists…->2.Customer Price List

Which brings up the following screen.

image-1631748704044.png

Complete the fields as follows.

1 Starting Category, 3 Ending Category – Enter the start and end category or hit enter in both fields to list all categories in your inventory.

5 Starting Part Number, 7 Ending Part Number – Enter the first and last number in the part range to be printed or hit enter in both fields for First and Last part numbers.

9 Printed For – Enter the customer that the Price list is to be printed for.

11 Price Level Headings – Enter up to four price levels and the description you would like the printout to show for each. Note if you leave the price level number as “0” no prices will show for that column on the report.

23 Customer Price Headings, 25 Specials Headings & 27 Core Price Headings – Leaving any of these three fields blank will suppress the printing of these columns on the report. Entering a column header in any of them will cause the column to be populated with prices under the header you specified.

29 Effective Date – Enter the Effective date of the price list.

32 Double Spacing (Y/N ) Enter response as appropriate to the list you intend to create.

33 Sequential and Alphanumeric (A/S) – Enter “A” if you require an Alphanumeric List or “S” of you require the printout to be in the same sequence as the computer stores its information.

When you are happy with the screen, hit [F1] to accept it and produce the report. The image below is a screen shot of the report produced by the setup screen entries shown above.

image-1631748725107.png

Pricing

F.A.Q.

Question – I am told that a line is (or will be) changing from Jobber to Net pricing what do I need to do?

Answer – When a line changes its base price you need to make two changes on the price multipliers maintenance screen for all of the Price Discount Groups affected by the change.

1 – Open up each discount group and change field 40 Original to Price Level to reflect the new base price you will be receiving for this line (ie if a line that was jobber will now be receiving net price field 40 will need to be changed from price level 5 to price level 6)

2 -  On all lines where you changed field 40 change at least the first multiplier line to reflect where the new base price will be found.

So in that case of a line that was Jobber less 35%  but is now Net you will need to change the first multiplier line from;

Price 6 Becomes Price 5  + -35.00000%

To                                                     } - (Where 6 is Cost and 5 is Jobber)

Price 5 Becomes Price 6  +   55.00000%  

If dollar value of your net price is the same as it was previously you will likely not need to change anything other than the first line since all other multipliers will typically build on the results of the first calculation. That said, review the other price level calculations to ensure that they remain valid in light of the new base level that you are receiving.

 

Question – I set up a new line in the system. Non Stock Prices show up properly, but stocking prices are all zeroes. What is causing this?

Answer – There are several things that can cause this. The most likely cuplrit is that you do not have a set of price multipliers set up for the Space Discount Group. Check this first.

If multipliers are present confirm that field  40 Original to Price Level is pointing to a base price level that will contain values other than zero in the price book.

Lastly if all of the above checks out correctly look at the items in Produce Master Maintenance – Change Mode. Specifically field 53 Discount Level. If it contains an “*” or a Discount Group code that does not exist you will need to correct this in order for the price multipliers to work.

 

Question – My Stocking Prices show up correctly but the Non Stock pricing is either non existant or all wrong. What should I look for?

Answer – The most likely culprit is the price multiplier set is looking at a wrong field as its base price. Use the following procedure to determine whats going on and how to fix it.

  1. Look up the sample part in the in the price book inquiry.  Note what is in field 6 Price Level  as this is the Product Discount Group that the system will use to determine the multiplier set to use.
  2. Go to the Multipliers Maintenance screen for the category in change mode. Enter as follows.
    1. Enter Space for the the stocking parameters discount group which will display the multiplier set for that discount group
    2. Hit F1 to accept the stocking multipliers as set up
    3. Answer N to copy stocked to non-stocked prompt.
    4. Answer N to the overwrite non-stocked? prompt.
    5. Answer Y to any change Non stocked?
    6. Cursor moves to Field 39 Discount Level – Enter the Discount Level identified in step 1 above.
    7. Review the displayed multipliers looking for the following
  3. An incorrect Original to Price Level in field 40
  4. Incorrect base price level being used in the multiplier specification lines.
  5. Incorrect multipliers set up in the field to the right of the “+” Sign.

When changes are completed accept the record and  exit the program.

NOTE - If when you enter the Discount Level identified in step one the screen will not accept it you will need to back out and re-enter the program in Add mode in order to add the level. The easiest way to do this is to add it into Stocked and copy it to Non stocked by responding Y to the make Non Stocked the same? question .

  1. Remember that changing the multipliers of and in itself will not change the pricing

      on stocked items. It will only result in changed pricing on Non-Stocked items since pricing on these is calculated on the fly as they are called up. When you change an existing set of Multipliers you will be asked Update Prices now? Responding Y will cause the program to update all Stocking items using the new multiplier set.

  1. There may be times when non stocked pricing will remain incorrect even after you have corrected the multipliers. When this happens try running the price file update manually as the previous set of multipliers may have clobbered the base price as the last update was run with incorrect multipliers.

 

Question – A price update has been processed but there are some stocked items that have incorrect pricing. – What might be causing this?

Answer – If this situation applies to only some of your stocking items the first thing to do is go into Product Master Maintenance in change mode, call up the item in question and look at what is entered in Field 53 – Discount Level. If this field points to a non existent or incorrect Discount Level correcting it and moving past the field will cause the pricing to be recalculated using the now correct multipliers. If the field contains an “*” it means that at some point in the past it was deemed appropriate to fix the pricing regardless of what new price changes come through the system. Replacing the “*” with the correct price level releases the item to recalculate prices as price changes come through.

 

Question – I changed the stocking multipliers on a line, but the prices have not changed. What’s wrong?

Answer –  If you did not enter Y to the Update Prices Now? prompt at the end of the price multiplier maintenance acceptance process the system will not act on the multipliers until the next time there is a price update.

If you want to have the prices recalculated immediately you will need to return to Price Multiplier maintenance in Change mode, Change the fifth decimal place on any one field by incrementing it by 1. (eg. 35.00000 to 35.00001) This will not materially change the pricing but will trigger the Update Prices Now? Prompt which if you answer Y will result in the system running the new calculations against all of the stocked items within the category. Alternately you could also call AMS and request that we resend the price file(s) for the category which can then be run immediately or left to process automatically overnight should you so desire.

Pricing

MSC / AMS Line Code to AMS Price Level

Product Line Line Description AMS Product Code Product Class Product Code Description Catalogue Vendor
102 VELVAC A 1002 MIRRORS VELVC
102 VELVAC B 1003 FUEL SYSTEM HARDWARE VELVC
102 VELVAC C 1004 CAMERAS & VISION  VELVC
102 VELVAC D 0999 MIRROR HARDWARE VELVC
102 VELVAC E 1000 AIR CYLINDERS VELVC
102 VELVAC F 1001 GAS CAPS VELVC
104 USMW HD A 3108 HD WATER PUMP USMOTW
104 USMW HD B 3109 HD OIL PUMP USMOTW
104 USMW HD C 3110 HD FAN CLUTCH USMOTW
104 USMW HD D 3111 HD FUEL PUMP USMOTW
104 USMW HD E 3112 HD UNCLASSIFIED USMOTW
111 CANTECH A 0024 CLOTH/DUCT CANTEC
111 CANTECH B 0025 SHEATHING CANTEC
111 CANTECH C 0026 CARTON SEALING CANTEC
111 CANTECH D 0027 ELECTRICAL CANTEC
111 CANTECH E 0028 MASKING CANTEC
111 CANTECH F 0029 SPORTS ANCILLARY CANTEC
111 CANTECH G 0030 FOIL & FILAMENT CANTEC
111 CANTECH H 0031 DISPENSER CANTEC
111 CANTECH I 0032 OTHER CANTEC
112 GENO INDUSTRIES A 3105 ALL PRODUCTS GENO
123 HENKEL / LOCTITE A 0049 AAM -AFTERMARKET LOCT
123 HENKEL / LOCTITE B 0050 MRO - MAINTENCE LOCT
123 HENKEL / LOCTITE C 0051 IND - INDUSTRIAL LOCT
123 HENKEL / LOCTITE D 0052 EQUIPMENT LOCT
126 WAI GLOBAL A 2373 COMPONENTS WAI
126 WAI GLOBAL B 2374 ENGINE MGMNT WAI
126 WAI GLOBAL C 2375 AG & IND ALTERNATORS WAI
126 WAI GLOBAL D 2376 AG & IND STARTERS WAI
126 WAI GLOBAL E 2377 AUTOMOTIVE STARTERS WAI
126 WAI GLOBAL F 2378 AUTOMOTIVE ALTERNATORS WAI
126 WAI GLOBAL G 2379 WIPER LINKAGE WAI
126 WAI GLOBAL H 2380 HD STARTERS WAI
126 WAI GLOBAL I 2381 HD ALTERNATORS WAI
126 WAI GLOBAL J 2382 HI PERF STARTERS WAI
126 WAI GLOBAL K 2383 MARINE & OPE STARTERS WAI
126 WAI GLOBAL L 2384 MARINE & OPE ALTERNATORS WAI
126 WAI GLOBAL M 2385 POWERSPORT STARTERS WAI
126 WAI GLOBAL N 2386 DISTRIBUTORS WAI
126 WAI GLOBAL O 2387 TURBO CHARGERS WAI
126 WAI GLOBAL P 2388 HD WIPER MOTORS WAI
126 WAI GLOBAL Q 2389 POWERSPORT ALTERNATORS WAI
126 WAI GLOBAL R 2390 HI PERF ALTERNATORS WAI
126 WAI GLOBAL S 2464 AUTOMOTIVE WIPER MOTORS WAI
126 WAI GLOBAL T 2465 TRANSFER CASE MOTOR WAI
127 LEATHERMAN A 2346 LEATHERMAN LTHRMN
127 LEATHERMAN B 2347 LED LENSER LTHRMN
129 WHD A 0063 BRASS WHEAD
129 WHD B 0064 AIR BRAKE TUBING WHEAD
129 WHD C 0065 AIR CHAMBER & HOSE WHEAD
130 JUSTRITE A 2366 SAFETY CABINETS JUSTRT
130 JUSTRITE B 2367 SAFETY CONTAINERS JUSTRT
130 JUSTRITE C 2368 ENVIRONMENTAL PRODUCTS JUSTRT
130 JUSTRITE D 2369 STORAGE AND SECURITY JUSTRT
130 JUSTRITE E 2370 SMOKING RECEPTICLES JUSTRT
130 JUSTRITE F 2371 DRUM EQUIPMENT JUSTRT
130 JUSTRITE G 2372 UTILITY PRODUCTS JUSTRT
131 CLEARPLUS A 0074 CONVENTIONAL BLADES CLEARP
131 CLEARPLUS B 0075 WINTER BLADES CLEARP
131 CLEARPLUS C 0076 REAR BLADES CLEARP
131 CLEARPLUS D 0077 BEAM BLADES CLEARP
131 CLEARPLUS E 0078 HYBRID BLADES CLEARP
131 CLEARPLUS F 0079 HEAVY DUTY BLADES CLEARP
131 CLEARPLUS G 0080 DISPLAYERS CLEARP
132 MECHANIX WEAR A 0089 CORE GLOVES MECHNX
132 MECHANIX WEAR B 0090 ORIGINAL SPECIALTY MECHNX
132 MECHANIX WEAR C 0091 MATERIAL 4X GLOVES MECHNX
132 MECHANIX WEAR D 0092 WOMENS GLOVES/ACCSSRY MECHNX
132 MECHANIX WEAR E 0093 DIY/TASK/SEASONAL GLOVES MECHNX
132 MECHANIX WEAR F 0094 COLD WEATHER GLOVES MECHNX
132 MECHANIX WEAR G 0095 LEATHER GLOVES MECHNX
132 MECHANIX WEAR H 0096 HI VIZ/SAFETY GLOVES MECHNX
133 US CHEMICAL A 2452 FILLERS PUTTIES USCHEM
133 US CHEMICAL B 2453 REPAIR PRODUCTS USCHEM
133 US CHEMICAL C 2454 ACCESSORY PRODUCTS USCHEM
133 US CHEMICAL D 2455 MASKING PRODUCTS USCHEM
133 US CHEMICAL E 2456 MIXING PAILS & CANS USCHEM
133 US CHEMICAL F 2457 USC PAINTS & COATINGS USCHEM
133 US CHEMICAL G 2458 OMI-CRON PAINTS COAT USCHEM
133 US CHEMICAL H 2459 EASYWORK PAINTS COAT USCHEM
133 US CHEMICAL I 2460 MORTON PAINTS COATING USCHEM
133 US CHEMICAL J 2461 SPRAYMAX USCHEM
133 US CHEMICAL K 2567 ABRASIVES USCHEM
134 ANCO A 2404 CONTOUR BLADE ANCO
134 ANCO B 2405 TRANSFORM HYBRID BLADE ANCO
134 ANCO C 2406 PROFILE BLADE ANCO
134 ANCO D 2407 AREOVANTAGE BLADE ANCO
134 ANCO E 2408 31-SERIES BLADE ANCO
134 ANCO F 2409 WINTER BLADE ANCO
134 ANCO G 2410 REAR BLADE ANCO
134 ANCO H 2411 PROFILE BLADE SHOP PK ANCO
134 ANCO I 2412 RAINY DAY ANCO
134 ANCO J 2413 REFILLS ANCO
134 ANCO K 2414 WIPER ARMS ANCO
134 ANCO L 2415 HEAVY DUTY ANCO
134 ANCO M 2416 WASHER PUMPS ANCO
134 ANCO N 2417 REMAINING ANCO
135 LENOX A 2398 HAND TOOLS LENOX
135 LENOX B 2399 HOLE SAWS LENOX
135 LENOX C 2400 JIG SAW BLADES LENOX
135 LENOX D 2401 METAL & WOOD DRILLING LENOX
135 LENOX E 2402 RECIPROCATING LENOX
135 LENOX F 2403 UNCLASSIFIED LENOX
137 EDGE EYEWEAR A 2418 GLASSES EDGEYE
137 EDGE EYEWEAR B 2532 ACCESSORIES EDGEYE
139 PRIME WIRE AND CABLE A 0100 INDOOR EXT CORDS PRMWIR
139 PRIME WIRE AND CABLE B 0101 OUTDOOR EXT CORDS PRMWIR
139 PRIME WIRE AND CABLE C 0102 UTILITY EXT CORDS  PRMWIR
139 PRIME WIRE AND CABLE D 0103 ELECT ADAPTERS/SHOCKSAFE PRMWIR
139 PRIME WIRE AND CABLE E 0104 MULTI-OUTLET/SURGE PROTECTORS PRMWIR
139 PRIME WIRE AND CABLE F 0105 BULK WIRE/WIRING PRODS PRMWIR
139 PRIME WIRE AND CABLE G 0106 LIGHTING PRODUCTS PRMWIR
139 PRIME WIRE AND CABLE H 0107 HOLIDAY/TIMERS/REMOTES PRMWIR
140 GROUP BBH A 0111 BULK GLOVES GROUPE
140 GROUP BBH B 0112 WINTER RETAIL GLOVES GROUPE
140 GROUP BBH C 0113 RETAIL GLOVES GROUPE
140 GROUP BBH D 0114 NON-STOCKING ITEMS GROUPE
140 GROUP BBH E 0115 ROPE GROUPE
141 WESTAR A 2431 DOMESTIC AIR SUSPENSION WESTAR
141 WESTAR B 2432 DOMESTIC DRIVE SHAFT SUPPORTS WESTAR
141 WESTAR C 2433 DOMESTIC MOUNTS WESTAR
141 WESTAR D 2434 DOMESTIC STRUT MOUNTS WESTAR
141 WESTAR E 2435 IMPORT AIR SUSPENSION WESTAR
141 WESTAR F 2436 IMPORT DRIVE SHAFT SUPPORTS WESTAR
141 WESTAR G 2437 IMPORT MOUNTS WESTAR
141 WESTAR H 2438 IMPORT STRUT MOUNTS WESTAR
142 OTC/BOSCH A 0126 OTC TOOLS BOSCH
142 OTC/BOSCH B 0127 OTC DIAGNOSTIC BOSCH
142 OTC/BOSCH C 0128 OTC EQUPIMENT BOSCH
142 OTC/BOSCH D 0129 ROBINAIR BOSCH
142 OTC/BOSCH E 0130 TIF BOSCH
142 OTC/BOSCH F 0131 BOSCH DIAGNOSTIC BOSCH
142 OTC/BOSCH G 0132 BOSCH WHEEL SERVICE BOSCH
142 OTC/BOSCH H 0133 REPLACEMENT PARTS BOSCH
142 OTC/BOSCH I 0134 BOSCH GAUGES BOSCH
143 EMPACK A 2419 AUTO MAINTENANCE BLIEMP
143 EMPACK B 2420 AUTO APPEARANCE BLIEMP
143 EMPACK C 2421 INDUSTRIAL AUTO BLIEMP
143 EMPACK D 2422 AUTO REFRIGERANTS BLIEMP
143 EMPACK E 2423 COMPUTER MAINTENANCE BLIEMP
143 EMPACK F 2424 GERM BUSTER BLIEMP
143 EMPACK G 2425 SIGNAL AIR HORNS BLIEMP
143 EMPACK H 2426 SHOE & BOOT CARE BLIEMP
143 EMPACK I 2427 PESTICIDES BLIEMP
143 EMPACK J 2428 INSECT REPELLENTS BLIEMP
143 EMPACK K 2429 SUN CARE BLIEMP
144 TYC GENERA A 2439 HEADLAMP DOMESTIC TYC
144 TYC GENERA B 2440 OTHERLAMP DOMESTIC TYC
144 TYC GENERA C 2441 TAILLAMP DOMESTIC TYC
144 TYC GENERA D 2442 MIRROR DOMESTIC TYC
144 TYC GENERA E 2443 BLOWER DOMESTIC TYC
144 TYC GENERA F 2444 CABIN AIR FLTR DOMESTIC TYC
144 TYC GENERA G 2445 HEADLAMP IMPORT TYC
144 TYC GENERA H 2446 OTHERLAMP IMPORT TYC
144 TYC GENERA I 2447 TAILLAMP IMPORT TYC
144 TYC GENERA J 2448 MIRROR IMPORT TYC
144 TYC GENERA K 2449 BLOWER IMPORT TYC
144 TYC GENERA L 2450 CABIN AIR FLTR IMPORT TYC
144 TYC GENERA M 2488 RADIATORS DOMESTIC TYC
144 TYC GENERA N 2489 RADIATORS IMPORT TYC
144 TYC GENERA O 2545 NSF TAIL LAMPS TYC
144 TYC GENERA P 2546 NSF OTHER LAMPS TYC
144 TYC GENERA Q 2547 NSF HEAD LAMPS TYC
144 TYC GENERA R 2548 CAPA TAIL LAMPS TYC
144 TYC GENERA S 2549 CAPA OTHER LAMPS TYC
144 TYC GENERA T 2550 CAPA HEAD LAMPS TYC
144 TYC GENERA U 3075 CONDENSERS DOMESTIC TYC
144 TYC GENERA V 3076 CONDENSERS IMPORT TYC
151 RAPID FIX A 2451 RAPID FIX RAPIDF
151 RAPID FIX B 2877 PREVAL SPRAYERS RAPIDF
156 SEAL ALL A 0154 SEAL ALL - ALL PRODUCTS SEALAL
157 UVIEW PRODUCTS A 0164 MIST UVIEW
157 UVIEW PRODUCTS B 0165 DYES UVIEW
157 UVIEW PRODUCTS C 0166 A/C UVIEW
157 UVIEW PRODUCTS D 0167 DTRGNT/SRVCE KITS/ACCESS UVIEW
157 UVIEW PRODUCTS E 0168 LIGHTING UVIEW
157 UVIEW PRODUCTS F 0169 LEAK DETECTION UVIEW
157 UVIEW PRODUCTS G 0170 MOTORVAC - EQUIPMENT UVIEW
157 UVIEW PRODUCTS H 0171 COOLING SYS/CAR AIR QUALITY UVIEW
157 UVIEW PRODUCTS I 0172 UNCLASSIFIED UVIEW
158 MGM BRAKES A 2490 BRAKES MGMBRK
158 MGM BRAKES B 2491 PARTS MGMBRK
158 MGM BRAKES C 2492 E-STROKE MGMBRK
159 ATP A 0177 TRANSMISSION FILTERS ATP
159 ATP B 0178 CABIN FILTERS ATP
159 ATP C 0179 CHEMICALS ATP
159 ATP D 0180 UNCLASSIFIED ATP
159 ATP E 0181 EXH MANIFOLD ATP
161 AUTOSOL A 0189 METAL POLISH AUTOSO
162 RONSON A 2504 ALL PRODUCTS RONSON
163 COLE HERSEE A 0199 STOCKING ITEMS COLE
163 COLE HERSEE B 0200 NON STOCK ITEMS COLE
165 DICON GLOBAL - FIRST ALERT H 2543 FIRST ALERT DICONG
165 DICON GLOBAL - FIRST ALERT I 2544 GLOVES DICONG
167 CURT MANUFACTURING A 2466 ACCESSORY CURTMA
167 CURT MANUFACTURING B 2467 BALL MOUNT CURTMA
167 CURT MANUFACTURING C 2468 CARGO MANAGEMENT CURTMA
167 CURT MANUFACTURING D 2469 ELECTRICAL CURTMA
167 CURT MANUFACTURING E 2470 FIFTH WHEEL CURTMA
167 CURT MANUFACTURING F 2471 GOOSENECK CURTMA
167 CURT MANUFACTURING G 2472 RECEIVER HITCH CURTMA
167 CURT MANUFACTURING H 2473 SPECIALIZED TOWING CURTMA
167 CURT MANUFACTURING I 2474 TRAILER BALL CURTMA
169 COLSON A 0202 CASTER COLSON
170 MONROE COMMERCIAL A 2493 GAS-MAGNEM 60 SHOCK MONROE
170 MONROE COMMERCIAL B 2494 GAS-MAGNEM 65 SHOCK MONROE
170 MONROE COMMERCIAL C 2495 MAGNEM 70 SHOCK MONROE
170 MONROE COMMERCIAL D 2496 GAS-MAGNEM CAB SHOCK MONROE
170 MONROE COMMERCIAL E 2497 GAS-MAGNEM RV SHOCK MONROE
171 PELICAN A 2500 CASE PELICA
171 PELICAN B 2501 CASE ACCESSORIES PELICA
171 PELICAN C 2502 LIGHT PELICA
171 PELICAN D 2503 LIGHT ACCESSORIES PELICA
173 MCGARD A 2568 AUTOMOTIVE MCGARD
173 MCGARD B 2569 HEAVY DUTY MCGARD
176 SHARK WELDING A 2522 ABRASIVES SHARKI
176 SHARK WELDING B 2523 ACCESSORIES SHARKI
176 SHARK WELDING C 2524 ROD & WIRE SHARKI
176 SHARK WELDING D 2525 SAFETY SHARKI
176 SHARK WELDING E 2526 CUTTING KITS SHARKI
176 SHARK WELDING F 2527 WELDERS SHARKI
176 SHARK WELDING G 2528 DISPLAYS SHARKI
176 SHARK WELDING H 2529 WIRE BRUSHES SHARKI
176 SHARK WELDING I 2530 TIP & NOZZLES SHARKI
176 SHARK WELDING J 2588 CARBIDE SHARKI
176 SHARK WELDING K 1063 BRAKE LATHE SHARKI
177 MOTHERS A 0221 PAINT CARE MOTHER
177 MOTHERS B 0220 INTERIOR MOTHER
177 MOTHERS C 0219 WHEEL AND TIRE MOTHER
177 MOTHERS D 0218 SPECIALTY MOTHER
177 MOTHERS E 0217 MARINE MOTHER
179 PIAA A 2551 BULBS PIAA
179 PIAA B 2552 LAMP KITS PIAA
179 PIAA C 2553 POWERSPORT PIAA
179 PIAA D 2554 SERVICE PARTS PIAA
179 PIAA E 2555 REMAINING PIAA
182 IDEAL TRIDON A 2589 FLEX GEAR IDLCLM
182 IDEAL TRIDON B 2590 HY-GEAR IDLCLM
182 IDEAL TRIDON C 2591 MICRO-GEAR IDLCLM
182 IDEAL TRIDON D 2592 LINED IDLCLM
182 IDEAL TRIDON E 2593 FUEL INJECTION IDLCLM
182 IDEAL TRIDON F 2594 COMBO HEX IDLCLM
182 IDEAL TRIDON G 2595 POWER GEAR IDLCLM
182 IDEAL TRIDON H 2596 T-BOLT IDLCLM
182 IDEAL TRIDON I 2597 T-BOLT CHANNEL BRIDGE IDLCLM
182 IDEAL TRIDON J 2598 TURN-KEY IDLCLM
182 IDEAL TRIDON K 2539 SMART SEAL CLAMPS IDLCLM
182 IDEAL TRIDON L 2540 BANDS AND BUCKLES IDLCLM
183 FLEETSPEC A 2556 SLACK ADJUSTERS FLEETS
183 FLEETSPEC B 2557 AIR DRIVERS FLEETS
183 FLEETSPEC C 2558 AIR BRAKE SYSTM VALVE FLEETS
183 FLEETSPEC D 2559 ANTI-LCK BRK SYSTM FLEETS
183 FLEETSPEC E 2560 SUSPENSION AIR VALVES FLEETS
183 FLEETSPEC F 2561 MISC AIR VALVES FLEETS
183 FLEETSPEC G 2562 ELECTRIC ACCESSORIES FLEETS
183 FLEETSPEC H 2563 TRUCK $ TRAILER ACCESSORIES FLEETS
184 31 INCORPORATED A 0231 TIRE REPAIR INC31
185 RALSTON A 0242 BULK BAGS RALSTN
185 RALSTON B 0243 BULK FILM RALSTN
185 RALSTON C 0244 BIOSAK RALSTN
185 RALSTON D 0245 SUPERSAK RALSTN
185 RALSTON E 0246 RETAIL FILM RALSTN
190 IMPERIAL OIL A 0253 MOTOR OIL IMPER
190 IMPERIAL OIL B 0254 GREASE IMPER
190 IMPERIAL OIL C 0255 GEAR OIL IMPER
190 IMPERIAL OIL D 0256 HYDRAULIC OIL IMPER
190 IMPERIAL OIL E 0257 OTHER IMPER
192 GMB A 2576 WATER PUMPS GMB
192 GMB B 2869 FAN CLUTCHES GMB
193 MCSWEENEYS A 2574 JERKY MCSWEN
193 MCSWEENEYS B 2599 PEPPERONI STICKS MCSWEN
193 MCSWEENEYS C 2600 STRIPS MCSWEN
193 MCSWEENEYS D 2601 NUGGETS MCSWEN
193 MCSWEENEYS E 2602 BARS & BIG SEEDS MCSWEN
197 BOB DALE GLOVES A 2925 APPAREL BOBDAL
197 BOB DALE GLOVES B 2926 LIGHT DUTY BOBDAL
197 BOB DALE GLOVES C 2927 DRIVERS BOBDAL
197 BOB DALE GLOVES D 2928 FITTERS BOBDAL
197 BOB DALE GLOVES E 2929 SEAMLESS POLYMER BOBDAL
197 BOB DALE GLOVES F 2930 WELDING BOBDAL
199 INCOM MANUFACTURING GROUP A 2577 GRIT TAPES INCOM
199 INCOM MANUFACTURING GROUP B 2578 REFLECTIVE TAPES INCOM
199 INCOM MANUFACTURING GROUP C 2579 SPECIALTY TAPES INCOM
199 INCOM MANUFACTURING GROUP D 2580 DRIVEWAY MARKERS INCOM
199 INCOM MANUFACTURING GROUP E 2581 MARINE INCOM
199 INCOM MANUFACTURING GROUP F 2582 RV LESUIRE INCOM
199 INCOM MANUFACTURING GROUP G 3077 SAFETY INCOM
201 MAHLE A 3130 AIR FILTER MAHLE
201 MAHLE B 3131 CABIN AIR FILTER MAHLE
201 MAHLE C 3132 FUEL FILTER MAHLE
201 MAHLE D 3133 OIL FILTER MAHLE
201 MAHLE E 3134 OTHER FILTER MAHLE
201 MAHLE F 3135 ENGINE  MAHLE
201 MAHLE G 3137 GASKETS MAHLE
201 MAHLE H 3138 THERMOSTAT MAHLE
202 BAFFIN A 2575 HEX FLEX & CONTRACTOR BAFFIN
202 BAFFIN B 2583 APPAREL BAFFIN
202 BAFFIN C 2584 INDUSTRIAL BAFFIN
202 BAFFIN E 2586 OTHER BAFFIN
202 BAFFIN F 2587 OUTDOOR BAFFIN
210 RUSTOLEUM A 2603 PAINT/PRIMER RUSTOL
210 RUSTOLEUM B 2604 SPRAY PAINT RUSTOL
210 RUSTOLEUM C 2605 COATING RUSTOL
210 RUSTOLEUM D 2613 FINISH RUSTOL
210 RUSTOLEUM E 2565 STAIN AND TINT RUSTOL
210 RUSTOLEUM F 2933 STRIPPER/REMOVER RUSTOL
210 RUSTOLEUM G 2934 THINNER RUSTOL
210 RUSTOLEUM H 2935 SEALANT/FILLER RUSTOL
210 RUSTOLEUM I 2936 ACTIVATOR RUSTOL
210 RUSTOLEUM J 2937 ACCELERATOR RUSTOL
210 RUSTOLEUM K 2938 ANTI-SLIP PRODUCTS RUSTOL
210 RUSTOLEUM L 2939 CLEANER AND DEGREASER RUSTOL
210 RUSTOLEUM M 2964 MOLD CONTROL RUSTOL
210 RUSTOLEUM N 2965 LUBRICATION RUSTOL
210 RUSTOLEUM O 2967 PATCHING RUSTOL
210 RUSTOLEUM P 2968 WOOD CARE PRODUCTS RUSTOL
210 RUSTOLEUM Q 2969 KITS/PROJECTS RUSTOL
210 RUSTOLEUM R 2970 ACCESSORIES RUSTOL
210 RUSTOLEUM S 2971 ABRASIVES RUSTOL
216 MOOG A 2617 BALL JOINT MOOG
216 MOOG B 2618 BUSHING OR LINK KIT MOOG
216 MOOG C 2619 COIL SPRINGS MOOG
216 MOOG D 2620 PREMIUM CONTROL ARM MOOG
216 MOOG E 2621 IDLER OR PITMAN ARM MOOG
216 MOOG F 2622 KNUCKLE ASSEMBLY MOOG
216 MOOG G 2623 TIE ROD MOOG
216 MOOG H 2624 UNCLASSIFIED MOOG
216 MOOG I 2616 R SERIES CONTROL ARM MOOG
217 FIRESTONE A 0291 COIL-RITE FSTONE
217 FIRESTONE B 0292 LEVEL-RITE FSTONE
217 FIRESTONE C 0293 RIDE-RITE FSTONE
217 FIRESTONE D 0294 SPORT-RITE FSTONE
217 FIRESTONE E 0295 WORK-RITE FSTONE
217 FIRESTONE F 0296 PARTS FSTONE
217 FIRESTONE G 0297 AIR-RITE FSTONE
217 FIRESTONE H 0298 AIR-COMMAND FSTONE
218 GORILLA GLUE A 2680 GORILLA GLUE GORILL
218 GORILLA GLUE B 2681 GORILLA TAPE GORILL
218 GORILLA GLUE C 2682 O'KEEFFE'S GORILL
218 GORILLA GLUE D 2683 SEALANT GORILL
220 INTEREX INDUSTRIES LTD A 2800 ICE CLEATS INTERX
220 INTEREX INDUSTRIES LTD B 2801 CARE PLUS INTERX
220 INTEREX INDUSTRIES LTD C 2802 DRYGUY INTERX
220 INTEREX INDUSTRIES LTD D 2803 GRANGERS INTERX
220 INTEREX INDUSTRIES LTD E 2804 OUTDOOR ELEMENT INTERX
220 INTEREX INDUSTRIES LTD F 2805 STABIL INTERX
220 INTEREX INDUSTRIES LTD G 2806 YAKTRAX INTERX
220 INTEREX INDUSTRIES LTD H 2807 VESTA INTERX
220 INTEREX INDUSTRIES LTD I 2808 ALL GOOD INTERX
224 PENTOSIN A 0224 HYDRAULIC FLUID  PENTOS
224 PENTOSIN B 0225 ANTIFREEZE PENTOS
224 PENTOSIN C 0226 BRAKE FLUID  PENTOS
224 PENTOSIN D 0227 TRANSMISSION FLUID  PENTOS
224 PENTOSIN E 0228 MOTOR OIL  PENTOS
226 BALDWIN A 2628 AIR FILTERS BALD
226 BALDWIN B 2629 HYDRAULIC FILTERS BALD
226 BALDWIN C 2630 FUEL FILTERS BALD
226 BALDWIN D 2631 LUBE FILTERS BALD
226 BALDWIN E 2632 TRANSMISSION FILTERS BALD
226 BALDWIN F 2633 UNCLASSIFIED BALD
226 BALDWIN G 2634 DAHL BALD
226 BALDWIN H 2635 STANADYNE BALD
226 BALDWIN I 2810 AUTO ENGINE AIR FILTERS BALD
226 BALDWIN J 2811 AUTO TRANS FILTERS BALD
226 BALDWIN K 2812 AUTO FUEL FILTERS BALD
226 BALDWIN L 2813 AUTO LUBE FILTERS BALD
226 BALDWIN M 2814 VIP BALD
226 BALDWIN N 2815 AUTO CABIN AIR FILTER BALD
233 MASTERLOCK A 0346 AUTOMOTIVE AND PADLOCK MSTLCK
233 MASTERLOCK B 0347 DOOR HARDWARE MSTLCK
235 KROWN A 1360 CLEANING PRODUCTS KROWN
235 KROWN B 1361 AEROSOL PRODUCTS KROWN
235 KROWN C 1362 ACCESSORIES KROWN
236 TIMKEN A 0358 MILE MATE SETS TIM
236 TIMKEN B 0359 MILE MATE COMPONENTS TIM
236 TIMKEN C 0360 DT COMPONENTS (NON-STOCK) TIM
236 TIMKEN D 0361 OTHER TIMKEN HD TIM
237 FLEXFAB A 1375 COOLANT HOSE FLXFAB
237 FLEXFAB B 1376 HEATER HOSE FLXFAB
237 FLEXFAB C 1377 OTHER HOSE & TUBING FLXFAB
237 FLEXFAB D 1378 CONNECTORS & ELBOWS FLXFAB
237 FLEXFAB E 1379 REDUCERS FLXFAB
237 FLEXFAB F 1380 CLAMPS FLXFAB
237 FLEXFAB G 1381 SLEEVES FLXFAB
239 FLEX SEAL A 2850 SPRAYS FLEXSE
239 FLEX SEAL B 2851 LIQUID FLEXSE
239 FLEX SEAL C 2852 PASTE FLEXSE
239 FLEX SEAL D 2853 GLUE FLEXSE
239 FLEX SEAL E 2854 TAPE FLEXSE
239 FLEX SEAL F 2855 REPAIR KIT FLEXSE
239 FLEX SEAL G 2856 FLOOD PROTECTION FLEXSE
239 FLEX SEAL H 2857 DISPLAY TOWERS FLEXSE
240 NRS BRAKES A 0239 FMSI Z NUMBERS NRSBRK
240 NRS BRAKES B 0240 GALVANIZED BRAKE PADS NRSBRK
242 AIR QUALITEE A 1194 CABIN FILTER AIRQUA
242 AIR QUALITEE B 1195 CARBON CABN FILTER AIRQUA
245 MARATHON SYSTEMS INC. A 0156 BRAKE SHOES MARATH
249 DUSTBANE A 2019 ALL PURPOSE CLEANERS DUSTBA
249 DUSTBANE B 2020 DEGREASERS DUSTBA
249 DUSTBANE C 2021 FLOOR CARE DUSTBA
249 DUSTBANE D 2022 HAND CLEANERS DUSTBA
249 DUSTBANE E 2023 GEN PURP DISINFECTANTS DUSTBA
249 DUSTBANE F 2024 ODOR CONTOL/NEUTRALIZERS DUSTBA
249 DUSTBANE G 2025 SPECIALY CLEANERS AND MAINTAINERS DUSTBA
249 DUSTBANE H 2026 WASHROOM CARE DUSTBA
249 DUSTBANE I 2027 DISPENSING SYSTEMS DUSTBA
249 DUSTBANE J 2028 EQUIPMENT DUSTBA
249 DUSTBANE K 2049 PARTS AND ACCESSORIES DUSTBA
249 DUSTBANE L 2018 LARGE EQUIPMENT DUSTBA
256 PRESTONE A 0250 ANTIFREEZE PRESTN
256 PRESTONE B 0251 PERFORMANCE CHEMICAL PRESTN
260 WALKER A 2709 CONVERTERS WALKER
268 LEISURE PRODUCTS CANADA A 0568 ALL PRODUCTS LEISUR
271 PRIMELINE A 1997 FLASHLIGHTS PRMLIN
271 PRIMELINE B 1990 WORKLIGHTS PRMLIN
271 PRIMELINE C 1989 BATTERY PRMLIN
271 PRIMELINE D 1988 TOOLS PRMLIN
277 CATCHMASTER A 0275 INSECT CTCHMS
277 CATCHMASTER B 0276 MECHANICAL CTCHMS
277 CATCHMASTER C 0277 GLUE CTCHMS
278 WEGMANN A 1880 BALANCING COMPOUND WEGMAN
279 IRONTITE A 0382 ADDITIVES IRONTI
280 OLFA A 0392 KNIVES OLFA
280 OLFA B 0393 BLADES OLFA
280 OLFA C 0394 ACCESSORIES OLFA
282 AMEREX A 2820 DRY CHEMICALS AMEREX
282 AMEREX B 2821 WET CHEMICALS AMEREX
282 AMEREX C 2822 OTHER AMEREX
282 AMEREX D 2823 ACCESSORIES AMEREX
284 PRESTOLITE ELECTRIC INC A 2943 STARTER PRESTO
284 PRESTOLITE ELECTRIC INC B 2944 ALTERNATOR PRESTO
284 PRESTOLITE ELECTRIC INC C 2945 PARTS PRESTO
286 CAR-FRESHNER A 0403 ALL OTHER PRODUCTS CARFSH
286 CAR-FRESHNER B 0404 TRADITIONAL LITTLE TREES CARFSH
288 SPECTRA PREMIUM A 0415 HEATER CORE COULT
288 SPECTRA PREMIUM B 0416 RADIATOR COULT
288 SPECTRA PREMIUM C 0417 INDUSTRIAL RADIATOR COULT
288 SPECTRA PREMIUM D 0418 CONDENSER COULT
288 SPECTRA PREMIUM E 0419 OIL PANS COULT
288 SPECTRA PREMIUM F 0420 FILLER NECKS COULT
288 SPECTRA PREMIUM G 0421 ACCUMULATOR COULT
288 SPECTRA PREMIUM H 0422 CHARGE AIR COOLER COULT
288 SPECTRA PREMIUM I 0423 COMPRESSOR COULT
288 SPECTRA PREMIUM J 0424 EVAPORATOR COULT
288 SPECTRA PREMIUM K 0425 FUEL TANK ASSEMBLY COULT
288 SPECTRA PREMIUM L 0426 GAS TANK COULT
288 SPECTRA PREMIUM M 0427 INDUSTRIAL CONDENSOR COULT
288 SPECTRA PREMIUM N 0428 SENDING UNIT COULT
288 SPECTRA PREMIUM O 0429 LOCK RING KIT COULT
288 SPECTRA PREMIUM P 0430 STRAPS COULT
288 SPECTRA PREMIUM Q 0431 CLASSIC INJECTION FUEL TANK COULT
288 SPECTRA PREMIUM R 0432 FUEL PUMP ACCESSORIES COULT
288 SPECTRA PREMIUM S 0433 FUEL MODULES COULT
288 SPECTRA PREMIUM T 0434 MECHANICAL FUEL PUMPS COULT
288 SPECTRA PREMIUM U 0435 FUEL PUMPS COULT
288 SPECTRA PREMIUM V 0436 MASS AIR FLOW SENSORS COULT
288 SPECTRA PREMIUM W 0437 DEF FITTINGS COULT
288 SPECTRA PREMIUM 1 0410 HD CHARGE AIR COOLER COULT
288 SPECTRA PREMIUM 2 0411 HD HEATER CORE COULT
288 SPECTRA PREMIUM 3 0412 HD OIL PANS COULT
288 SPECTRA PREMIUM 4 0413 HD SENDING UNITS COULT
288 SPECTRA PREMIUM 5 0414 HD STRAPS COULT
290 CHAMPION  A 0442 SMALL ENGINE CHAMP
290 CHAMPION  B 0443 AUTOMOTIVE CHAMP
290 CHAMPION  C 0444 GLOW PLUGS CHAMP
290 CHAMPION  D 0445 RACING CHAMP
290 CHAMPION  E 0564 INDUSTRIAL & AGRICULTURE CHAMP
290 CHAMPION  F 0565 TRUCK PLUGS CHAMP
290 CHAMPION  G 0566 SERVICE SHOP PACKS CHAMP
290 CHAMPION  H 0567 PARTS/ASSRT/DISPLAY CHAMP
291 ALTE-REGO A 1519 PLASTIC COVERS ALTERE
296 INNOVA A 0944 ELECTRICAL TESTERS INNOVA
296 INNOVA B 0945 MECHANICAL TESTERS INNOVA
296 INNOVA C 0946 OBD1 TOOLS INNOVA
296 INNOVA D 0947 OBD2 TOOLS INNOVA
296 INNOVA E 0948 INSPECTION CAMERA INNOVA
296 INNOVA F 0949 TIMING LIGHTS INNOVA
299 SEA FOAM A 0466 SEA FOAM SEAFOA
299 SEA FOAM B 0467 BUGS B GONE SEAFOA
300 GUNITE A 1357 SLACK ADJUSTERS GUNITE
300 GUNITE B 1358 ACCESSORIES GUNITE
303 CLIPLIGHT A 0477 LIGHTS CLIP
303 CLIPLIGHT B 0478 A/C CLIP
303 CLIPLIGHT C 0479 PARTS/TOOLS CLIP
305 CRC A 0488 BRAKLEEN CRC
305 CRC B 0489 AUTOMOTIVE/MARINE CRC
305 CRC C 0490 INDUSTRIAL CRC
307 KOYO CANADA INC. A 2940 BALL BEARING KOYOCA
307 KOYO CANADA INC. B 2941 TAPER ROLLER BEARINGS KOYOCA
308 RISLONE (BAR'S PRODUCTS) A 0500 LEAK STOP RISLON
308 RISLONE B 0501 ADDITIVE RISLON
308 RISLONE C 0502 MULTI USE RISLON
308 RISLONE D 0503 CLEANER RISLON
309 CONTITECH AIR SPRINGS A 2095 AIR SPRINGS CONTI
309 CONTITECH AIR SPRINGS B 2096 PRIME-RIDE CONTI
310 FEDPRO A 0310 WIPES FEDPRO
310 FEDPRO B 0309 SEALANTS FEDPRO
311 VOLTSAFE A 3046 MAG BLOCK HTR CORD VOLTSA
320 AUTOLITE G 0511 AUTOLITE GLOW PLUGS AUT
320 AUTOLITE P 0512 AUTOLITE PLAT. SPARK PLUGS AUT
320 AUTOLITE R 0513 AUTOLITE RACING SPARK PLUGS AUT
320 AUTOLITE S 0514 AUTOLITE SPARK PLUGS AUT
327 FBS DISTRIBUTION A 1300 SPRAYERS FBSINV
327 FBS DISTRIBUTION B 1301 TAPES FBSINV
327 FBS DISTRIBUTION C 1302 PPE FBSINV
327 FBS DISTRIBUTION D 1303 ACCESSORIES FBSINV
325 PRO FORM PRODUCTS A 3107 SURFACE PREPARATION PROFOR
325 PRO FORM PRODUCTS B 3091 ACCESSORIES PROFOR
325 PRO FORM PRODUCTS C 3092 COATINGS PROFOR
325 PRO FORM PRODUCTS D 3093 PAINT RELATED PRODUCTS PROFOR
325 PRO FORM PRODUCTS E 3094 REPAIR PRODUCTS PROFOR
325 PRO FORM PRODUCTS F 3099 SOLVENTS PROFOR
332 FORNEY INDUSTRIES A 3095
FORNEY
332 FORNEY INDUSTRIES B 3096 SHOP TOOLS FORNEY
332 FORNEY INDUSTRIES C 3097 ABRASIVES FORNEY
332 FORNEY INDUSTRIES D 3098 SAFETY FORNEY
333 SCHRADER TPMS SOLUTIONS A 3048 PROGRAMMABLE SENSOR SCHRA
333 SCHRADER TPMS SOLUTIONS B 3049 SENSOR SCHRA
333 SCHRADER TPMS SOLUTIONS C 3050 SERVICE KIT-PART SCHRA
333 SCHRADER TPMS SOLUTIONS D 3051 TOOL SCHRA
335 PHILIPS LUMILEDS A 2975 LED PHILIPS OR AS335
335 PHILIPS LUMILEDS B 2976 MINI PHILIPS OR AS335
335 PHILIPS LUMILEDS C 2977 FOG PHILIPS OR AS335
335 PHILIPS LUMILEDS D 2978 HEADLAMP PHILIPS OR AS335
335 PHILIPS LUMILEDS E 2979 SEALED BEAM PHILIPS OR AS335
335 PHILIPS LUMILEDS F 2980 HID PHILIPS OR AS335
335 PHILIPS LUMILEDS G 2981 OTHER PHILIPS OR AS335
335 PHILIPS LUMILEDS H 2982 COMMERCIAL PACK PHILIPS OR AS335
340 DINEX EMISSION, INC A 3400 EXHAUST CLAMP DINEX
340 DINEX EMISSION, INC B 3401 PARTS & ACCESSORIES DINEX
340 DINEX EMISSION, INC C 3402 DEF INJECTOR/DOSER DINEX
340 DINEX EMISSION, INC D 3403 DOC FILTERS DINEX
340 DINEX EMISSION, INC E 3404 DPF DINEX
340 DINEX EMISSION, INC F 3405 FLEX PIPE DINEX
340 DINEX EMISSION, INC G 3406 EXHAUST GASKET DINEX
340 DINEX EMISSION, INC H 3407 NOX SENSOR DINEX
340 DINEX EMISSION, INC I 3408 ONEBOX KIT DINEX
340 DINEX EMISSION, INC J 3409 EXHAUST PIPE DINEX
340 DINEX EMISSION, INC K 3410 EXHAUST BELLOW DINEX
340 DINEX EMISSION, INC L 3411 PRESSURE SENSOR DINEX
340 DINEX EMISSION, INC M 3412 SCR DINEX
340 DINEX EMISSION, INC N 3413 TEMP SENSOR DINEX
340 DINEX EMISSION, INC O 3414 EXHAUST FITTING DINEX
342 AUTOCHEM A 0342 POR 15 AUTOCH
342 AUTOCHEM B 0343 PAINT CARE AUTOCH
342 AUTOCHEM C 0341 INTERIOR AUTOCH
342 AUTOCHEM D 0340 WHEEL AND TIRE AUTOCH
342 AUTOCHEM E 0339 SPECIALTY AUTOCH
343 AVM INDUSTRIES (STRONGARM) A 2078 APPLICATION SPECIFIC LIFT SUPPORTS SARM
343 AVM INDUSTRIES (STRONGARM) B 2092 UNIVERSAL SARM
344 TUFF ROPE A 0570 TWINE TUFFRP
344 TUFF ROPE B 0571 BRAIDED ROPE TUFFRP
344 TUFF ROPE C 0572 TWISTED ROPE TUFFRP
344 TUFF ROPE D 0573 PARACORD TUFFRP
344 TUFF ROPE E 0574 UTILITY ASSORT TUFFRP
345 LUCAS OIL A 0546 ENGINE OIL ADDITIVES LUCAS
345 LUCAS OIL B 0547 FUEL TREATMENTS LUCAS
345 LUCAS OIL C 0548 PROBLEM SOLVERS & UTILITY LUBRICANTS LUCAS
345 LUCAS OIL D 0549 GREASE LUCAS
345 LUCAS OIL E 0550 GEAR OIL LUCAS
345 LUCAS OIL F 0551 TRANSMISSION OILS LUCAS
345 LUCAS OIL G 0552 MOTOR OIL LUCAS
345 LUCAS OIL H 0553 REMAINDER LUCAS
345 LUCAS OIL I 0541 CAR CARE LUCAS
345 LUCAS OIL J 0542 MARINE LUCAS
345 LUCAS OIL K 0543 MOTORCYCLE LUCAS
345 LUCAS OIL L 0544 RACING LUCAS
345 LUCAS OIL M 0545 HYDRAULIC LUCAS
348 EVERCO HD SMP A 3116 COMPRESSOR EVERCO
348 EVERCO HD SMP B 3117 OEM COMPRESSOR EVERCO
348 EVERCO HD SMP C 3118 BLOWER MOTOR EVERCO
348 EVERCO HD SMP D 3119 FILTER DRYER EVERCO
348 EVERCO HD SMP E 3120 EVAPORATOR CORE EVERCO
348 EVERCO HD SMP F 3121 UNCLASSIFIED EVERCO
354 EiKO A 0557 INCANDESCENT EIKO
354 EiKO B 0558 FLUORESCENT EIKO
354 EiKO C 0559 HALOGEN EIKO
354 EiKO D 0560 HALIDE EIKO
354 EiKO E 0561 LED EIKO
354 EiKO F 0562 OTHER EIKO
354 EiKO G 0563 AUTOMOTIVE EIKO
356 CENTRIC PARTS A 2890 PADS CENTRIC
356 CENTRIC PARTS B 2891 DISCS CENTRIC
356 CENTRIC PARTS C 2892 SHOES CENTRIC
356 CENTRIC PARTS D 2893 DRUMS CENTRIC
356 CENTRIC PARTS E 2894 CALIPERS CENTRIC
356 CENTRIC PARTS F 2895 HYDRAULICS CENTRIC
356 CENTRIC PARTS G 2896 HARDWARE CENTRIC
356 CENTRIC PARTS H 2897 HUBS/BEARINGS/SEALS CENTRIC
360 SKF (CR) A 0579 SEALS CRI
360 SKF (CR) B 0580 HUB BEARINGS CRI
360 SKF (CR) C 0581 MISC BEARINGS CRI
360 SKF (CR) D 0582 HD SCOTSEALS CRI
360 SKF (CR) E 0583 HD ROLLER BEARINGS CRI
360 SKF (CR) F 0584 HD ALL MAKES/DRYERS CRI
360 SKF (CR) G 0577 MISCELLANEOUS CRI
363 PWR STEER A 0007 RACK PWRSTR
363 PWR STEER B 0008 PUMP PWRSTR
363 PWR STEER C 0009 GEAR PWRSTR
364 SHOP-VAC A 2735 INDUSTRIAL SHPVAC
364 SHOP-VAC B 2736 CONSUMER SHPVAC
364 SHOP-VAC C 2737 ACCESSORIES SHPVAC
365 WALTER A 1661 CUTTING WALTER
365 WALTER B 1662 GRINDING WALTER
365 WALTER C 1663 BLENDING WALTER
365 WALTER D 1664 SANDING WALTER
365 WALTER E 1665 FINISHING WALTER
365 WALTER F 1666 BRUSHING WALTER
365 WALTER G 1667 TOOLING WALTER
365 WALTER H 1668 POWER TOOLS WALTER
365 WALTER I 1669 PRE/POST WELDING WALTER
365 WALTER J 1670 MRO CHEM/BIOCIRCLE WALTER
365 WALTER K 1671 ACCESSORIES WALTER
365 WALTER L 1672 ALL STEEL WALTER
365 WALTER M 1673 ARCONE WALTER
365 WALTER N 1674 TRIUMPH WALTER
365 WALTER O 1675 DRILLCO WALTER
366 MILWAUKEE A 2900 ACCESSORIES ABRASIVES MILWAK
366 MILWAUKEE B 2901 ACCESSORIES DRILLING & DRIVING MILWAK
366 MILWAUKEE C 2902 ACCESSORIES LINEAR EDGE MILWAK
366 MILWAUKEE D 2903 ACCESSORIES MAS-CON MILWAK
366 MILWAUKEE E 2904 ACCESSORIES OSCILLATING MILWAK
366 MILWAUKEE F 2905 HAND TOOLS MILWAK
366 MILWAUKEE G 2906 LAYOUT MILWAK
366 MILWAUKEE H 2907 PERSONAL PROTECTIVE EQUIPMENT MILWAK
366 MILWAUKEE I 2908 STORAGE MILWAK
366 MILWAUKEE J 3030 TOOLS CORDED MILWAK
366 MILWAUKEE K 3031 TOOLS M12 MILWAK
366 MILWAUKEE L 3032 TOOLS M18 MILWAK
366 MILWAUKEE M 3033 TOOLS MXF MILWAK
366 MILWAUKEE N 3034 TOOLS OTHER CORDLESS MILWAK
366 MILWAUKEE O 3035 TOOLS PARTS MILWAK
366 MILWAUKEE P 3036 VACUUM MILWAK
366 MILWAUKEE Q 3037 CLOTHING AND APPAREL MILWAK
371 LISLE CORPORATION A 0950 SPECIALTY TOOLS LISLE
371 LISLE CORPORATION B 0951 LUBE/ TIRE PRODUCTS LISLE
373 BRABER EQUIPMENT LTD A 0373 OTHER BRABER
373 BRABER EQUIPMENT LTD B 0374 HYDRAULIC BRABER
373 BRABER EQUIPMENT LTD C 0375 PTO BRABER
373 BRABER EQUIPMENT LTD D 0376 FARM EQUIPMENT BRABER
373 BRABER EQUIPMENT LTD E 0377 PUMPS BRABER
373 BRABER EQUIPMENT LTD F 0378 VALVES BRABER
373 BRABER EQUIPMENT LTD G 0379 POWER PRODUCTS BRABER
373 BRABER EQUIPMENT LTD H 0380 TOOLS BRABER
373 BRABER EQUIPMENT LTD I 0381 GAUGES BRABER
373 BRABER EQUIPMENT LTD K 0383 REPLACEMENT PARTS BRABER
373 BRABER EQUIPMENT LTD L 0384 ROAD SAFETY BRABER
373 BRABER EQUIPMENT LTD M 0385 SPROCKETS BRABER
374 BE PRESSURE A 2640 POWER WASHERS BEPRES
374 BE PRESSURE B 2641 GENERATORS BEPRES
374 BE PRESSURE C 2642 LIQUID TRANSFER PUMPS BEPRES
374 BE PRESSURE D 2643 AIR COMPRESSORS BEPRES
374 BE PRESSURE E 2644 PARTS AND ACCESSORIES BEPRES
374 BE PRESSURE F 2645 FANS BEPRES
374 BE PRESSURE G 2638 AG SPRAYERS BEPRES
374 BE PRESSURE H 2639 INDUSTRIAL AIR TOOLS BEPRES
375 WORTHINGTON A 2283 FUEL WORTHI
375 WORTHINGTON B 2284 KITS WORTHI
375 WORTHINGTON C 2285 TORCHES WORTHI
375 WORTHINGTON D 2286 BUTANE WORTHI
375 WORTHINGTON E 2287 UNCLASSIFIED WORTHI
378 DYNALINE A 0610 MERCHANDISERS (M) DYNA
378 DYNALINE B 0611 ASSORTMENTS (A) DYNA
378 DYNALINE C 0612 LUBRICATION © DYNA
378 DYNALINE D 0613 TRAILER & TOWING (T) DYNA
378 DYNALINE E 0614 CARGO CONTROL (C) DYNA
378 DYNALINE F 0615 FASTENERS (F) DYNA
378 DYNALINE G 0616 GENERAL HARDWARE (GH) DYNA
378 DYNALINE H 0617 CHAIN & WIRE ROPE (CW) DYNA
378 DYNALINE I 0618 FARM HARDWARE (FH) DYNA
378 DYNALINE J 0619 MATERIAL HANDLING (MH) DYNA
378 DYNALINE K 0620 HAND TOOLS DYNA
378 DYNALINE L 0621 COMMODITY ITEM - NET DYNA
378 DYNALINE M 0622 RED TOOL CACHE DYNA
378 DYNALINE N 0623 BLUE TOOL CACHE DYNA
378 DYNALINE O 0624 BLACK TOOL CACHE DYNA
387 CHICAGO PHEUMATIC A 1980 INDUSTRIAL TOOLS CHICAG
387 CHICAGO PHEUMATIC B 1981 VEHICLE SERVICE & MRO CHICAG
387 CHICAGO PHEUMATIC C 1982 CORDLESS TOOLS CHICAG
387 CHICAGO PHEUMATIC D 1983 WORK SHOP EQUIPMENT CHICAG
387 CHICAGO PHEUMATIC E 1984 PARTS & ACCESSORIES CHICAG
388 KEN-TOOL A 0678 OTHER KEN
388 KEN-TOOL B 0679 BEAD KEN
388 KEN-TOOL C 0680 TIRE KEN
388 KEN-TOOL D 0681 WRENCH KEN
388 KEN-TOOL E 0682 HAMMER KEN
388 KEN-TOOL F 0683 VISE KEN
389 SUPERZILLA A 1756 SUPERZILLA SUPERZ
389 SUPERZILLA B 1757 GUNZILLA SUPERZ
390 MONEYSWORTH & BEST A 2948 SHOE & BOOT CARE MONEYS
395 VICTOR TECHNOLOGIES A 0689 ARCAIR VICTOR
395 VICTOR TECHNOLOGIES B 0690 STOODY VICTOR
395 VICTOR TECHNOLOGIES C 0691 THERMAL ARC VICTOR
395 VICTOR TECHNOLOGIES D 0692 THERMAL DYNAMICS VICTOR
395 VICTOR TECHNOLOGIES E 0693 TURBO TORCH VICTOR
395 VICTOR TECHNOLOGIES F 0694 TWECO VICTOR
395 VICTOR TECHNOLOGIES G 0695 VICTOR VICTOR
395 VICTOR TECHNOLOGIES H 0696 UNCLASSIFIED VICTOR
395 VICTOR TECHNOLOGIES I 0697 EQUIPMENT VICTOR
395 VICTOR TECHNOLOGIES J 0698 FIREPOWER VICTOR
399 NORTH SAFETY A 0706 HEAD PROTECTION NORTH
399 NORTH SAFETY B 0707 EYE & FACE PROTECTION NORTH
399 NORTH SAFETY C 0708 HEARING PROTECTION NORTH
399 NORTH SAFETY D 0709 RESPIRATORY PROTECTION NORTH
399 NORTH SAFETY E 0710 WELDING PROTECTION NORTH
399 NORTH SAFETY F 0711 FALL PROTECTION-FULL LINE NORTH
399 NORTH SAFETY G 0712 FALL PROTECTION-DURABILT NORTH
399 NORTH SAFETY H 0713 FALL PROTECTION-ENGINEERED SYS NORTH
399 NORTH SAFETY I 0714 FIRST AID PRODUCTS NORTH
399 NORTH SAFETY J 0715 HAND PROTECTION NORTH
399 NORTH SAFETY K 0716 PROTECTIVE CLOTHING NORTH
399 NORTH SAFETY L 0717 PROTECTIVE FOOTWEAR NORTH
399 NORTH SAFETY M 0718 TRAFFIC SAFETY PRODUCTS NORTH
399 NORTH SAFETY N 0719 IN-STOCK EXPRESS NORTH
399 NORTH SAFETY O 0720 SIGNS NORTH
399 NORTH SAFETY P 0721 LOCKOUT & TAGOUT NORTH
399 NORTH SAFETY Q 0722 CONSUMER PRODUCTS NORTH
399 NORTH SAFETY R 0723 MERCHANDISERS NORTH
399 NORTH SAFETY S 0724 SPECIAL ORDER ITEM NORTH
401 MOTORAD A 0800 THERMOSTATS MOTRAD
401 MOTORAD B 0801 CAPS MOTRAD
401 MOTORAD C 0802 OTHER MOTRAD
401 MOTORAD D 0803 GASKETS AND SEALS MOTRAD
401 MOTORAD E 0804 INTGRTD THRM ASSEMBLY MOTRAD
401 MOTORAD F 0805 HD THERMOSTATS MOTRAD
401 MOTORAD G 0806 HD INTGRTD THRM ASSY MOTRAD
403 STERLING INTERNATIONAL - RESCUE A 1213 FLY/FRUIT FLY RESCUE
403 STERLING INTERNATIONAL - RESCUE B 1214 YELLOWJACKET RESCUE
403 STERLING INTERNATIONAL - RESCUE C 1215 OTHER RESCUE
404 PARKER HANNIFIN CANADA - RACOR A 2950 FUEL FILTER/SEPARATOR RACOR
404 PARKER HANNIFIN CANADA - RACOR B 2951 REPLACEMENT ELEMENT RACOR
404 PARKER HANNIFIN CANADA - RACOR C 2952 SPIN-ON ELEMENT RACOR
404 PARKER HANNIFIN CANADA - RACOR D 2953 PAR-FIT ELEMENT RACOR
406 GEOTEC - U-QUALITY A 3115 BRAKE CALIPERS UQUALI
406 GEOTEC - U-QUALITY B 3114 DRUMS / ROTORS UQUALI
415 DORMAN A 0757 EXHAUST/INTAKE MANFLD RBINC
415 DORMAN B 0758 RAD FAN SSM/PS PULLEY RBINC
415 DORMAN C 0759 FLUID LINES RBINC
415 DORMAN D 0760 DORMAN - HELP RBINC
415 DORMAN E 0761 DORMAN - OE SOLUTIONS RBINC
415 DORMAN F 0762 DORMAN - AUTOGRADE RBINC
415 DORMAN G 0763 DORMAN - TECHOICE RBINC
415 DORMAN H 0764 DORMAN - HD SOLUTIONS RBINC
415 DORMAN I 0765 CONDUCT-TITE & MISC RBINC
415 DORMAN J 0766 WINDOW LIFT PRODUCTS RBINC
415 DORMAN K 0767 LIGHT ASSEMBLY RBINC
415 DORMAN L 0768 MIRRORS RBINC
419 PSIUSI USA INC. A 3125 DEF PSIUSI
419 PSIUSI USA INC. B 3126 GREASE PSIUSI
419 PSIUSI USA INC. C 3127 OIL PSIUSI
419 PSIUSI USA INC. D 3128 FUEL PSIUSI
419 PSIUSI USA INC. E 3124 MANAGEMENT SYSTEMS PSIUSI
421 HAMSAR A 0779 ACCESSORIES/AUX LIGHTS HAMSAR
421 HAMSAR B 0780 BULBS HAMSAR
421 HAMSAR C 0781 ELECTRONIC PRODUCTS HAMSAR
421 HAMSAR D 0782 FLASHLIGHTS HAMSAR
421 HAMSAR E 0783 FORWARD LIGHTING HAMSAR
421 HAMSAR F 0784 REAR LIGHTING HAMSAR
421 HAMSAR G 0785 WARNING & SAFETY HAMSAR
421 HAMSAR H 0786 WORK LIGHTS HAMSAR
429 HOPKINS CANADA A 1151 SQUEEGEES/MAINTENANCE HOPKIN
429 HOPKINS CANADA B 1152 SNOW AND ICE HOPKIN
429 HOPKINS CANADA C 1153 AUTO INTERIOR ACC HOPKIN
429 HOPKINS CANADA D 1154 FUNNEL/FUEL ACC HOPKIN
432 EZ RED A 0815 ALL PRODUCTS EZREDT
435 SHERWIN-WILLIAMS A 0825 DUPLI-COLOR - AUTOMOTIVE SHWILL
435 SHERWIN-WILLIAMS B 0826 KRYLON - AUTOMOTIVE SHWILL
435 SHERWIN-WILLIAMS C 0827 VHT - AUTOMOTIVE SHWILL
435 SHERWIN-WILLIAMS D 0828 TRI-FLOW - AUTOMOTIVE SHWILL
435 SHERWIN-WILLIAMS E 0829 KRYLON - INDUSTRIAL SHWILL
435 SHERWIN-WILLIAMS F 0830 DUPLI-COLOR - INDUSTRIAL SHWILL
435 SHERWIN-WILLIAMS H 0832 SPRAYON - INDUSTRIAL SHWILL
435 SHERWIN-WILLIAMS I 0833 WHITE LIGHTNING - INDUSTRIAL SHWILL
435 SHERWIN-WILLIAMS J 0834 RUBBERSET - INDUSTRIAL SHWILL
435 SHERWIN-WILLIAMS K 0835 TRI-FLOW - INDUSTRIAL SHWILL
435 SHERWIN-WILLIAMS L 0836 OTHER PRODUCTS - AUTOMOTIVE SHWILL
435 SHERWIN-WILLIAMS M 0837 OTHER PRODUCTS - INDUSTRIAL SHWILL
435 SHERWIN-WILLIAMS N 0839 PURDY SHWILL
436 FOUR SEASONS A 0848 FAN CLUTCHES 4SEA
436 FOUR SEASONS B 0849 COMPRESSORS 4SEA
436 FOUR SEASONS C 0850 HOSE ASSEMBLIES 4SEA
436 FOUR SEASONS D 0851 ACCUMULATORS&FILTER DRIERS 4SEA
436 FOUR SEASONS E 0852 MOTORS 4SEA
436 FOUR SEASONS F 0853 ENGINE COOLING 4SEA
436 FOUR SEASONS G 0854 SWITCHES & RELAYS 4SEA
436 FOUR SEASONS H 0855 PULLEYS 4SEA
436 FOUR SEASONS I 0856 EVAPORATORS 4SEA
436 FOUR SEASONS J 0857 OTHER 4SEA
437 MEVOTECH A 2606 BOOT KITS MEVO
437 MEVOTECH B 2607 ACCESSORIES MEVO
437 MEVOTECH C 2608 BALL JOINT MEVO
437 MEVOTECH D 2609 BUSHING OR LINK KIT MEVO
437 MEVOTECH E 2610 IDLER OR PITMAN ARM MEVO
437 MEVOTECH F 2611 TIE ROD MEVO
437 MEVOTECH G 2612 UNCLASSIFIED MEVO
437 MEVOTECH H 1390 OG TIE ROD MEVO
437 MEVOTECH I 1391 OG BALL JOINT MEVO
437 MEVOTECH J 1392 OG BUSHING OR LINK KIT MEVO
437 MEVOTECH K 1393 OG IDLER OR PITMAN ARM MEVO
437 MEVOTECH L 1394 OG CONTROL ARMS MEVO
437 MEVOTECH M 1395 OG ALL THE REST MEVO
437 MEVOTECH N 1396 CONTROL ARMS MEVO
437 MEVOTECH O 1875 TTX CONTROL ARMS MEVO
437 MEVOTECH P 1876 TTX BALL JOINT MEVO
437 MEVOTECH Q 1877 TTX BUSHING OR LINK KIT MEVO
437 MEVOTECH R 1878 TTX IDLER OR PITMAN ARM MEVO
437 MEVOTECH S 1879 TTX TIE ROD MEVO
438 SOUTHWIRE A 0858 WOBBLELIGHT SOUTHW
438 SOUTHWIRE B 0585 DEFENDER SOUTHW
438 SOUTHWIRE C 0586 WORK LIGHT SOUTHW
438 SOUTHWIRE D 0587 EMERG/HAZARD SOUTHW
438 SOUTHWIRE E 0588 ACCESSORIES SOUTHW
438 SOUTHWIRE F 0589 REPLACEMENT PARTS SOUTHW
438 SOUTHWIRE G 0590 OUTDOOR EXT CORDS SOUTHW
438 SOUTHWIRE P 0599 SURGE PROTECTOR / OUTLET SOUTHW
442 APEX TOOL A 0868 APEX APEXTL
442 APEX TOOL B 0869 CRESCENT APEXTL
442 APEX TOOL C 0870 DIAMOND APEXTL
442 APEX TOOL D 0871 EREM APEXTL
442 APEX TOOL E 0872 HK PORTER APEXTL
442 APEX TOOL F 0873 KAHNETICS APEXTL
442 APEX TOOL G 0874 LUFKIN APEXTL
442 APEX TOOL H 0875 NICHOLSON FILE APEXTL
442 APEX TOOL I 0876 NICHOLSON SAW APEXTL
442 APEX TOOL J 0877 PLUMB APEXTL
442 APEX TOOL K 0878 WELLER ELECTRIC APEXTL
442 APEX TOOL L 0879 WIRE WRAP APEXTL
442 APEX TOOL M 0880 WISS APEXTL
442 APEX TOOL N 0881 XCELITE APEXTL
442 APEX TOOL O 0882 SPECIALTY TOOLS APEXTL
442 APEX TOOL P 0883 CAMPBELL CHAIN APEXTL
442 APEX TOOL Q 0884 ALLEN APEXTL
442 APEX TOOL R 0885 ARMSTRONG APEXTL
442 APEX TOOL S 0886 GEARWRENCH APEXTL
442 APEX TOOL T 0887 JACOBS APEXTL
442 APEX TOOL U 0888 KD - SELLOUT APEXTL
442 APEX TOOL V 0889 JOBOX APEXTL
447 ERICKSON A 0892 BUNGEY ERICKSN
447 ERICKSON B 0893 STRAPS ERICKSN
447 ERICKSON C 0894 TARPS ERICKSN
447 ERICKSON D 0895 ACCESSORIES/OTHER ERICKSN
447 ERICKSON E 0896 WINCHES ERICKSN
448 WIPECO A 0905 WIPING CLOTHS WIPECO
448 WIPECO B 0906 MICROFIBER WIPECO
448 WIPECO C 0907 TERRY & SHOP TOWELS WIPECO
448 WIPECO D 0908 AUTO SUNDRIES WIPECO
448 WIPECO E 0909 PAINT & STAIN SUNDRIES WIPECO
448 WIPECO F 0910 INACTIVE WIPECO
449 PIP CANADA LTD A 2885 GLOVES PIPCAN
449 PIP CANADA LTD B 2886 FIRST AID PIPCAN
449 PIP CANADA LTD C 2883 ARM PROTECTION PIPCAN
449 PIP CANADA LTD D 2884 PROTECTIVE CLOTHING PIPCAN
449 PIP CANADA LTD E 2887 EYE PROTECTION PIPCAN
449 PIP CANADA LTD F 2888 FACE PROTECTION PIPCAN
449 PIP CANADA LTD G 2889 FALL PROTECTION PIPCAN
450 F.M.S.I AUTOMOTIVE A 0920 AIR CONDITIONING  FMSI
450 F.M.S.I AUTOMOTIVE B 0921 BRAKE HARDWARE FMSI
450 F.M.S.I AUTOMOTIVE C 0922 FUEL LINE REPAIR & HEATER HOSE FMSI
450 F.M.S.I AUTOMOTIVE D 0923 CHEMICALS AND LUBRICANTS FMSI
450 F.M.S.I AUTOMOTIVE E 0924 DOOR REPAIR KITS FMSI
450 F.M.S.I AUTOMOTIVE F 0925 HARDWARE FMSI
450 F.M.S.I AUTOMOTIVE G 0926 ASSORTMENTS AND TOOLS FMSI
450 F.M.S.I AUTOMOTIVE H 0927 ELECTRICAL FMSI
454 ANSELL A 0454 ARM PROTECTION ANSELL
454 ANSELL B 0455 BODY PROTECTION ANSELL
454 ANSELL C 0456 CHEMICAL PROTECTION ANSELL
454 ANSELL D 0457 CHEMICAL RESISTANT ANSELL
454 ANSELL E 0458 COLD PROTECTION ANSELL
454 ANSELL F 0459 CUT RESISTANT ANSELL
454 ANSELL G 0460 ELECTRICAL PROTECTION ANSELL
454 ANSELL H 0461 GENERAL PURPOSE ANSELL
454 ANSELL I 0462 IMPACT PROTECTION ANSELL
454 ANSELL J 0463 SINGLE USE ANSELL
454 ANSELL K 0464 OTHER ANSELL
458 BRADY A 0933 LOCKOUT/TAGOUT SOLUTIONS BRADY
458 BRADY B 0934 SORBENTS & SPILLS CONTAINMENT BRADY
458 BRADY C 0935 IDENTIFICATION SOLUTIONS BRADY
458 BRADY D 0936 OTHER BRADY
460 F. BACON/LUBRIPLATE A 0959 ENGINE GREASE FBACON
473 KINETIC FUEL TECHNOLOGY A 0258 FUEL TREATMENT KINETI
476 GILMOUR A 1005 HOSE GILMOU
476 GILMOUR B 1006 HOSE ENDS GILMOU
476 GILMOUR C 1007 TANKS GILMOU
476 GILMOUR D 1008 TOOLS GILMOU
482 GSP A 2721 CV AXLES GSP
482 GSP B 2722 ATV UTV AXLES GSP
482 GSP C 2723 HUB ASSEMBLY GSP
482 GSP D 2724 LOADED STRUT ASSEMBLIES GSP
482 GSP E 2720 SHOCKS GSP
483 NORTHLAND  A 1019 ALL PRODUCTS NORTHL
483 NORTHLAND  B 1020 TRACERLINE (NON-STOCKING) NORTHL
483 NORTHLAND  C 1021 AMERSEAL NORTHL
483 NORTHLAND  D 1022 HI-GEAR, HYLOMAR, MOP&BRUSH NORTHL
485 FEL-PRO A 1033 DIFF GASKET/SET FELPRO
485 FEL-PRO B 1034 HEAD BOLT SET FELPRO
485 FEL-PRO C 1035 HEAD GASKET SETS FELPRO
485 FEL-PRO D 1036 HEAD GASKETS FELPRO
485 FEL-PRO E 1037 MANIFOLD GASKETS/SET FELPRO
485 FEL-PRO F 1038 MISCELLANEOUS GASKET FELPRO
485 FEL-PRO G 1039 OIL PAN GASKETS/SETS FELPRO
485 FEL-PRO H 1040 OVERHAUL GASKET SETS FELPRO
485 FEL-PRO I 1041 TIMING CVR GSKT SETS FELPRO
485 FEL-PRO J 1042 TRANS. GASKET/SETS FELPRO
485 FEL-PRO K 1043 VALVE CVR GSKTS/SETS FELPRO
485 FEL-PRO L 1044 VALVE STEM SEALS FELPRO
487 WORX ENVIRONMENTAL PRODUCTS INC A 2960 HAND CLEANERS WORX
487 WORX ENVIRONMENTAL PRODUCTS INC B 2961 DISPENSERS WORX
487 WORX ENVIRONMENTAL PRODUCTS INC C 2962 ATTAX CLEANERS WORX
487 WORX ENVIRONMENTAL PRODUCTS INC D 2963 ACCESSORIES WORX
494 ERGODYNE A 0494 HEATER GEAR ERGODY
494 ERGODYNE B 0495 ERGONOMICS ERGODY
494 ERGODYNE C 0496 STORAGE ERGODY
494 ERGODYNE D 0497 HEAD PROTECTION ERGODY
494 ERGODYNE E 0498 COOLING ERGODY
494 ERGODYNE F 0499 TOOL TETHERING ERGODY
500 CONTINENTAL    A 1046 TIMING BELTS & KITS GDYR
500 CONTINENTAL    B 1047 INDUSTRIAL BELTS (PTP) GDYR
500 CONTINENTAL    C 1048 GATORBACK POLY-V BELTS GDYR
500 CONTINENTAL    D 1049 GATORBACK V-BELTS GDYR
500 CONTINENTAL    E 1050 INSTA-PWR BELTS GDYR
500 CONTINENTAL    F 1051 MOLDED RAD HOSES GDYR
500 CONTINENTAL    G 1052 SUPER CUSHION AIR SPRINGS GDYR
500 CONTINENTAL    H 1053 TENSIONERS AND PULLEYS GDYR
500 CONTINENTAL    I 1054 INDUSTRIAL/AGRICULTURAL HOSES GDYR
500 CONTINENTAL    J 1055 MERCHANDISERS - NET JB GDYR
500 CONTINENTAL    K 1056 MISCELLANEOUS HOSES (SP) GDYR
500 CONTINENTAL    L 1057 MISCELLANEOUS BELTS GDYR
500 CONTINENTAL    M 1058 GATORBACK SPORT (ATV) GDYR
500 CONTINENTAL    N 1059 METRIC BELTS GDYR
500 CONTINENTAL    O 1060 OTHER MISC HOSES GDYR
500 CONTINENTAL    R 1064 WATER PUMP KITS GDYR
500 CONTINENTAL    S 1065 AIR SPRING PALLET GDYR
502 LINCOLN LUBE A 1072 REEL/TUBE/HOSE ASSEM LINCOL
502 LINCOLN LUBE B 1073 GUNS/PUMPS/LUBRICATOR LINCOL
502 LINCOLN LUBE C 1074 VALVES/ GAUGES/METERS LINCOL
502 LINCOLN LUBE D 1075 KITS/TESTERS LINCOL
502 LINCOLN LUBE E 1076 FUEL INJ AND FLUID SYS LINCOL
502 LINCOLN LUBE F 1077 FITTINGS/COUPLINGS LINCOL
502 LINCOLN LUBE G 1078 ACCESSORIES LINCOL
502 LINCOLN LUBE H 1079 ADAPTERS LINCOL
502 LINCOLN LUBE I 1080 BATTERY/CHARGERS LINCOL
502 LINCOLN LUBE J 1081 DISPLAYS/MERCH LINCOL
504 GREAT PLAINS A 1084 FUEL PUMPS GR-PL
504 GREAT PLAINS B 1085 FLOW METERS GR-PL
504 GREAT PLAINS C 1086 FUEL PUMP & FLOW METER COMBO GR-PL
504 GREAT PLAINS D 1087 ACCESSORIES & KITS GR-PL
504 GREAT PLAINS E 1088 GALLON MODELS & COMBOS GR-PL
510 CONTINENTAL HYDRAULIC A 1100 HOSE GDYR
510 CONTINENTAL HYDRAULIC B 1101 FITTINGS & ADAPTORS GDYR
510 CONTINENTAL HYDRAULIC C 1102 COOL CLIP (A/C) GDYR
510 CONTINENTAL HYDRAULIC D 1103 ACCESSORIES GDYR
510 CONTINENTAL HYDRAULIC E 1104 QUICK COUPLINGS GDYR
510 CONTINENTAL HYDRAULIC F 1105 EQUIPMENT GDYR
510 CONTINENTAL HYDRAULIC G 1106 ADAPTORS GDYR
522 GROTE A 1127 SIGNAL LIGHTING GROTE
522 GROTE B 1128 INTERIOR LIGHTING GROTE
522 GROTE C 1129 POWER DELIVERY/HARNESS GROTE
522 GROTE D 1130 TSS/RELAY/FLASHERS GROTE
522 GROTE E 1131 ELECTRICAL CONN/ACCESSORY GROTE
522 GROTE F 1132 FORWARD LIGHTING GROTE
522 GROTE G 1133 WARNING/HAZARD GROTE
522 GROTE H 1134 MISC  GROTE
525 GLEASON INDUSTRIAL PRODUCTS A 1137 ALL GLEAS
526 HELLA A 1143 ELECTRONICS (I,K) HELLA
526 HELLA B 1144 LIGHTING (C2,C1,A1,B,H) HELLA
526 HELLA C 1145 WORK LIGHTING (G,E,F) HELLA
526 HELLA D 1146 NON-PROGRAM PRODUCT HELLA
526 HELLA F 1148 EMERGENCY / WARNING HELLA
526 HELLA G 1149 BRIGADE BACKUP SYSTEMS (D2) HELLA
526 HELLA H 1150 FRICTION PAGID
526 HELLA I 1138 ROTORS/DRUMS PAGID
526 HELLA J 1139 CALIPERS PAGID
526 HELLA K 1140 WEAR SENSORS PAGID
526 HELLA L 1141 HARDWARE PAGID
530 EMHART A 1176 HELI-COIL EMHART
530 EMHART B 1177 INDUSTRIAL EMHART
530 EMHART C 1178 POP RIVETS AND TOOLS EMHART
530 EMHART D 1179 BULK POP RIVETS EMHART
530 EMHART E 1180 OTHER ITEMS EMHART
536 HYFLEX A 1202 GREASE WHIPS HYFLEX
543 J-B WELD A 1212 ALL PRODUCTS JBWELD
543 J-B WELD B 1211 FIBER FIX JBWELD
552 IDEAL BRAKE PARTS A 1232 TRUE CERAMIC IDEAL
552 IDEAL BRAKE PARTS B 1233 PREMIUM METALLIC IDEAL
552 IDEAL BRAKE PARTS C 1234 SEVERE DUTY IDEAL
552 IDEAL BRAKE PARTS D 1235 SHOES IDEAL
552 IDEAL BRAKE PARTS E 1236 FIT BRAKE PADS IDEAL
556 REELCRAFT A 3088 ALL REELCR
558 MR HEATER A 1247 ALL PRODUCTS MRHEAT
558 MR HEATER B 1248 PARTS & ACCESSORIES MRHEAT
563 PHILLIPS INDUSTRIES A 1269 ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS PHILL
563 PHILLIPS INDUSTRIES B 1270 AIR SYSTEMS PHILL
563 PHILLIPS INDUSTRIES C 1271 COMBO ASSEMBLIES PHILL
563 PHILLIPS INDUSTRIES D 1272 CABLE AND WIRE PHILL
563 PHILLIPS INDUSTRIES E 1273 UNCLASSIFIED PHILL
568 CEC INDUSTRIES A 1937 MINIATURE/HALOGEN CECIND
568 CEC INDUSTRIES B 1938 SEALED BEAMS CECIND
568 CEC INDUSTRIES C 1939 ROUGH SERVICE BULBS CECIND
568 CEC INDUSTRIES D 1940 FLASHERS CECIND
568 CEC INDUSTRIES E 1941 FLUORESCENT CECIND
568 CEC INDUSTRIES F 2104 DISPLAYS CECIND
568 CEC INDUSTRIES G 1943 SOCKETS CECIND
575 HI-LIFT JACK COMPANY A 3040 JACKS HILIFT
575 HI-LIFT JACK COMPANY B 3041 ACCESSORIES HILIFT
577 BUYERS PRODUCTS A 1308 TOWING & CARGO CONTROL BUYERS
577 BUYERS PRODUCTS B 1309 TOOLBOXES & MOUNTING BRACKETS BUYERS
577 BUYERS PRODUCTS C 1310 TRUCK & TRAILER HARDWARE BUYERS
577 BUYERS PRODUCTS D 1311 RUBBER & POLYMER PRODUCTS BUYERS
577 BUYERS PRODUCTS E 1312 DUMP BODY HARDWARE BUYERS
577 BUYERS PRODUCTS F 1313 HYDRAULICS BUYERS
577 BUYERS PRODUCTS G 1314 PNEUMATICS BUYERS
577 BUYERS PRODUCTS H 1315 CABLES & CONTROL SYSTEMS BUYERS
577 BUYERS PRODUCTS I 1316 DRIVELINE COMPONENTS BUYERS
577 BUYERS PRODUCTS J 1317 ELECTRICAL & LIGHTING BUYERS
577 BUYERS PRODUCTS K 1318 ALL SEASON SPREADERS BUYERS
577 BUYERS PRODUCTS L 1319 MISCELLANEOUS BUYERS
577 BUYERS PRODUCTS M 1320 SNOW CONTROL BUYERS
581 STAR WARNING A 1331 ALL PRODUCTS STARW
581 STAR WARNING B 1332 INDUSTRIAL STARW
585 KIT MASTER A 0960 FAN CLUTCH KITMST
585 KIT MASTER B 0961 FAN, DRIVE AND HUB KITMST
585 KIT MASTER C 0962 OTHER KITMST
586 KUTMASTER A 1343 KNIVES KUTMAS
586 KUTMASTER B 1344 FLASHLIGHTS KUTMAS
586 KUTMASTER C 1345 TOOLS KUTMAS
586 KUTMASTER D 1346 CUTLERY KUTMAS
586 KUTMASTER E 1347 DISPLAYS/MISCELLANEOUS KUTMAS
589 TRACKIMO-WEBOOST A 1936 TRACKERS/ACCESSORIES TRACKI
589 TRACKIMO-WEBOOST B  1935 WEBOOST TRACKI
595 LAVAGRIP A 3106 ALL LAVAGR
600 SHINN FU A 1410 HEIN-WERNER SHINNF
600 SHINN FU B 1411 OMEGA SHINNF
600 SHINN FU C 1412 PORTO-POWER SHINNF
600 SHINN FU D 1413 BONE CREEPER SHINNF
600 SHINN FU E 1414 BLACKHAWK AUTOMOTIVE SHINNF
600 SHINN FU F 1415 PROLIFT SHINNF
602 MEGUIAR'S A 1422 AUTOMOTV MIRROR GLAZE PRODUCTS MEGUIA
602 MEGUIAR'S B 1423 CONSUMER/GOLD CLASS PRODUCTS MEGUIA
602 MEGUIAR'S C 1424 ACCESSORIES MEGUIA
602 MEGUIAR'S D 1425 MARINE MEGUIA
604 SILENCER - ABS FRICTION A 0603 FLEET BRAKE PAD SILENC
604 SILENCER - ABS FRICTION B 0604 OE SPECIFIC BRAKE PAD SILENC
604 SILENCER - ABS FRICTION C 0605 DRUM BRAKE SHOE SILENC
604 SILENCER - ABS FRICTION D 0606 PARKING BRAKE SHOE SILENC
606 COUNTERACT A 0662 WHEEL CENTERING COUNTA
606 COUNTERACT B 0663 BALANCING BEADS COUNTA
606 COUNTERACT C 0664 LUBRICANTS COUNTA
606 COUNTERACT D 0665 TOOLS AND ACCESSORIES COUNTA
610 PERMATEX A 1436 PERMATEX PERMA
610 PERMATEX B 1437 RAIN-X RAINX
610 PERMATEX C 1438 SPRAY NINE PERMA
610 PERMATEX D 1439 SLIME PERMA
610 PERMATEX E 1440 SLICK50/GUMOUT/BLKMGC   (was X) PERMA
611 DANA THERMAL LONG MFG. A 1450 ALL PRODUCTS LONG
613 GLOBE COMMERCIAL PRODUCTS A 2910 CARTS GLOBE
613 GLOBE COMMERCIAL PRODUCTS B 2911 CLEANING GLOBE
613 GLOBE COMMERCIAL PRODUCTS C 2912 FOOD SERVICE GLOBE
613 GLOBE COMMERCIAL PRODUCTS D 2913 SAFETY GLOBE
613 GLOBE COMMERCIAL PRODUCTS E 2914 WASHROOM CARE GLOBE
613 GLOBE COMMERCIAL PRODUCTS F 2915 WASTE CONTAINERS GLOBE
616 NOCO A 2725 BATTERY CHARGER NOCO
616 NOCO B 2726 JUMP STARTER NOCO
616 NOCO C 2727 ON BOARD NOCO
616 NOCO D 2728 LITHIUM BATTERIES NOCO
616 NOCO E 2729 CHARGERLIGHT NOCO
616 NOCO F 2730 BATTERY PACK AND SOLAR NOCO
616 NOCO G 2731 ACCESSORIES NOCO
616 NOCO H 2932 AIR INFLATORS NOCO
620 NATIONAL A 1620 BEARINGS BCA
620 NATIONAL B 1621 SEALS BCA
620 NATIONAL C 1622 OIL BATH SEALS BCA
620 NATIONAL D 1623 OTHER BCA
621 K&N FILTERS A 1460 AIR FILTERS KNFILT
621 K&N FILTERS B 1461 FUEL FILTERS KNFILT
621 K&N FILTERS C 1462 OIL FILTERS KNFILT
621 K&N FILTERS D 1463 INTAKE KITS KNFILT
621 K&N FILTERS E 1464 ACCESSORIES KNFILT
621 K&N FILTERS F 1465 PROMO/DISPLAYS KNFILT
622 GOJO A 1472 DISPENSERS GOJO
622 GOJO B 1473 HAND CLEANERS/WASH GOJO
622 GOJO C 1474 ACCESSORIES GOJO
622 GOJO D 1475 PURELL GOJO
622 GOJO E 1476 PURELL ES GOJO
624 EZ OIL DRAIN A 2669 VALVES EZOILD
624 EZ OIL DRAIN B 2670 ADAPTERS EZOILD
625 MILTON IND A 1495 ALL OTHER PRODUCTS MILTON
625 MILTON IND B 1496 BLO GUNS MILTON
625 MILTON IND C 1497 COUPLERS & PLUGS MILTON
625 MILTON IND D 1498 FRLS MILTON
625 MILTON IND E 1499 GAUGES MILTON
625 MILTON IND F 1500 HOSE & FITTINGS MILTON
625 MILTON IND G 1501 LUBRICATION MILTON
625 MILTON IND H 1502 PNEUMATIC ACCESSORIES MILTON
625 MILTON IND I 1503 TIRE HARDWARE MILTON
625 MILTON IND J 1504 OIL DRAINING / FLUID EVACUATOR MILTON
625 MILTON IND K 1505 FLUID PUMPS MILTON
625 MILTON IND L 1506 REPAIR KITS MILTON
625 MILTON IND M 1507 TOOLS MILTON
633 GARANT A 1525 ACCESSORIES/MISCELLANEOUS GARANT
633 GARANT B 1526 PICKS GARANT
633 GARANT C 1527 SNOW SHOVELS GARANT
633 GARANT D 1528 GRAIN SCOOPS GARANT
633 GARANT E 1529 SHEARS & WEEDERS GARANT
633 GARANT F 1530 CULTIVATORS & HOES GARANT
633 GARANT G 1531 RAKES GARANT
633 GARANT H 1532 WHEELBARROWS GARANT
633 GARANT I 1533 HAMMERS GARANT
633 GARANT J 1534 SNOW BRUSH & SCRAPER'S GARANT
633 GARANT K 1535 HATCHETS, AXE, SPLITTING MAULS GARANT
633 GARANT L 1536 BARS GARANT
633 GARANT M 1537 SHOVELS GARANT
633 GARANT N 1538 FORKS GARANT
633 GARANT O 1539 KIDS GARANT
633 GARANT P 1540 SPREADERS/SCRAPERS GARANT
633 GARANT Q 1541 ROOF RAKES GARANT
633 GARANT R 1524 WATERING TOOLS GARANT
635 NGK A 1545 SPARK PLUGS NGK
635 NGK B 1546 PLATINUM PLUGS NGK
635 NGK C 1547 IRIDIUM PLUGS NGK
635 NGK D 1548 OXYGEN SENSORS NGK
635 NGK E 1549 WIRE SETS NGK
635 NGK F 1550 UNCLASSIFIED NGK
644 NEAPCO A 1607 UNIVERSAL JOINTS NEAPCO
644 NEAPCO B 1608 NEAPCO-AG/PTO NEAPCO
644 NEAPCO C 1609 NEAPCO-CV BOOTS NEAPCO
644 NEAPCO D 1610 HD DRIVE LINE NEAPCO
644 NEAPCO E 1611 CV AXLE ASSEMBLIES NEAPCO
644 NEAPCO F 1612 DRIVESHAFT/COMPONENTS NEAPCO
644 NEAPCO G 1613 INDIVIDUAL REPAIR COMPONENTS NEAPCO
653 SOLEMAT INC A 0653 INSOLES SOLEMA
653 SOLEMAT INC B 0654 MATTING SOLEMA
665 RAYBESTOS A 1682 RLINE CALIPERS RAY
665 RAYBESTOS B 1683 ELEMENT3 PADS RAY
665 RAYBESTOS C 1684 SG PADS RAY
665 RAYBESTOS D 1685 SHOES RAY
665 RAYBESTOS E 1686 SPECIALTY ROTORS RAY
665 RAYBESTOS F 1687 RLINE ROTORS RAY
665 RAYBESTOS G 1688 RLINE DRUMS RAY
665 RAYBESTOS H 1689 HYDRAULICS RAY
665 RAYBESTOS I 1690 HARDWARE RAY
665 RAYBESTOS J 1691 BRAKE CABLE RAY
665 RAYBESTOS K 1692 RLINE COATED CALIPERS RAY
665 RAYBESTOS L 1693 ELEMENT3 NEW CALIPERS RAY
665 RAYBESTOS M 1694 ELEMENT3 SHOES RAY
665 RAYBESTOS S 1700 POLICE RAY
665 RAYBESTOS T 1701 ELEMENT3 COATED ROTORS RAY
665 RAYBESTOS U 1702 RLINE PADS RAY
665 RAYBESTOS V 1703 EUROPEAN RAY
665 RAYBESTOS W 1704 SCHOOL BUS RAY
665 RAYBESTOS Y 1705 TRUCK & MEDIUM DUTY RAY
665 RAYBESTOS N 1707 PERFORMANCE RAY
665 RAYBESTOS O 1708 RACING PADS RAY
665 RAYBESTOS P 1706 BRAKE HOSE RAY
665 RAYBESTOS Q 1580 BRAKE MASTER CYLINDER RAY
665 RAYBESTOS R 1581 WHEEL CYLINDER RAY
665 RAYBESTOS X 1582 PRK BRK HARDWARE KIT RAY
665 RAYBESTOS Z 1583 DRM BRK HARDWARE KIT RAY
665 RAYBESTOS 1 1584 CALIPER BOLT KIT RAY
665 RAYBESTOS 2 1585 DISC BRK HARDWARE KIT RAY
665 RAYBESTOS 3 1586 DRUM BRK SELF ADJUSTR RAY
665 RAYBESTOS 4 1587 CALIPER BUSHING KIT RAY
670 WALKER A 2710 ACCESSORIES & HARDWARE WALKER
670 WALKER B 2711 HD EXHAUST PIPES/FLEX PIPES  WALKER
670 WALKER C 2712 HD MUFFLER/RESONATOR WALKER
670 WALKER D 2709 CONVERTERS WALKER
670 WALKER E 2713 HD HARDWARE/ACCESSORIES  WALKER
670 WALKER F 2714 EXHAUST PIPES/FLEX PIPES  WALKER
670 WALKER G 2715 MUFFLER/RESONATOR WALKER
674 CHANNELOCK A 1709 SPECIALTY PLIERS CHANNE
674 CHANNELOCK B 1710 TONGUE&GROOVE CHANNE
674 CHANNELOCK C 1711 CUTTING PLIERS CHANNE
674 CHANNELOCK D 1712 UNCLASSIFIED CHANNE
695 DV SYSTEMS A 1729 STANDARD DUTY DVSYST
695 DV SYSTEMS B 1730 HD/ROTARY/DRYERS DVSYST
695 DV SYSTEMS C 1731 PARTS DVSYST
695 DV SYSTEMS D 1732 TOOLS DVSYST
700 K-SEAL A 0700 KSEAL K-SEAL
702 ASSOCIATED EQUIP A 1742 ALL PRODUCTS ASOCEQ
702 ASSOCIATED EQUIP B 1743 OVER 500 ASOCEQ
706 PAXTON INDUSTRIES A 3090 ALL PRODUCTS PAXTON
707 THERSTY HYDRATION PRODUCTS LTD A 0770 HYDRATION THERST
711 DERALE PERFORMANCE A 3100 HARDWARE DERALE
711 DERALE PERFORMANCE B 3101 ENGINE COOLING FAN DERALE
711 DERALE PERFORMANCE C 3102 ENG/TRAN OIL COOLER DERALE
711 DERALE PERFORMANCE D 3103 TRANSMISSION OIL COOLER DERALE
711 DERALE PERFORMANCE E 3104 POWER STEERING COOLER DERALE
717 FLEXZILLA A 1181 AIR FLEXZI
717 FLEXZILLA B 1182 WATER FLEXZI
721 TIMBREN A 1942 SUSPENSION ENH PARTS TIMBRE
725 VIKING A 1795 VIKING OUTERWEAR VIK
725 VIKING B 1796 VIKING BOOTS VIK
725 VIKING C 1797 GLOVES VIK
725 VIKING D 1798 HOUSEHOLD&CLEANING VIK
725 VIKING E 1799 VIKING FIREWALL VIK
735 BWD A 1831 IGNITION & DOOR BORG
735 BWD B 1832 ENGINE MANAGEMENT BORG
735 BWD C 1833 FUEL INJECTION BORG
735 BWD D 1834 CARB BORG
735 BWD E 1835 WIRE AND CABLE BORG
735 BWD F 1836 REMAN BORG
735 BWD G 1837 TECHSMART TECHSM
735 BWD H 1838 UNCLASSIFIED BORG
735 BWD I 1827 SENSORS BORG
735 BWD J 1828 SOLENOIDS & SWITCHES BORG
735 BWD K 1829 FUSES & CONNECTORS BORG
735 BWD L 1830 EMISSIONS BORG
737 TRUX ACCESSORIES A 1893 LIGHTING TRUXAC
737 TRUX ACCESSORIES B 1894 LIGHTING ACCESSORIES TRUXAC
737 TRUX ACCESSORIES C 1895 HEAD LIGHTS/WORK LAMP TRUXAC
737 TRUX ACCESSORIES D 1896 BODY ACCESSORIES TRUXAC
737 TRUX ACCESSORIES E 1897 EXHAUST ACCESSORIES TRUXAC
737 TRUX ACCESSORIES F 1898 WHEEL ACCESSORIES TRUXAC
737 TRUX ACCESSORIES G 1899 UNIVERSAL ACCESSORIES TRUXAC
737 TRUX ACCESSORIES H 1900 FENDERS AND KITS TRUXAC
740 SIERRA INTERNATIONAL - PRIME LINE A 3000 ATV DECK/DRIVE/TIRE SIERRA
740 SIERRA INTERNATIONAL - PRIME LINE B 3001 ATV ELECTRICAL/IGN SIERRA
740 SIERRA INTERNATIONAL - PRIME LINE C 3002 ATV FUEL/LUBRICANT SIERRA
740 SIERRA INTERNATIONAL - PRIME LINE D 3003 ATV OTHER SIERRA
740 SIERRA INTERNATIONAL - PRIME LINE E 3004 MOELLER ELECT/IGN SIERRA
740 SIERRA INTERNATIONAL - PRIME LINE F 3005 MOELLER FUEL/LUB SIERRA
740 SIERRA INTERNATIONAL - PRIME LINE G 3006 MOELLER PLUMBING SIERRA
740 SIERRA INTERNATIONAL - PRIME LINE H 3007 MOELLER OTHER SIERRA
740 SIERRA INTERNATIONAL - PRIME LINE I 3008 OPE AIR FILTER SIERRA
740 SIERRA INTERNATIONAL - PRIME LINE J 3009 OPE BLADE SIERRA
740 SIERRA INTERNATIONAL - PRIME LINE K 3010 OPE DECK/DRIVE/TIRE SIERRA
740 SIERRA INTERNATIONAL - PRIME LINE L 3011 OPE ELECTRICAL/IGN SIERRA
740 SIERRA INTERNATIONAL - PRIME LINE M 3012 OPE FUEL/LUBRICANT SIERRA
740 SIERRA INTERNATIONAL - PRIME LINE N 3013 OPE HANDHELD SIERRA
740 SIERRA INTERNATIONAL - PRIME LINE O 3014 OPE OTHER SIERRA
740 SIERRA INTERNATIONAL - PRIME LINE P 3015 OPE STARTER SYSTEM SIERRA
740 SIERRA INTERNATIONAL - PRIME LINE Q 3016 SEASTAR DECK/DRIVE SIERRA
740 SIERRA INTERNATIONAL - PRIME LINE R 3017 SEASTAR OTHER SIERRA
740 SIERRA INTERNATIONAL - PRIME LINE S 3018 SHIELDS SIERRA
740 SIERRA INTERNATIONAL - PRIME LINE T 3019 SIERRA COOLING SYSTEM SIERRA
740 SIERRA INTERNATIONAL - PRIME LINE U 3020 SIERRA DECK/DRIVE SIERRA
740 SIERRA INTERNATIONAL - PRIME LINE V 3021 SIERRA ELECT/IGN SIERRA
740 SIERRA INTERNATIONAL - PRIME LINE W 3022 SIERRA FUEL/LUBRICANT SIERRA
740 SIERRA INTERNATIONAL - PRIME LINE Y 3023 SIERRA OTHER SIERRA
740 SIERRA INTERNATIONAL - PRIME LINE Z 3024 VP FUEL/LUBRICANT SIERRA
744 LIPPERT COMPONENTS A 1400 AXLE REPLACEMENT LIPPER
744 LIPPERT COMPONENTS B 1401 ALIGNMENT/ SUSPENSION LIPPER
744 LIPPERT COMPONENTS C 1402 LEVELING/ STABILIZING LIPPER
744 LIPPERT COMPONENTS D 1403 FURRION ELEC POWER LIPPER
744 LIPPERT COMPONENTS E 1404 DENVER MATTRESS LIPPER
744 LIPPERT COMPONENTS F 1405 FURRION ELECTRONICS ACCESSORIES LIPPER
744 LIPPERT COMPONENTS G 1406 LCI AXLE COMPONENTS LIPPER
744 LIPPERT COMPONENTS H 1407 LCI RV PARTS AND ACCESSORIES LIPPER
744 LIPPERT COMPONENTS I 1408 LCI AWNINGS AND ACCESSORIES LIPPER
744 LIPPERT COMPONENTS J 1409 PGK RV ACCESSORIES LIPPER
744 LIPPERT COMPONENTS K 1399 MARINE LIPPER
744 LIPPERT COMPONENTS L 1510 SEALANTS AND ADHESIVE LIPPER
745 DANA A 2655 U JOINT KITS SPICEU
745 DANA B 2656 SEALS SPICEU
745 DANA C 2657 AXLE SHAFTS SPICEU
745 DANA D 2658 RING AND PINION KITS SPICEU
745 DANA E 2659 HD STEER AND SUSENSION SPICEU
745 DANA F 2660 DIFFERENTAL SPICEU
745 DANA G 2661 DRIVESHAFTS SPICEU
745 DANA H 2662 UNCLASSIFIED SPICEU
745 DANA I 2652 HARDWARE SPICEU
745 DANA J 2653 CENTER BEARING SPICEU
745 DANA K 2654 YOKE SPICEU
746 RECOCHEM A 1851 ANTIFREEZE RECOCH
746 RECOCHEM B 1852 WINDSHIELD WASH RECOCH
746 RECOCHEM C 1853 DEF RECOCH
746 RECOCHEM D 1854 CHAIN OIL RECOCH
746 RECOCHEM E 1855 SOLVENTS - OTHER RECOCH
750 PLOMBCO A 1860 LEAD PLOMBC
750 PLOMBCO B 1861 ZINC PLOMBC
750 PLOMBCO C 1862 STEEL PLOMBC
750 PLOMBCO D 1863 PLASTEEL PLOMBC
750 PLOMBCO E 1864 ADHESIVE  PLOMBC
750 PLOMBCO F 1865 TOOLS & ACCESSORIES PLOMBC
761 PLEWS & EDELMANN A 3080 RACK EDEL
761 PLEWS & EDELMANN B 3081 PUMP EDEL
761 PLEWS & EDELMANN C 3082 GEAR EDEL
761 PLEWS & EDELMANN D 3083 POWER STEER HOSE EDEL
761 PLEWS & EDELMANN E 3084 KITS, SEALS & FITTINGS EDEL
761 PLEWS & EDELMANN F 3085 COOLERS EDEL
764 BOSCH AUTO A 2674 SPARK PLUGS BOSCH
764 BOSCH AUTO B 2675 WIPER BLADES BOSCH
764 BOSCH AUTO C 2676 COMMON RAIL DIESEL BOSCH
764 BOSCH AUTO D 2677 OXYGEN SENSORS BOSCH
764 BOSCH AUTO E 2678 ENGINE MANAGEMENT BOSCH
764 BOSCH AUTO F 2672 BRAKING SYSTEMS BOSCH
764 BOSCH AUTO G 2671 ELECTRIC PARTS BOSCH
764 BOSCH AUTO H 2679 GAS/STEERING SYSTEMS BOSCH
764 BOSCH AUTO I 2673 NON-PROGRAM PRODUCT BOSCH
764 BOSCH AUTO J 2684 QUIETCAST HD SD BOSCH
764 BOSCH AUTO K 2695 QUIETCAST ROTOR BOSCH
764 BOSCH AUTO L 2696 QUIETCAST PAD BOSCH
764 BOSCH AUTO M 2697 BOSCH BLUE PADS BOSCH
764 BOSCH AUTO N 2694 BRAKE BOOSTER BOSCH
764 BOSCH AUTO O 3415 EUROLINE PADS BOSCH
764 BOSCH AUTO P 3416 QUIETCAST MD PADS BOSCH
764 BOSCH AUTO Q 3417 QUIETCAST SD PADS BOSCH
764 BOSCH AUTO R 3418 BOSCH BLUE SHOES BOSCH
764 BOSCH AUTO S 3419 POLICE PURSUIT PADS BOSCH
766 TERA PUMP A 0300 PUMPS TERAPU
766 TERA PUMP B 0301 BULK TERAPU
766 TERA PUMP C 0302 ACCESSORIES/PARTS TERAPU
771 LA-CO MARKAL A 1840 GEN PURPOSE MARKERS LA-CO
771 LA-CO MARKAL B 1841 HOLDERS/ TEMP INDICATORS  LA-CO
771 LA-CO MARKAL C 1842 INK MARKERS LA-CO
771 LA-CO MARKAL D 1843 LIQUID PAINT MARKERS LA-CO
771 LA-CO MARKAL E 1844 LUMBER/ TIMBER MARKERS LA-CO
771 LA-CO MARKAL F 1845 SOLID PAINT MARKERS LA-CO
771 LA-CO MARKAL G 1846 WELDING MARKERS LA-CO
771 LA-CO MARKAL H 1847 LA-CO LA-CO
771 LA-CO MARKAL I 1848 ALL WEATHER LA-CO
771 LA-CO MARKAL J 1849 TEMPIL LA-CO
772 CHAPIN INTERNATIONAL INC A 3060 SPRAYERS CHAPIN
772 CHAPIN INTERNATIONAL INC B 3061 PARTS CHAPIN
775 FIAMM A 1914 ALL PRODUCTS FIAAM
801 SPECTRUM BRANDS A 1952 ARMORALL WIPES SPECBR
801 SPECTRUM BRANDS B 1953 STP SPECBR
801 SPECTRUM BRANDS C 1954 CLEANERS & PROTECTANTS SPECBR
801 SPECTRUM BRANDS D 1955 AIR FRESHENERS SPECBR
805 STEWART WARNER A 1962 STEWART-WRNR PRODS. STEW
805 STEWART WARNER B 1963 ALEMITE PRDS (NOT STOCKED) STEW
805 STEWART WARNER C 1964 PERFORMANCE GUAGES STEW
808 INDUCTION INNOVATIONS A 0809 MINI-INDUCTOR SERIES INDUCT
808 INDUCTION INNOVATIONS B 0810 INDUCTOR SERIES INDUCT
808 INDUCTION INNOVATIONS C 0811 ALFE SERIES INDUCT
808 INDUCTION INNOVATIONS D 0812 ACCESSORIES INDUCT
810 PHILLIPS & TEMRO A 1991 ENGINE HEATERS TEMRO
810 PHILLIPS & TEMRO B 1992 CAB & CARGO TEMRO
810 PHILLIPS & TEMRO C 1993 CIRUCLATION HEATING TEMRO
810 PHILLIPS & TEMRO D 1994 ACCESSORIES TEMRO
810 PHILLIPS & TEMRO E 1995 OTHER HEATERS/WARMERS TEMRO
810 PHILLIPS & TEMRO F 1996 HEAVY DUTY TEMRO
810 PHILLIPS & TEMRO G 1998 EVOCHARGE TEMRO
815 3M A 1999 ABRASIVES 3M
815 3M B 2000 TAPES 3M
815 3M C 2001 PERSONAL PROTECTIVE EQUIPMENT 3M
815 3M D 2002 TOOLS & EQUIPMENT 3M
815 3M E 2003 FILMS & SHEETING 3M
815 3M F 2004 ADH, SEALANTS, FILLERS 3M
815 3M G 2005 CLEANING SUPPLIES 3M
815 3M H 2006 ELECTRICAL 3M
815 3M I 2007 COMPOUNDS & POLISHES 3M
815 3M J 2008 SIGNAGE/MARKING 3M
815 3M K 2009 COATINGS 3M
815 3M L 2010 AUTO PARTS HARDWARE 3M
815 3M M 2011 OFFICE SUPPLIES 3M
815 3M N 2012 MEDICAL 3M
815 3M O 2013 ADVANCED MATERIALS 3M
815 3M P 2014 HOME 3M
815 3M Q 2138 LUBRICANTS 3M
815 3M R 2139 BUILDING MATERIALS 3M
815 3M S 2140 INSULATION 3M
815 3M T 2141 LAB SUPPLIES TESTING 3M
815 3M U 2142 FILTRATION/SEPARATION 3M
815 3M V 2143 UNASSIGNED 3M
821 BUSSMANN A 2015 FUSES & ACCESSORIES BUSS
821 BUSSMANN B 2016 CIRCUIT BREAKERS BUSS
821 BUSSMANN C 2017 BLISTER PK. SWITCHES BUSS
823 TRICO A 2029 WA/PUMPS & GEN. PRODS. TRICO
823 TRICO B 2030 CHILL TRICO
823 TRICO C 2031 DISPLAYS/PROMOS TRICO
823 TRICO D 2032 SILICONE CERAMIC TRICO
823 TRICO H 2033 NEOFORM BLADES TRICO
823 TRICO E 2034 UNCLASSIFIED TRICO
823 TRICO I 2477 CLASSIC TRICO
823 TRICO J 2478 EXACT FIT TRICO
823 TRICO K 2479 FORCE TRICO
823 TRICO L 2480 HEAVY DUTY TRICO
823 TRICO M 2481 ICE TRICO
823 TRICO N 2482 REAR TRICO
823 TRICO O 2483 REFILL TRICO
823 TRICO P 2484 SENSE TRICO
823 TRICO Q 2485 SHIELD TRICO
823 TRICO R 2486 TRICO STANDARD TRICO
823 TRICO S 2487 TECH TRICO
823 TRICO T 2035 SENTRY TRICO
823 TRICO U 2533 TRICO PRO TRICO
828 DENSO A 2918 SPARK PLUGS DENSO
828 DENSO B 2919 IGNITION COILS DENSO
828 DENSO C 2920 O2 SENSORS DENSO
828 DENSO D 2921 RADIATORS DENSO
828 DENSO E 2922 OTHER SENSORS DENSO
831 ENERGIZER CANADA A 2060 RETAIL BATTERIES ENRGIZ
831 ENERGIZER CANADA B 2061 INDUSTRIAL BATTERIES ENRGIZ
831 ENERGIZER CANADA C 2062 FLASHLIGHTS ENRGIZ
831 ENERGIZER CANADA D 2063 AUTOMOTIVE DETAILING ENRGIZ
832 DELPHI A 2073 ENGINE MANAGEMENT DELPHI
832 DELPHI B 2074 OXYGEN SENSORS DELPHI
832 DELPHI C 2075 HEATING AND COOLING DELPHI
832 DELPHI D 2076 DIESEL DELPHI
832 DELPHI E 2077 UNCLASSIFIED DELPHI
832 DELPHI F 2079 SPARTA ELEC FUEL PUMP SPARTF
832 DELPHI G 2080 SPARTA HANGER PUMP SPARTF
832 DELPHI H 2081 SPARTA FUEL MODULE SPARTF
832 DELPHI I 2082 SPARTA FUEL STRAINER SPARTF
832 DELPHI J 2065 LOCK RING/ACCESSORIES DELPHI
832 DELPHI K 2066 ELECTRICAL FUEL PUMP DELPHI
832 DELPHI L 2067 FUEL PUMP MODULE ASSY DELPHI
832 DELPHI M 2068 FUEL TANK SEND UNIT DELPHI
832 DELPHI N 2069 FUEL PUMP STRAINER DELPHI
832 DELPHI O 2070 DI HP FUEL PUMP DELPHI
832 DELPHI P 2071 HANGER PUMP ASSEMBLY DELPHI
832 DELPHI Q 2072 MECHANICAL FUEL PUMP DELPHI
845 CLOYES GEAR AND PRODUCTS A 1363 CHAIN CLOYES
845 CLOYES GEAR AND PRODUCTS B 1364 TENSIONERS AND GUIDES CLOYES
845 CLOYES GEAR AND PRODUCTS C 1365 3-PIECE SET CLOYES
845 CLOYES GEAR AND PRODUCTS D 1366 GEAR CLOYES
845 CLOYES GEAR AND PRODUCTS E 1367 SPROCKET CLOYES
845 CLOYES GEAR AND PRODUCTS F 1368 OTHER CLOYES
860 FPPF CHEMICAL A 2091 ALL PRODUCTS FPPF
876 AWSUM OUTCOMES INC A 3055 OIL ADDITIVE AWSUM
876 AWSUM OUTCOMES INC B 3056 FUEL ADDITIVE AWSUM
876 AWSUM OUTCOMES INC C 3057 GREASE AWSUM
876 AWSUM OUTCOMES INC D 3058 SPECIALTY LUBRICANT AWSUM
880 ANCRA INTL A 2117 FLATBED EQUIPMENT ANCRA
880 ANCRA INTL B 2118 AUTO AND CONSUMER ANCRA
880 ANCRA INTL C 2119 INTERIOR VAN EQUIPMENT ANCRA
880 ANCRA INTL D 2120 GEN HARDWARE/WEBBING ANCRA
880 ANCRA INTL E 2121 S-LINE ANCRA
880 ANCRA INTL F 2122 MISC ANCRA
880 ANCRA INTL G 2123 TIRE CHAIN ANCRA
881 LUK CLUTCHES A 2112 CLUTCH KIT LUK
881 LUK CLUTCHES B 2113 FLYWHEEL LUK
881 LUK CLUTCHES C 2114 MASTER CYLINDER LUK
881 LUK CLUTCHES D 2115 SLAVE CYLINDER LUK
881 LUK CLUTCHES E 2116 OTHER LUK
908 POWERBRIGHT A 2151 ALL PRODUCTS POWERB
914 AGS A 2161 AGS GREASE AND LUBRICANT AGS
914 AGS B 2162 COPPER TUBING AGS
914 AGS C 2163 POLY ARMOUR AGS
914 AGS E 2164 REPAIR KITS AGS
914 AGS D 2165 OIL DRAIN PLUGS AGS
914 AGS F 2166 FITTINGS AGS
922 LOCKNLUBE A 0312 GREASE LOCKNL
922 LOCKNLUBE B 0313 AIR LOCKNL
922 LOCKNLUBE C 0314 OTHER LOCKNL
928 IRWIN TOOLS A 2186 CHISELS IRWIN
928 IRWIN TOOLS B 2187 CIRCULAR SAW BLADES IRWIN
928 IRWIN TOOLS C 2188 CLAMPING TOOLS IRWIN
928 IRWIN TOOLS D 2189 FASTENER DRIVE & SCREWDRIVING IRWIN
928 IRWIN TOOLS E 2190 HANDSAWS IRWIN
928 IRWIN TOOLS F 2191 LEVELS IRWIN
928 IRWIN TOOLS G 2192 LINEAR EDGE IRWIN
928 IRWIN TOOLS H 2193 MARKING & LAYOUT TOOLS IRWIN
928 IRWIN TOOLS I 2194 MASONRY DRILLING IRWIN
928 IRWIN TOOLS J 2195 METAL DRILLING IRWIN
928 IRWIN TOOLS K 2196 OTHER IRWIN
928 IRWIN TOOLS L 2197 PLIERS, WRENCHES, & LOCKING TOOLS IRWIN
928 IRWIN TOOLS M 2198 SNIPS IRWIN
928 IRWIN TOOLS N 2199 TAPS & DIES IRWIN
928 IRWIN TOOLS O 2200 UTILITY KNIVES & BLADES IRWIN
928 IRWIN TOOLS P 2201 WOOD DRILLING IRWIN
928 IRWIN TOOLS Q 2541 WORKSITE PRODUCTS IRWIN
929 A-LINE A 0978 BRAKE PADS ALINE
929 A-LINE B 0979 BRAKE CHAMBERS ALINE
929 A-LINE C 0980 BRAKE ROTORS ALINE
929 A-LINE D 0981 ACCESSORIES & KITS ALINE
931 PICO A 2202 BATTERY & BOOSTER PICO
931 PICO B 2203 BREAKERS, RELAYS PICO
931 PICO C 2204 CABLES TIES & MOUNTS PICO
931 PICO D 2205 CONNECTORS & TERMINAL   (was X) PICO
931 PICO E 2206 KITS DISPLAYS PICO
931 PICO F 2207 SHRINK TUBING AND LOO PICO
931 PICO G 2208 SOCKETS PIGTAILS PLUG PICO
931 PICO H 2209 TOOLS,TAPE & WELDING PICO
931 PICO I 2210 TRAILER CONNECTORS PICO
931 PICO J 2211 WIRE & CABLE PICO
931 PICO K 2212 BULK WIRE PICO
936 SCEPTER MFG. A 2227 ACCESSORIES SCEPTR
936 SCEPTER MFG. B 2228 GASOLINE SCEPTR
936 SCEPTER MFG. C 2229 DIESEL SCEPTR
936 SCEPTER MFG. D 2230 MARINE SCEPTR
936 SCEPTER MFG. E 2231 WATER SCEPTR
936 SCEPTER MFG. F 2232 KEROSENE SCEPTR
947 LLOYDS LABORATORIES A 2871 CLEANERS LLOYDS
947 LLOYDS LABORATORIES B 2872 PROPERTY MAINT LLOYDS
947 LLOYDS LABORATORIES C 2873 LUBRICATION LLOYDS
947 LLOYDS LABORATORIES D 2874 AUTO AND FLEET MAINT LLOYDS
947 LLOYDS LABORATORIES E 2875 SPECIALTY LLOYDS
960 DRYSHOD A 2700 ARCTIC STORM DRYSHO
960 DRYSHOD B 2701 HAYMAKER DRYSHO
960 DRYSHOD C 2702 SOD BUSTER DRYSHO
960 DRYSHOD D 2703 STEEL TOE CSA DRYSHO
960 DRYSHOD E 2704 NOSHO ULTRA HUNT DRYSHO
960 DRYSHOD F 2699 LEGEND DRYSHO
960 DRYSHOD G 2698 OTHER DRYSHO
961 INGERSOLL RAND A 2237 AUTOMOTIVE IG-RA
961 INGERSOLL RAND B 2238 PARTS/ACCESSORIES IG-RA
961 INGERSOLL RAND C 2239 MANUAL HOISTS IG-RA
961 INGERSOLL RAND D 2240 NON-PROGRAM PRODUCT IG-RA
970 MONROE AUTO A 2685 SHOCKS MONROE
970 MONROE AUTO B 2686 STRUTS MONROE
970 MONROE AUTO C 2687 ECONOMATIC MONROE
970 MONROE AUTO D 2688 QUICKSTRUT MONROE
970 MONROE AUTO E 2689 STRUT MOUNT MONROE
970 MONROE AUTO F 2690 UNCLASSIFIED MONROE
970 MONROE AUTO G 2691 RANCHO RANCHO
970 MONROE AUTO H 2692 LIFT KITS MONROE
970 MONROE AUTO I 2693 LIFT SUPPORTS MONROE
980 WD-40 A 2249 WD-40 PRODUCTS WD40
980 WD-40 B 2250 3-IN-ONE WD40
980 WD-40 C 2251 2000 FLUSHES WD40
980 WD-40 D 2252 SPOT SHOT WD40
980 WD-40 E 2253 DISPLAY/PROMO WD40
989 MOLYSLIP A 2261 GREASES MLYSLP
989 MOLYSLIP B 2262 ANTISEIZE/ASSY COMPOUNDS MLYSLP
989 MOLYSLIP C 2263 SPECIALTY LUBES/AEROSOLS MLYSLP
989 MOLYSLIP D 2264 SUPPLEMENTS MLYSLP
989 MOLYSLIP E 2265 DISPLAYS MLYSLP
990 WARN A 2272 WARN WINCHES WARN
990 WARN B 2273 WARN VR WINCHS WARN
990 WARN C 2274 BUMPERS WARN
990 WARN D 2275 LIGHTS&ACCESSORIES WARN
Pricing

Price Multipliers

Part of the data required in setting up a new product line includes identifying the base price that will be received from the Manufacturer or Buying Group as well as setting up the various multipliers used to calculate the prices of all other fields.

This work is initiated via the following Menu Path, or by entering “Multipliers” in the menu search

  1. Inventory… -> 4. Pricing… -> 1. Data Maintenance… -> 1 Price Multipliers -> 1. Add Multiplier

(To Modify existing pricing structures select 2. Change Multiplier as the last selection above.)

 

Which brings up the following screen

image-1631749880047.png

For all new categories you must add as a minimum a set of multipliers for “Space” in 3 - Discount Level.

Enter the category abbreviation in 1 -  Category

(Category must exist – if not yet added stop here and add the category.)

The multipliers set up under Space are used at the time of price updating as a catch all so that in the absense of a specific set for a product price group the space multiplier set will be used thus ensuring that all parts will show up as priced. Therefore you will only need to set up additional Discount Level Multiplier Sets when you are dealing with a line that has different pricing structures for some aspect of that line.

Enter your stocking part multipliers. If for example you want to reference everything from cost but you get jobber be sure to enter the cost price in the first calculation as per the example below.

image-1631749929997.png

Note that hitting F1 (Accept) in response to Any Change Stocked? Question will result in the system asking if you wish copy the stocking multipliers to the non stocking multipliers. If you do not want to set up different multipliers for non stock answer “Y”.  Wether the same or different multipliers are used it is important that you have a set of multipliers set up for the “Space” Discount level for non stocked since without  non stock multipliers no pricing will show up when trying to invoice non stock items.

Once completed entering the Non Stocked multipliers either by copying from stocked or manually entering, the program will ask “Any Change Non Stocked?” If you are in Change mode hitting [F1] will cause the program to  Ask “Update Prices Now?”  A ”Y” response will cause the program to recalculate all stocking item prices using your newly entered multipliers. Hitting N will bypass this step.

In Add mode you will not see the Update Prices Now? question

Pricing

Price Rounding

Overview

Price Rounding is an option provided in COUNTERPOINT which if properly implemented can add two to three percent to your net bottom line on stocking inventory. The beauty of this is that when properly implemented neither the customer nor the counter staff will ever notice it and since the calculation is done at price update time the rounding remains in effect regardless of what the customers discount structure might be.

This option allows the set up of  rounding parameters that can later be used when doing price changes or price updates.  These parameters can be used on any category and on selected price levels within a category based on how the [R]ounding flags are set in the price multiplier maintenance screen.

Set up the Rounding Rules Parameters

The retail price rounding option becomes effective when price multipliers are set up in 6. inventory control…à4. pricing…->1. Data maintenance to use the [R] rounding option for a line (discussed later in this document).   Rounding is only available on stocked items. 

Prior to turning rounding on at the line and price field level, we must first establish the rounding rules. This is done in the Retail Rounding Parameters Maintenance Program accessible via the following menu path.

  1. Inventory…-> 4. Pricing…-> 1. Data Maintenance…-> 3. Retail Rounding Parameters

Alternately Type “Retail Rounding” into the Menu search.   Select add/Change Delete as appropriate then enter data as follows

Field Entries

  1. Up to value

This field is the maximum value for this set of rounding rules, but also in effect, creates the minimum value for the next rounding rule.   In the example below the first rounding rule is set for items with prices up to 1.00, then the minimum for this record is assumed to be 0.00.  When the next rounding record is set up, in this example it is for items with prices up to $5.00, then the $1.00 maximum from the previous record becomes the minimum value for the new record.  You can set up as many levels as deemed appropriate  Typical examples might be $1, $5, $10, $25, $50, $100, $400, $1000, $999,999. At the higher retail price levels you can round up in dollars as well as cents. So, for example you could say that items selling between  $400 and $1000 should have $3.99 added to the selling price if they end in .00 to .49 and $4.99 if they end in .50 to .99. The examples on the following page illustrate the principles discussed here.

image-1631750057152.png

The screen above sets the lower limit for the next price rounding level. Note that as the first rounding record on file its assumed lower limit is .01 Cents. All other Rounding records use the previous record to determine their lower limit.

The screen below is used to round items items priced from $1.01 to $5.00

image-1631750079803.png

  1. Do rounding?

There may be a range of prices for which no rounding is required, but the record still needs to be set up because of the assumed minimum it will create for the next record.  If the previous record had a maximum of $5.00 and no rounding  is desired between $5.01 and $10.00, then a record needs to be set up with a maximum of $10.00 with the Do Rounding? field set to [N].  All the remaining fields on the screen will automatically be set to .00 when Do Rounding equals N.

  1. Cents / Rounding

For each grouping, indicate the number of cents to round up to.  Rounding to [100] will roll the price up to the next dollar. When price changes occur, the system first calculates the new prices based on the multipliers that have been set up and then based on the entries here, resets the prices accordingly. Thus ensuring that the rounding is applied before any customer specific discounts are applied. Note that rounding only applies to Stocked Items.

 

Turn On Rounding on Multipliers

 

As shown in the following screen rounding is activated by setting the field following the % symbol to R on all price levels where price rounding is desired. This allows the user to further refine how rounding will be applied. In the example below rounding will apply to price levels 1 and 2 only but not  be applied to price levels 3, or 4.

Once this is completed Save the Record by hitting [F1] And then exit the program. 

Note – If you would like the rounding to be implemented immediately  Answer “Y”  in response to the “Update Prices now? prompt  at the end of the record acceptance sequence. This will cause the program to recalculate all stocking item prices incorporating the specified rounding. 

If you answer “N” to the “Update Prices Now?” prompt rounding will not take affect until the next price update.

image-1631750105519.png

In summary there are two parts to using the rounding

Part 1 – Set up the rounding rules. And

Part 2 - Specify the categories and price levels within them that rounding should be applied to.

We suggest starting with a retail line that has known sales history and good movement. Start slowly until you get the handle of working with this tool and then expand rounding to include all lines where rounding would obviously work.

 

Pricing

Pricing Theory

COUNTERPOINT pricing while appearing to be complex is actually a matter of ensuring that three pieces of data required in setting up pricing are in place and correct. At its most basic level those pieces are as follows;

 

Category Record (AKA Line Code Record)

This record identifies the product line. It provides among other things the following information to the system.

 

Category Price Multipliers

When price files are delivered to your system they typically contain only one price (eg Jobber or Net) and optionally may also contain core price where applicable. Given that the auto parts industry universally works with five price levels plus cost there needs to be a mechanism to put pricing in all of the non populated fields.

As a Jobber you will know that your Buying Group or Supplier sends you price lists with (typically) Jobber or Cost. You will also know what your discount off Jobber is,  what the street price is for the product and at what price you will sell the product to established account customers. Armed with this knowledge COUNTERPOINT provides a method of allowing you to predefine the upcharges reguired to populate all required fields using the base price supplied in the price book as your starting point. This is accomplished via Pricing Parameter Maintenance.

Given that you may not buy non stocked parts as efficiently as you buy stocked parts COUNTERPOINT provides a separate set of multipliers for non stocked purchases. This set must be present if you wish to have non stock sales price properly. That said, the non stocked multipliers can be set to match the stocking multipliers with a single key stroke.

The Non Stock multiplier set also contains a field Called “Original To Price Level”. The system uses this field to determine where to put, and find, the product lines base price level. Historically this field was almost always set to 5 (Jobber) but with the recent shift to reference or net pricing the field can be set to almost any price level as dictated by what the you receive as a base price from the supplier.

 

DISCOUNT LEVELS

COUNTERPOINT provides for the reality that you may get more than one discount structure on a single product line.

An example of this might be belts where the price list is based on J-35% for Automotive belts, J-45% for Industrial Belts and J-55% for Recreational belts.

In order to accommodate this the Price Multiplier Maintenance screen includes a field called Discount Level. This field accepts entry of Space (The Space bar) A thru Z and Zero thru Nine which provides for up to 37 different multiplier sets with each Discount level,  potentially, having a unique set of multipliers. 

 

IMPORTANT NOTE  

Product Master Discount Level

If all of the foregoing checks out and your stocked item pricing is still not working the last point to check is the product master record to determine what is in field 53 Discount Level. If this specifies something other than the correct Discount level or it contains an “*”you will need to change it to the correct level.  (Note – In the event that there are too many records involved to efficiently do this manually you can use the Product master reset program, but use this program with EXTREME CAUTION as MISTAKES CANNOT BE UNDONE if it erases data based on what you entered)

In summary, If the Category Record, the Price Multipliers and the specified Discount Level on the stocked item product master records are set up correctly your pricing will work as expected.

Also see the document titled Pricing Trouble shooting.

Pricing

Troubleshooting (Real World Example)

Jobber states that non stocked part Carter P76148M is not pricing correctly.

Prices as initially presented shown below.

image-1631749731294.png

 

Cost  (F6) as shown on UNI Victor is $163.64

List (UNI Reference (F1) as shown on Victor is $467.54

When you see results like these it what you are looking at is a simple arithmetic problem. The first step to figuring out what is going on is to confirm that the category record is looking at the correct price book.  In this case we confirmed that the correct price book is UNI560 and the Category record in fact does reference that in the Price book field.

With that confirmed the next  (and most likely) place to look is at your multipliers. Do this in Pricing – Multiplier Maintenance – Change Mode. Calling this up for this example we see the screen as on the following page. ( Jobber stated he had copied multipliers from PAD since it was priced the same way as the problem category.

 

This means that the category in question originally had the following multipliers.

image-1631749743122.png

 

In looking at this screen we see that field 40 tells us that the Original to price is “5” this field is initially filled based on what you specify as the initial calculation to be done on the first “Becomes Price” line as shown in 41.

We know that the Price book delivered to your system from UNI contains a cost (F6) of $163.63 and List (F1) contained a value of $467.54 

It is important to pay attention to what UNI tells you they are providing as a base price. If they state that this line is a reference priced line you MUST use the value shown in Price one as your base level. While there MAY be values in the other fields you cannot count on that being true as they have specified that this line is a reference priced line and that is the only price they can be counted on to provide. So… with that back ground lets look at the parameters set up above.

We know that this is a reference line so the first thing that is wrong is that  field 40 should be set to 1 (List). This will automatically reset itself when we correct the multipliers. The following steps will illustrate the process to fix this specific problem.

Starting with the first line in Stocking Inventory We looked up on Victor and determined the Victor Cost to be $163.64. So grabbing our calculator we perform the following calculation.

Cost x 100 / list -100 = Discount Percent from list to get to cost. (ie 163.63 x  100 / 467.54 – 100 = 65)

So the first line in Stocking Inventory should read as

Price 6  becomes Price 1 plus -65.00000 C – As shown in screen shot following. (NOTE The multiplier is a negative number)

To confirm this as accurate grab a calculator and run the calculation (ie 467.54 minus 65% = 163.639 which rounds out to $163.64 which exactly matches UNI Victor cost on the sample item.

Now that you have List (Supplied by Uni) and Cost calculated above and confirmed you can flesh out the other price levels by working from list down or cost up as appropriate to your business. (For this illustration we used Cost up).

For example I might decide that F5 Jobber should be 30% higher than Cost so the next line would read Price 5  becomes Price 6 plus 43.00000 C

The next line might read Price 4  becomes Price 6 plus 65.00000 C

The next line might read Price 3  becomes Price 6 plus 100.00000 C

The next line might read Price 2  becomes Price 6 plus 140.00000 C

We did not include a calculation for Price 1 since that is the base price that Uni Supplied in the price list and as such is already populated.

When I finished adding lines to the stocked portion of the screen I was asked to confirm that they should be copied to the non stocked portion of the screen and replied Y. Note that the system changed the TO PRICE field from 5 to 1. This field is used by the system to know where to put and find the base price when calculating Non stocked prices.

This screen  shot following illustrates the finished product.

image-1631749783625.png

Note that on the right the system has calculated the Gross Margin that will be achieved via the use of the multipliers as currently entered. If all looks acceptable, hit F1 to accept the input. Otherwise enter the field number you wish to change.

At this point you can check your work by going to the invoice screen and keying in a non stocked part as shown on the following page.

image-1631749798199.png

If the non stock pricing now works correctly you can do a manual price update or if the price book is not on your system request that it be loaded and it will auto update overnight or you can run it right away.

 

Pricing

Updating Prices by %

Overview

There are situations wherein prices need to be updated, across the board, by a percentage. In these cases, there are two step to take to ensure that all current prices and future updates are handled.

Update all categories by %

To update all of the current pricing by a percentage amount, you will need to navigate to 6. Inventory > 4. Pricing 5. Online Price Change > 3. All Categories - By %age

image-1635537002828.png

The screen gives you a number of options:

1. Category - You are able to select a specific category to update, or press Enter to select all categories. If you select just one category, you can also select a specific range of parts.
3. Price Level - If you wish to update just one price discount level within the category, you can enter it here. Press enter if you wish to select all. You would also press enter if you wish to just update the blank price level items.
4. Only Blank? - If you pressed enter on option 3, you could enter Y here to elect to update only blank price level items. Otherwise, select N to opt to update all items within the category/categories
5. Ignore Locked? - Y or N to ignore any * locked items within the category
6-30 - The price levels and desired percentage change. You enter the price level you wish to change, the price level you wish to base that change off of and then the percentage change to make.

In the above example, we will be adding a 5% surcharge to all sell price levels (1-5) for all categories in the inventory.

Update price parameters by %

When updating any prices at a large scale, the price parameters should also be addressed in order to deal with any future price updates. This can be done via 6. Inventory > 4. Pricing > 1. Data Maintenance > 4. Reset Price Multipliers by %

Some thought needs to be put into which multipliers to adjust. Updating multiple price levels can have a cascading effect which will increase prices more than desired. If all multipliers move up from a common cost, this shouldn't be an issue

image-1635538719333.png

The screen gives you a number of options:

Alternate Stocked Pricing Parameters -Y/N on whether to adjust your stocking price parameters
Alternate Non-Stocked Pricing Parameters - Y/N on whether to adjust your non-stocked pricing parameters
Alternate Price Level X - Y/N on whether to adjust the respective price level. If Y, then you can enter an amount to adjust it by (to one decimal place) and an option to change the rounding type.

It is not recommended to adjust your cost pricing (price 6) here.

 

Purchasing

Common functions and procedures within the purchasing module

Purchasing

Suggested Order Calculation

Modified Suggested Order Create screen

image-1635444073109.png

Suggested Order – Name of the suggested order to be used to recall, maintain and turn into a Purchase Order.

1: Categories to Buy – This can be up to 20 different individual categories or by leaving the first field blank the calculation can be done for All categories.

21: Days Stock Being Bought – Number of days inventory to be purchased.

22: Include Special Orders? – Option to include (Y), exclude (N), or only (O) include Special Orders entered through the Point of Sale system which have not already been ordered.

23: All Branch Special Orders? – If Include Special Orders is Y or O then the Special Orders for all locations can be included (Y) or only the locations selected in Branches to Buy (N).

24: Include Backorders? – Option to include (Y), exclude (N), or only (O) include Customer Backorders entered through the Point of Sale system which cannot presently be filled by quantities on hand or on order by the locations selected in Branches to Buy.

25: All Branch Backorders? – If Include Backorders is Y or O then the Backorders for all locations can be included (Y) or only the locations selected in Branches to Buy (N).

26: Include Lost Sales History? – Lost Sales recorded through the Point of Sale system are to be included as demand in the suggested order calculation (Y) or not (N).

27: Include Non-Stocked Items? – Sales of Non-Stocked parts from the Point of Sale system are to be included in the suggested order calculation (Y) or not (N).

28: Ignore Negative Available? – If the part presently has a negative on hand the suggested order calculation should view this as Zero on hand (Y) or buy the negative quantity to bring the part back to zero on hand (N).

29: Exclude Current On-Order? – To include the present on-order quantity as part of the available inventory (N) or to ignore the present on-order quantity (Y). This option is typically used when there is an outstanding purchase order which has a long delivery time and inventory needs to be replenished prior to its arrival.

30: Use Maximum? – Have the suggested order calculation buy to the Maximum if it is set (Y) or to ignore the maximum and buy based on sales movement (N).

31: Use Minimum? – Have the suggested order calculation buy to the Minimum if it is set (Y) or to ignore the minimum and buy based on sales movement (N).

32: Branch Surplus:

33: Include (N)o Reorder Products? – Inventory parts numbers with reorder allowed set to an “N” are not to be included in the suggested order calculation (N) or they are to be included in the calculation (Y).

34: Supplier – Enter the 6 digit supplier number to be purchased from or leave this field blank to look at all suppliers. If buying for all categories the use of the supplier number will limit the parts on the suggested order to be those assigned to the supplier entered.

36: Minimum Order Value – If a value is used here the suggested order will be bumped up to meet this value by increasing the suggested quantity to order for the parts included.

37: Branches to Buy – Only the branches selected will be included in the suggested order calculation.

 

Suggested Order Calculation

The suggested order calculation uses a variety of different formulas based on the purchase code of the part number which is automatically reviewed monthly. The various purchase codes assigned to the parts are:

O – Obsolete part reorder allowed set to N

Not included in the suggested order calculation unless the option Include (N)o Reorder Products is set to (Y)

D – Dead Stock where the part was added over 24 months ago and had no sales activity in the last 24 months for this location.

Will only buy to the Minimum or Maximum if these values are set

S – Service item or slow mover with less than 5% of the months the product has been active showing sales activity for this location

Will only buy to the Minimum or Maximum if these values are set

N – New Part less that 90 days activity

Number of days required based on the weighted average daily sales over the last 90 days

W – Winter item with over 70% of total sales activity being done in the Dec Jan Feb months

V – Spring item with over 70% of total sales activity being done in the Mar Apr May months

U – Summer item with over 70% of total sales activity being done in the Jun Jul Aug months

F – Fall item with over 70% of total sales activity being done in the Sep Oct Nov months

The suggested order quantity for seasonal parts is calculated using the weighted average daily sales for the last 2 seasons if the days to buy for are in the season. When the days to order is out of season for the product the suggested order calculation uses the weighted average daily sales for the last 18 out of season months.

A – Active part for all other parts

The suggested order calculation for Active parts can set to use on the last 12 or 24 months sales activity based on the purchasing parameter settings on screen 2 Suggested Order Months (field 25) and Months Weighting (field 27). If these parameters are not set the default 12 is used.

 

 

Purchasing Parameters

The Purchasing Parameters contain the maximum number of months sales to be used in the suggested order calculation, the minimum number of months with activity, the allowable tolerance for spikes in sales and the minimum value of branch overstock for a part to be considered for a transfer. These parameters can be modified through Utilities à System Setup à Purchasing à Parameter Maintenance, screens 2 and 3.

Screen 2

Suggested Order Months (field 25) and Months Weighting (field 27). If these parameters are not set the default 12 is used. This is the maximum number of months of sales activity that will be used in the suggested order calculation. If the part is less that this number of months old the sales from the first received date are used.

image-1635444177942.png

Products that do not have sales activity in more than the No. of Month with Sales (field 26) value will have the sales for that location excluded from the suggested order calculation.

Screen 3

In order to remove sales spikes from the suggested order calculation the Purchasing Parameter Maintenance now includes a set of Smoothing Parameters on screen 3 as well as the defaults for the suggested order create.

image-1635444234425.png

This smoothing can be done using up to 8 different average monthly sales values assigning different percentages to each value. The smoothing calculation uses the number of month specified on screen 2 of the parameters for Months Weighting and averages the sales for the location over those months and then calculates an allowable range using the percentages entered here. Actual monthly sales quantities which are outside the range specified are replaced with the average monthly sales in the suggested order calculation.

 

Required Quantity

The daily usage rate for the parts is calculated on a Weighted Average basis over the number of months specified in the parameters or the number of months the parts has been active, since the First Received Date, whichever is less.

The required quantity is the daily use rate multiplied by the Days Stock Being Bought entered on the suggested order create screen.

 

Suggested Quantity

The Suggested Buy quantity is:

  1. The required quantity calculated above less the current available quantity which is On Hand plus On Order (if included) plus Committed (if included) minus Customer Backorders (if included).
  2. The Minimum if not zero and if included in the calculation less the current available if this is greater than #1 above.
  3. The Maximum if not zero and if included in the calculation less the current available if this is less than #1 above.
  4. The value is then rounded up by the Purchase Quantity assigned to the part.

The Suggested Transfer quantity is:

  1. Using “Branch Surplus” options “T” or “O”
  2. Transfer quantity is the branch excess above the calculated required quantity as above where the total value of this excess product is greater than the Minimum Transfer Value set in the Purchasing Parameters.
  3. If 2. is True then the On Hand in excess of the required quantity would be the transfer quantity.
  4. If 2. is False then the product will not be suggested to transfer.

 

 

 

 

 

Release Notes

Release notes for Counterpoint

Release Notes - Version 5

A listing of updates contained in COUNTERPOINT V5, their functionality and usage

Release Notes - Version 5

Detailed Invoice Search

Basic Usage Notes

Launching the D.I.S. via Invoicing

Launching the D.I.S. via the Menu system.

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Using the D.I.S.

 

Release Notes - Version 6

Documentation on the features associated with Version 6

Release Notes - Version 6

New Purchasing Module

Overview

This is a complete overhaul of the current suggested order logic in an attempt to provide the user with more of a table driven utility while at the same time making the underlying logic that determines the order quantities more transparent. In addition, the demand cleansing or smoothing will become more granular by the use of weekly versus monthly demand.

The fundamental changes include the adoption of a weekly sales bucket (Current plus the last 104 weeks), an ABC ranking based on Annual Sales $’s or Units and the introduction of an automatic reorder point based on a dynamic lead time (Last x receiving’s) and a parameterized safety stock factor by sales rank.

There is a corporate version of the ABC ranking table as well as one for each branch, carrying different values that will support inter branch versus corporate replenishment.

The vendor profile is also expanded to support the rules for pre-paid freight shipment. This will be used to determine when a corporate suggested order could have one or more PO’s produced because one or more branches meet the free shipment criteria. This requires user confirmation that split PO’s are desired on any given SO.

The PO receiving process is also enhanced to allow a recalculation of the branch split if the order was a corporate PO. In addition, a prorated calculation is performed for partial shipments, with an option to receive any partial shipment into the DC only.

Basic functionality

  1. ABC ranking: A new weekly process will calculate the annual sales in $’s at cost or Unit’s, based on which method is being used, for each part number. This value will be compared to a table that carries up to twenty ranges, 100 – 1000, 1001 – 5000, etc. Each range will be associated with an ABC ranking which in turn will carry the number of required inventory turns as well as the safety stock %. The number of weeks used in the sales ranking is determined by the user, 1  104.
  2. Re-order Point: Will replace or become the current Minimum Qty field on the item master. There is also be a new field that controls whether or not the re-order point is recalculated weekly or is locked for the number of weeks enteredmanually into this field. If the Re-order point is to be permanently locked a value of 99 is used in the Auto Lock field. The weekly process will decrement this field by one until it reaches zero. Zero will be considered as indicating the item is on automatic re-order point calculation. NOTE: the manual change of the Auto Lock forces entry into the Re-order point field to enter the quantity manually. New product will default to a standard parameter for the Auto Lock weeks and a Re-order point will need to be entered manually.
  3. Re-order Point calculation: This will be done on a weekly boundary based on the items lead time (Average of last xx number of receiving’s) and the safety stock associated with the items ABC ranking. The lead time in days would be multiplied by the daily use rate and the result of this multiplied again by the safety stock. EXAMPLE: Item A123 is classified as a “C” ranking (25% safety stock), has a lead time of 20 days and a daily use rate of 2 units. The re-order point qty therefore would be (40 times 1.25 or 50 units).
  4. Re-Order Quantity: This new value for the Vendor and DC replenishment is calculated based on the Sales Ranking of the product and the required Turns setup in the sales ranking table. The annual sales are divided by the required number of turns to determine the Re-order Quantity.
  5. Rounding: Parameters are available to control the rounding characteristics of both the Re-order Point and the Re-order Quantity, round up, round at 0.5 or round down.
  6. Suggested Order Calculation: Would be calculated as the total annual units sold divided by the number of required turns for the items ABC ranking plus the difference between On-hand and the Re-order point qty. EXAMPLE: Item A123 from above has 35 units On-hand, sells 1200 units a year and is classified as a C ranking, which calls for 4 turns. This would result in the suggested order qty being calculated as 1200 (annual unit sales) divided by 4 (required turns for “C” ranking) plus 15 (Re-order qty – On-hand) or 315 units.

Inventory Enhancements

Supplier Enhancements

Weekly Demand

A new WEEKSALES data has been created to include the RAW sales total as well as the smoothed or normalized total. This will then allow the potential for a refresh if the smoothing parameters are changed. The daily average sales for the week is also stored to avoid having to calculate this number on the fly. The need to perform a weighted average in regards the daily sales qty will no longer be required as all xx weeks (Number of weeks to be considered in calculations) will be added and then averaged. The demand smoothing and calculation of average daily sales is done on a weekly boundary.

Sales Ranking

The sales ranking is recalculated on a weekly basis after the demand smoothing is completed along with the Vendor and DC replenishment Re-order quantities.

Lead Time and Safety Stock

Branch replenishment

The current replenishment logic has been changed to look at the branch ABC ranking table to determine what the correct stocking levels for a branch would be. For a DC replenishment the re-order point (lead time and safety stock) would be driven from a
parameterized setting by branch. For a vendor purchase the corporate lead time and safety stock would be used. In both cases the Suggested Order Qty would be based on the branch ABC ranking of the item and whatever turns and safety stock are contained in the sales ranking table.

Seasonal Profiling (In Development)

Revisions are being made to the Seasonal profiling to support User Defined seasons.
This will include up to 4 seasons indicating the start and end month for each season and the % of annual sales required in the season to mark the part as a seasonal item.
The calculation of Re-order Point and Re-order Quantity will use the movement from the previous season when buying in season and the movement from the previous off-season when buying out of season.
The intent is to use the lead time of the product to determine if the purchase is going into or out of season.
The seasonal flag will be visible on the suggested order detail.

Suggested Order

The SO routine has been modified to remove the need for user input, taking instead a series of default arguments in how the program will function. This will allow for easier management and more consistency in what the buyers use as criteria. In addition, the system will maintain a perpetual pending order status by creating a SO for every vendor every night, adding or changing the status of an item based upon the previous day’s activity.

The buyers will now be offered a Buyers Focus screen with a number of filters that will control the view, and therefore the amount of data they will have to look at. This includes those vendors where there is a schedule, daily, weekly, monthly. In addition, the concept of a buyer being assigned a vendor will be introduced that will further filter the current data overload as well as support monitoring of a buyers habits and/or performance.

Receiving Enhancements

Calculation of the Xdocking requirements for the branches are made upon the receipt of the product at the DC. Stock Transfers can be automatically created when the PO is updated for Xdock product.
The receipt of product either by the use of bar code scanning or entry against the purchase order data itself.

Reporting

Release Notes - Version 6

Version 6 Overview

Point of Sale

Customer Maintenance

Customer Notes

Accounts Payable

General Ledger

Sales Analysis

Inventory

Purchasing

Sales Analysis

Sales Analysis

Customer Sales Reporting

As a normal part of working with your customer base there will be times when you need to understand a customers buying habits by category. Counterpoint provides a report specifically for this purpose. The report is accessed via the following menu path.

  1. Sales Analysis…-> 3. Sales/Core Reports…-> 4. Customer Reporting…-> 2. Customer Sales_Returns

Which brings up the following screen.

image-1631748641585.png

Enter data into fields as follows.

1 Start Date – Enter date you would like analysis to begin –hit Enter to include all customer purchases.

4 End Date – Enter date of last day you wish to include in the analysis – hit enter to include all data.

7 Report Type – Enter one of the displayed options as appropriate to your need for this report.

8 Page -  Per Customer – Enter Y or N as appropriate.

9 Report On – Enter One of the displayed options as appropriate to your needs.

10 Use Actual or Jobber – Enter as appropriate to your needs.

12 Category – Enter category to be reported or hit [Enter] to report on all categories.

14 Counterman – Enter Counterman number to report or hit [Enter] to report on all Counterman sales.

15 Counterman Detail – Enter Y or N as appropriate to your needs.

16 Stores – Prompt will list the stores on your system by branch number. All will have default value of Y change to N as appropriate to your needs.

Fields 36 thru 74 – Enter customer account numbers of all customers you wish to see reported. Hit [Enter] to see all customers reported. Use the Tab key to launch a customer account search if you are unsure of the account number.

When you have entered all fields hit [F1] to run the program.

Report can be displayed on screen or printed out as appropriate to your intended usage.

Warehouse Utilities

Warehouse Utilities

Uni-Select SAX Reporting Setup

Installer Customer Maintenance

In order to provide the proper sales reporting for the SAX program some maintenance is required to identify the installers that have signed up for the program and which program they are enrolled in.

This new menu option is found via the following menu path. Note -  This can only be initiated from the MAIN MENU.

Left Click the Uni-Select Logo on the button the the right of the Cursor at the bottom of the screen. From that menu take the following menu selections’

5. Uni-Select Installer Reporting… - -> 1. Installer Customer Maintenance

Select Add Change Delete as appropriate which will bring up the following screen.
sc1.png

Customer = Your A/R customer number for the installer

Category = Your category code for the product line. (This will automatically be converted to the Uni-Select supplier code when data is sent to Uni.)

An entry must be made for all product lines that are to be reported under the program for which installer reporting is being set up in this session. As you are making entries the fields will default to the previous entry made in that field

Report Cat. = S for SAX or T for the Specialist.

 

Member Number  = Your Uni-Select member number in format 00-000.

 

Account Number = The Installers Uni-Select program account number

Installer Sales Reporting

This is only for manual processing needs. The system automatically runs reporting on a monthly basis to send to UNI

The sales reporting for the Uni-Select Installer Programs will report all customers and categories for the installer program within the date range entered.

This menu option is found via the following menu path. Note This can only be initiated from the MAIN MENU.

Left Click the Uni-Select Logo on the button the the right of the Cursor at the bottom of the screen. From that menu take the following menu selections’

  1. Uni-Select Installer Reporting… - -> 2. Installer Sales Reporting. Which brings up the Following screen.

sc2.png

When running the report you must select the date dange to be reported and which line types are to be included in the report totals by category.

You must also choose whether core values are to be Excluded - (Y/N),  or  Included - (Y/N) in the report values.

The last selection determines which price the reported sales values are to be based on. The price levels shown for List and Jobber are controlled by the the setup of pricing structure in Billing Parameters Screen 1 field 41 for Jobber and List.

The Net option uses the price the items sold to the installer at, including any line discounts given at time of sale.